Grammar of Spoken Brazilian Portuguese

A Grammar of Spoken
Brazilian Portuguese
A GRAMMAR OF SPOKEN
BRAZILIAN PORTUGUESE
by Earl W. Thomas
NASHVILLE
VANDERBILT UNIVERSITY PRESS
1974
Copyright 1974 Vanderbilt University Press

Library or Congress Cataloguing-in-Publication data:
Thomas, Earl W.
1915-1993
A grammar of spoken Brazilian Portuguese.

I. Portuguese language-Dialects-Brazil.
2. Portuguese language-Spoken Portuguese. 3. Portu

guese. 3. Portuguese language-Grammar-1950-I. Title.
PC544.T43
469'.798
ISBN Q-8265-1197-X
Printed in the United States of America

12th Printing 1997
IV
74-16228
Acknowledgments
I wish to thank Professor Alex Severino, my colleague, and Mrs. Severino, and Professor
Alfred Hower ofthe University of Florida, who read the preliminary draft of this book and
made numerous important suggestions and corrections.
My students in the Intensive Portuguese Course of
1 972-73 used the prelirninary draft and
helped me greatly by catching inconsistencies, by making suggestions for explanations and

arrangement of contents, and by testing the exercises. I therefore take this occasion to express
my gratitude to Roger Andreae, Carolyn Brooks, Faith Brooks, Susan Carey, AlIyson Hunter,
Brian Solomon, Marilyn Thomas, Kristen Thweatt, Nancy Tuerff, John Walker, and Rebecca
Webb, as well as to my unofficial student, Mrs. Julius Lachs. AlI of them helped enthusiastically
to catch errors and to improve the texto I believe that all suggestions they made have been
incorporated into the final text.
Finally, thanks are due the Department of Spanish and Portuguese at Vanderbilt Univer
sity for encouragement and aid in this undertaking, especially to Charles Vance, chairman of the
department, and to Sandra Reid, its secretary.
Contents
Introduction
1
Rules for Writing Brazilian Portuguese ............... ................ 2
Syllabification
.
.
.
2
Stress
. .
.
3
Written accents
.
.
4
Pronunciation of Brazilian Portuguese ....... . ............ . . ........ 4
The vowels . ........................ . . ...................... 4
Sounds represented by the vocalic letters ................... ......... 5
The diphthongs
.
. .
.
. .
.
.
6
The consonants
..
...
.
7
Conventional Signs Used in this Text
..
. ..
..
. .
10
.
Lesson I
1. The noun
............. ................................. 11
2. Gender of nouns
3. Plural of nouns
. .
.
5. Contractions of de and em with the definite article

.
11
..................... ........... . . .... . ... 11
4. The definite article

6. Use of em
7. The possessive of nouns .
.
.
.
.
...
. .
.
..
11
12
12
12
Lesson II
8. Regular verbs, first conjugation
9. Personal pronoun subjects
.
.
.
.
..
.
. .
.
.
.
14
14
10. Conjugation of estudar with pronoun subjects .............. ......... 15

11. Irregular verb estar.
.............. . ........................ 15
12. Plurals of nouns in -r, -s, and -z ........................ ......... 15
Lesson III
13. Progressive form of verbs
14. Questions without interrogative words

15. Indefinite articles
..
.. ..
.
16. Contractions with indefinite articles

17. Negation
18. Equivalents of yes and no
.
.
..
.
.... .
.
. . ..
.
.
.
. .
.
.
.
. .
..
.. 17
. . .
.
17
. 17
.... . ............ 17
.
..
. . .
.
.
.
18
18
19. Emphatic affirmative and negative answers ............... . ..... . ... 18
vii
Lesson IV
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Plurais of nouns and adjectives

.
20
Feminine of adjectives; adverbs in -mente. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1
Irregular verb ser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Uses of ser and estar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Omission of indefinite articles
23
Lesson V
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
Present indicative, three conjugations

The imperative
.
Questions with interrogative words .
Requesting assent
. . . . . . . . . .
Position of adjectives
.
.
Formal second-person pronouns . . .
Second-person pronouns as objects .
Lesson VI
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
Irregular verb ir
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
29
Uses of ir
29
Prepositions para and a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Uses of para and a
. . . . . . . .
.
30
Definite article with names of languages
.
30
Lesson VII
37.
38.
39.
40.
.. .
. .
. . .
. . .
.
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
.
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Irregular verb ter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Uses of ter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Possessive adjectives and pronouns, first person . . . . .
Possessive adjectives and pronouns, second person . . .
.
.
.
.
. . . . .
. . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
.
. . .
. . .
.
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
25
25
26
26
26
26
27
Lesson VIII
4 I. Irregular verb fazer
.
42. Uses of fazer .
. . . . . .
4 3 . Estar and weather
.
.
44. Demonstratives
4 5 . Contractions with demonstratives
46. The negatives
. . .
. .
.
Lesson IX
47.
48.
49.
50.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . .
. . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
.
.
.
.
. .
.
.
33
33
33
34
37
38
38
38
38
39
Forms of querer .
41
. 41
Preterit tense
. . . . .
. . .
. .
. .
Uses of the preterit
.
. . .
41
Preposition por
. .
.
42
51. Some uses of por . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
.
.
42
52. Possessive adjectives and pronouns, third person
.
Lesson X
53.
54.
55.
56.
.
45
Forms of dar
.
. . . . . .
. .
Uses of dar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Irregular preterits .
'. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Radical-changing verbs, first conjugation
.
. . .
46
.
viii
Lesson XI
57. Forms of poder
............ , ............................ 49
58. Poder in the preterit
.. . .. .... .. ........ .. .... ....... . ..... 49
59. Simple present for the future. . .. .. .. ... ..... .... .. ...... ... .. 49
60. Personal pronoun objects, first persc)fi
61. Placing of pronoun objects
............ ....... .. .. ... 50
. .
.
. .
50
53
Lesson XII
62. Forms of pr
63. Uses of pr. ............. ..... ... ................ .. ..... 54

64. Verbs derived from pr. ... .... .. ....... .. .. .......... . ..... 54
65. The future subjunctive . . .
.
66. Uses of future subjunctive
.. ........ . .... .... ...... .. ... 54
. . ...... ....... .. ................. 55
67. Object pronouns se, lhe, lhes . ... ... ... ... .. .. ... .. ........... 55
Lesson XIII
68. Forms of dizer
69. Uses of dizer
.. .
.
57
........................................... 57
70. Verb form following a preposition
..
71. Personal pronoun direct objects, third person

72. Regular comparison, adjectives and adverbs
74. Portuguese equivalents of than
73. Irregular comparison, adjectives and adverbs

.
.
.
..
...
.
.
. . .
.
. .
58
58
58
...................... 59
.
. .. ..
.
59
Lesson XIV
75. Forms of ver
62
76. Uses of ver ............................................
77. Pronoun objects of prepositions ..............................

78. Indirect object phrases ....................................
79. Que and qual
. .
-62
63
63
63
66
Lesson XV
80. Saber and caber
81. Uses of saber and caber. ........ . ..... .... .. .... ... .. ...... 66
.
82. Imperfect indicative
..... ...... .. ...... ...... .. ..... .. . ... 67
83. Verbs irregular in the imperfect .

84. Uses of the imperfect
85. Imperfect progressive
. .. .
..
.
..
67
67
. 68
Lesson XVI
86. Preposition a
..
87. Preposition at
......
..
....
. ....
..
71
71
88. Preposition de ... .... ... ........ ... .. ... ............. .... 71
89. Preposition em
..
. .
.
. 72
Lesson XVII
90. Forms of vir
91. Uses ofvir
.
.
. ...
.
ix
..
.
75
75
92. Cardinal numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 5

9 3 . Usage o f cardinal numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 5
94. Time o f day
76
.
Lesson XVIII
95. Verbs irregular in one form pedir ouvir, perder, valer
96. Preposition para
97. Preposition por
-
.. .
.
.
.
. . .
Lesson XIX
98. Forros of ler and crer
.
.
99. Forros of present subjunctive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 00. Subjunctive of will
.
.
.
.
1 0 1 . Notes on spelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
Lesson XX
1 02. Forms of trazer
.
1 03. Radical-changing verbs, third conjugation
.
Lesson XXI
104. Reflexive verbs
. .
1 05. Uses o f reflexive verbs
1 06. Omission of reflexive objects
1 07. Equivalents of the subject one
1 08. Cardinal numbers above 1 00 .
1 09. Ordinal numbers
.
.
.
83
83
84
84
87
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
79
79
80
91
91
. . . 92
92
. . . 92
. . . 93
Lesson XXII
1 1 0. The personal infinitive
. .
.
96
1 1 1 . Use of the personal infinitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
1 1 2. Radical-changing n6uns and adjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
.
Lesson XXIII
1 1 3. Irregular present subjunctives
1 1 4. Subjunctive of emotion
. .
1 1 5 . Past participles
.
1 1 6. Irregular past participles
1 1 7. The passive voice
. . . .
.
.
.
.
Lesson XXV
1 22. Ve rbs rir and sorrir
1 23. Forros of imperfect subjunctive
1 24. Use of imperfect subjunctive
1 25 . Subjunctive in adverb clauses
.
.
.
.
. .
.
. . . .
.
Lesson XXIV
1 18. Verbs in -air
.
.
1 1 9. Subjunctive with impersonal expressions
1 20. Infinitive with impersonal expressions .
1 2 1 . Subjunctive of doubt or disbelief
.
.
. . .
.
.
.
. .
. 101
1 02
.
. 1 02
.
1 02
. . . . . . . . . . 1 03
.
.
_
.
.
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
.
1 07
1 07
1 07
1 07
111
111
111
1 12
Lesson XXVI
126. Forms of haver
127. Uses of haver
128. Futurity
.
.
129. Conditional tense
. .
.
..............................117
130. Pronoun objects with future and conditional
..
116
117
118
118
123
123
Lesson XXVII
131. Verbs in -duzir
132. Perfect tenses
...
133. English equivalents of perfect tenses

134. Verb forms used after se (if)
. . .
.
.
.. ..
125
129
129
130
130
131
.124
Lesson XXVIII
135. Verbs in -ear
136. Verbs in -uirand -oer
... ... . . .
.
137. Position of object pronouns in perfect tenses

138. Relative pronouns
139. Subjunctive in rela tive c1auses
.
.
. .
.
..
..
Lesson XXIX
140. Subjunctive with relative adverbs
141. Subjunctive wi th talvez
142. Subjunctive in indirect commands

143. "Let it be as it may."
. .
.
.
.
. ..
...... . .. .
144. Diminutives and augmentatives
. .
.
..
.
. . .
.
134
134
135
135
.. . 135
.
Appendix
145. Conjugation of regular verbs
....
146. Forms of ter used as auxiliaries of the perfect tenses
149. Special types of verbs

150-172. Irregular verbs
..
...
173. Irregular past participles
.
.
174. Literary personal pronoun objects, third person
..
.
. .
.
. . .
. .
139
.................141
147. Forms of haverused as auxiliaries of the perfect tenses

148. Radical-changing verbs .
.. .....
.
..
.
. . .
.
141
141
....143
144
149
.149
175. Pronouns of the old second person .............................150

Abbreviations used in the Vocabularies
English-Portuguese Vocabulary
Portuguese-English Vocabulary
..
. ..
.
xi
...
. .
.
..... . .
.
... . .
. ...
.
150
. ... 150
.
. 165
.
Introduction
Portuguese is the language of Portugal,including a large part of the people of its African and
Asiatic territories,and of Brazil. There are also nuclei of Portuguese speakers in the former
Portuguese territories in India and Indonesia and the United States. It is the language of more
than 1 10,000,000 people and is thus one of the principal languages of the world.
There are several dialects and regional variants of Portuguese,as of most other languages.
The most notable differences are found within Portugal and some of its older overseas terri
tories. But the most important differences to the student of the language are those between the
Portuguese of Portugal and its overseas provinces on the one hand and that of Brazil on the
other. The pronunciation of Brazil is in some respects more archaic than that of modem
Portugal, in others more innovative. The forms of verbs,nouns, and adjectives are generally the
sarne in the two countries. But there are considerable differences in vocabulary and in syntax,
especially in the spoken forms of the language. Within Brazil there are also regional differences,
especially in pronunciation. However, Brazilians from any part of the country have no diffi
cuIty in understanding people from any other region.
The speech of east central Brazil, of which Rio de Janeiro is the principal center, is used as
the basis of the present text,for several reasons. It is the speech with which most North Ameri
cans are likely to have contact. It is ais o the type of speech which has most influence- within
Brazil. The student is not likely to have difficulty with the speech of any region if he has be
come accustomed to that of Rio.
Any language which possesses a highly developed literature will show a number of differences
between the language of books and the speech of the average educated person. ln the Portuguese
of Brazil the differences are rather large. Contrary to popular belief,the spoken language is
usually more complex and more difficult for foreigners. However,a rather large proportion of
American students of Portuguese will want to make use of it in oral communication. Besides,
thorough learning of any present-day language is best acquired through oral leaming of the
normal spoken language. For these reasons, this text is based on the language as it is spoken by
Brazilians of moderate education (and largely by the most highly educated as well), even in
some cases in which those forms or constructions are not accepted by authorities on normative
grammar. When the usages of literary writing differ from the forms given here, it is felt that
they can best be leamed later, in courses on composition. Thus, this text makes frequent ref
erences to the usages of BF (brasileiro falado, spoken Brazilian Portuguese).
For the sarne reasons,the vocabulary,both in Portuguese and in English,attempts to give
the words and idiomatic constructions most used in speech. Thus in English, the verb "arrive"
is given as the equivalent of chegar, but also o'her translations which are more frequent in
spoken English, e.g., "come," "get here," etc. Sirnilarily, the distinction between "Let's go"
and "Let us go" is maintained, although literary English blurs it.
An important innovation of the present text is the order of presentation. ln spite of all the
attempts of writers of texts for the study of modem languages to introduce radical new
1
methods in recent years, practically all of them present the tenses of the verbs more or less in
the "logical" order developed by the Roman grammarians. This is a reasonable order for the
study of one's own language, but it is not the order of need in any foreign language-an order
which varies somewhat from one language to another. The present writer has had considerable
opportunity to observe the order in which the Brazilian child learns the forms of his verbs, an
order which is undoubtedly dictated by the necessities of everyday speech. For example, after
the infinitive and the present indica tive (both sim pie and progressive), the Brazilian child learns
the preterit rapidly, then the future subjunctive. He uses this last tense with great ease and
correctness at an age when he knows only a few forms of the imperfect indicative and is con
fused by the present subjunctive. On the other hand, he has very little use for the forms of the
future indica tive and the conditional, except in a few short verbs. This text therefore introduces
the future subjunctive early, but the future indicative and the conditional are presented much
later.
The case of the personal infinitive is somewhat different. It is a very popular form in speech.
It is somewhat difficult for the foreign student to grasp, however, since its use cannot be very
well covered by rules. It is also always possible to express any sentence correctly by using other
forms. But the usual place of the personal infinitive-near the end of the text-is too late for
effective learning through practice. Therefore, a compromise solution places this form some
what farther from the end.
This book does not assume that the instructor will use Portuguese exclusively from the
beginning of the course. The practce gained from using and hearing the language from the
beginning does not make up for the time which is necessarily lost in advancing through the
course. There is a considerable amount of oral practice found in the exercises from the be
ginning, if the instructor will require these exercises to be done orally, rather than in writing.
The reduced amount of practice in the early lessons will be more than made up in the follow
ing ones, as soon as the student has acquired the basic forms and enough vocabulary to say
something. The exercises are numerous and varied; the instructor may choose which he wishes
to use if he does not have time for all.
The text is planned for use in a three-hour course lasting two semesters. It is assumed that
a reading text will be introduced sometime before the end of the first semester, largely as a basis
of conversational practice. If reading is begun early, the assignments will necessarily be short,
so that the student can study them intensively and use the new words and expressions in oral
practice.
By rnidyear or thereabouts it should be possible to switch completely to Portuguese for
everything but grammatical explanations, with good comprehension on the part of the students,
as well as with reasonable ability to make brief answers in Portuguese. The three-hour, two
semester course in which this text is used serves to prepare students to take courses in language
and literature given wholly in Portuguese.
Rules for Writing Brazilian Portuguese
Syllabification
Words are divided into syllables according to the following rules:
1 . A single consonant always goes with the following syllable. ln pronunciation, this applies to
o animal o a-ni-ma-l. The
fmal/ of anima/ has, therefore, the sound of an initial/, rather than that of final/o
a fmal consonant followed by a word beginning with a vowel:
2. When a consonant is followed by

syllable:
a-bro, du-p/o, i-gua/.
r, I,
or consonantal
u,
both letters go with the following
3. Any other group of two consonants is divided, one forming part of the preceding syllable,
the other going with the following: ai-to, ar-de, es-te.
4. Groups of three consonants are always made up of s or x (pronounced like s,) a stop, and
I, r, or consonantal u. ln this case the first consonant is a part of the preceding syllable, the
other two of the second : Ias-tro, ex-tra, res-guar-do.
5. The consonants p, g, b, d, and t before a stop consonant, initial p before s, b anywhere be
fore s, and c before stops in some words, require a vowel i to be pronounced after them, and
form a separate syallable in pronunciation. This vowel is not written, but is universally pron
nounced p(i)neu, ap(i)to, ob(i)ter, ad(i)mirvel, arit(i)mtica, dig(i)no, p(i)sicologia, ob(i)servar,
ac(i)ne.
6. dj, ti, ch, lh, and nh represent single consonant sounds, and go with the following syllable in
pronunciation. But dj is separated in writing.
Stress
1. Words which end in a single vowel a, e, or o, or in one of these letters followed by m, s, or ns,
are normally stressed on the next-to-last syllable: fala, falam, come, homem, homens, coco, cocos,
rio, Maria.
2. Words which end in a single vowel u or i, or in one of these followed by m, s, or ns, are
normally stressed on the last syllable: peru, perus, comum, comuns, quali, quatis, assim, sagins.
3. Words whose final syllable contains a diphthong, oral or nasal, or a diphthong followed by
s, are normally stressed on the last syllable: comeu, falei, mingau, papai, papis, irmo, capites, .
lies.
4 . Words which end in any consonant except m or sare normally stressed on the last syllable:
papel, falar.
Written Accents
1. The accents used in writing Portuguese are the circumflex, the acute accent, the grave accent,
and the tilde.
2. The tilde is written over certain vowels and diphthongs to indicate nasality. They aIs o indi
cate the stress, unless another accent is written on the word: irm , irmo, lies, pes, rgos,
bnos.
3 . The circumflex accent is written over the close pronunciations of the vowels a, e, o, when
circumstances require a written accent.
4. The acute accent is written over the open sounds of these letters, and over u and i, when
circumstances require the use of a written accent.
5. The grave accent does not indicate stress. It is used over the letter a in certain cases to show
that the word is a contraction.
The accents are written in the following circumstances:
1. Over the vowel of a monosyllable which is stressed in the sentence: v, l, ps, ns, s, p,
p, etc.
2. Over final a, e, or o, followed or not by m, s, ns, when the final vowel is stressed: av, av,
caj, Pel, ingls, tambm, vintns.

3
3.
Over the stressed vowel of a word ending in
than
or
s,
u, i, or a diphthong, or in a consonant other

jri, Vnus, fceis, rgo, fcil, impar, ltex.
but not stressed on the last syllable:
4. Over a stressed vowel when it occurs in the third syllable from the end: constncia, inde
pendncia, cmara, xicara, Mrio, sculo, rvore.

S. The acute accent is always written over the stressed vowel of the diphthongs i, u, i, to
distinguish them from the diphthongs in which the stressed vowel is closed:
6. The circumflex
vo, vos, perdo.
7.
accent is written over elos e o when it is followed immediately by rIDalo:
The circumflex accent is written over certain third-person plural verb forms whose corre
sponding singular form has the vowel

(s. l),
8.
ris, cu, di.
vem
(s.
: tm (s. tem), contm (s. contm), vm (s. vem), lem
v).
The acute accent is written over
or
i when it
does not forrn a diphthong with the preceding
vowel, but forrns a separate stressed syllable. However, the accent is omitted before nh, and be
fore I,
but
9.
m, n, r, and z when they are in the sarne

tainha, Raul, juiz, ainda, ruim, construir.
syllable as the vowel:
sade, juzo, viva, baa,
The following words have a written accent to distinguish them from other words otherwise
spelled the sarne:
pde, pret. of poder

pr, verb
pra, verb
plo, noun
plo, verb forrn
plo, noun
1 0.
Cf.
Cf.
pode, present
por, preposition
para, preposition
pelo, contraction
pelo, contraction
polo, archaic contraction
The grave accent is used to distinguish contractions of the preposition a with the feminine
forms of the definite articIe, or with ali forms of the demonstrative aquele, from these words
when not contracted. This accent never indicates stress.
, s, quele, quela,
etc., incIude the
preposition a.
II. The dieresis is used over the letter u preceded by g or q and followed by e or i, when u is
pronounced:
freqente, liqido, agen tar.
Pronunciation of Brazilian Portuguese

The student can acquire a good pronunciation of Portuguese from the instructor, from
tapes, or from native speakers. The following statements will help him to remember which sound
is used in each case, after he has learned to distinguish and reproduce them. The descriptions
given here are necessarily only approximate.
The vowels
There are seven oral and five nasal vowel sounds used in Portuguese, with variants of some of
them used in certain positions in the word.
1.
If it is written with a tilde, e.g., irm,
2.
When followed by
or
vowel is nasal in the following circumstances:
lies.
in the sarne syllable, e.g.,
sonant is usually not pronounced.
campo, canto, entender.
The nasal con
3 . When stressed and followed by m or n, even though these consonants begin a new syllable
and are pronounced as consonants, e.g., mano, teme.
4. Always before nh, e.g., tenho, manh, senhor.
5 . Optionally, if unstressed and both preceded and followed by m or n, e.g., menino, mame.
Sounds represented by the vocalic letters

a 1 . An open vowel like Spanish or Italian a, used in the stressed syllable or preceding, when it is
not nasal. Similar to English ah. Examples: p, m, cavalo, papagaio.
2. A sound intermediate between the preceding and the sound of a in English safa. It is found
in syllables following the stress. Examples: leva, xcara.
3. Nasal , the sound of the preceding, nasalized. Similar to the vowel of English hunh?
Examples: irm, canta, tomamos.
e 1 . Close e, similar to English e of they, but without the sound ofy. It is more elosed than any
pronunciation of this letter in Spanish, and must be elearly distinguished from open e (2, be
low). It occurs in stressed syllables of some words and is the most usual sound of this letter
when it precedes the stressed syllable . Examples: l, medo, verde, invejar, querer.
2. Open e is midway between the vowels of English bed and bad. I t occurs frequently in the
stressed syllable (one must learn whether a stressed e is open or elose). It occurs in unstressed
syllables in the following circumstances :
a. ln augmentatives and diminutives formed from words having open e in the stressed syl
lable. Examples: velhinho, from velho, pezo, from p.
b . ln adverbs in -mente formed from adjectives having this vowel in the stressed syllaOle.
Example: completamente.
c. ln the syllable or syllables preceding open e in the stressed syllable. Example: perereca
(alI three e s)
'
d. ln the sufnx -velo Example : impossvel.

3 . Nasal . This is the sound of elose e nasalized. But note that fmal -em is a diphthong. Ex
amples: entendo.
4. Like Portuguese i, in the following circumstances:
a. When unstressed before a vowel. Examples: compreendo, teatro.
b . ln the syllable preceding stressed i. Menino, devia, feliz.
C. ln initial position, especially before s or x and a consonant, and in the prefix ex- before
a vowel. Enorme, espao, extenso, exame.
d. ln unstressed monosyllables. Me, lhe, se, de.

e . ln many other words in which there is no elear reason. Pequeno, Dezembro, dezesseis
(frrst e in each case).
f. ln unstressed final position. Face,
doce, leite.
1. The usual pronunciation is similar to English ee of meet. It is somewhat more tense than in
English and pronounced farther forward in the mouth. Cf. Spanish or French i. Vi, si, fizesse.
2. Unstressed before a vowel, i usually represents the sound of Englishy. Iate, ia-i, iara.
5
3. Unstressed between vowels, i is often doubled, one part forming a diphthong with the pre
ceding vowel, the other pronounced like English y. Saia, bia, caio.
4. Nasal f, the first sound above, nasalized. Fim, lngua, findar.
o
1. elose o, sinlar to English o in obey. It is found in stressed syllables in many words, and is
the most usual value in unstressed syllables, except the final one. Pr, vov, ovelha.
2. Open o, sinlar to the vowel of English ought. It occurs in the stressed syllable of many
words (one must learn whether the o of a stressed syllable is open or elose). ln syllables pre
ceding the stress, it is found in the following circumstances:
a. ln augmentatives and diminutives formed from words having this vowel. Copinho (from
copo),olhinhos (from olhos).
b. ln adverbs in -mente based on adjectives having this vowel. Somente (frem s).
c. ln syllables preceding stressed open o. cot, forrobod.
This vowel is also used in the word dona, even though it is stressed before a nasal con
sonant. This is a unique case.
3. Like Portuguese u in the following cases:
a. Usually when it occurs in the syllable before stressed i. Donnimos, engoli.

b. ln many words in which the reasons are not clear. This pronunciation varies greatly
among the different regions of Brazil. Jogar, fogo, poder, colgio.
c. ln final unstressed position. Pato, lado, falo.
d. ln unstressed monosyllables. No, nos, do.
4. Nasal . The elose o nasalized. Bom, conto, bomba.
u
1. Usually like the 00 in English root, but with the lips more rounded. Tu, puro, rural
2. Unstressed before a vowel, and especially following g or q, and followed by a or o, like
English w. U, Uaups, guarda, quatro.
3. Nasal , the first sound given above, nasalized. Um, conjunto, fumo.
The diphthongs
There are numerous diphthongs in Portuguese, both oral and nasal. They are formed by a
combination of two vowels pronounced in one syllable. ln each case, the second vowel is u or i
and unstressed. The first, or stressed vowel should be pronounced elearly, with the quality de
scribed in the presentation of the vowels.
The oral diphthongs are:
au
pau, mau, Austrlia
ai
pai, aipim
eu
eu, meu, seu (with elose e).
ei
sei, leite (with elose e). Note: The glide vowel i is usually lost in the suffix -eiro, -eira, and in
unstressed syllables.
cu, chapu (with open e, always written with the accent).
hotis, ris (with open e, always written with the accent).

6
iu
ou
sentiu, viu.
vou, sou. Note The pronunciation is as in English know in stressed syJlables. It is usuaJly Iike
Portuguese close o (without the u) in unstressed syJlables. It is usually pronounced u when
unstressed in the preterits and derived forms of saber, caber, and trazer.
oi
i
The vowel o is close. Boi, coisa, moita.

The vowel o is open, as in English boy. It is always written with the acute accent. Mi, di,
lenis.
ui
Note that stress is on the first vowel. Uivar, continui.

The nasal diphthongs are : (Both vowels are nasal in these.)
This diphthong is written -am when it is unstressed in the final syJlable of a verb formo Po,
co, capito, falam.
This diphthong is also written i in the interior of a few words. Me, pes, capites, cibra.
-em
(pronounced i). Written en before final s. It is found only in the last syJlable of a word, and
may be stressed or not. Tm, tm, bens, comem
oe
(oi nasalized) Lies, pes, caes.
ui
This diphthong occurs only in muito, an archaic short form of it, mui, and in variant pronuncia
tion of a few other words.
The consonants
b
Similar to its sound in English. Do not pronounce intervocalic b as in Spanish. Nabo, roubo,
bobo.
Brazilians never end a syJlable in b, although many words are so written. They add a vowel i,
forrning anOlher syllable. Abstrato, substituir, sob, abnegado.
1 . Like English s when followed by e or i. Certo, cinco.

2. Like English k before any other letter. When it comes at the end of a syJlable, it is often
foJlowed by the vowel i, especially at the end of the stressed syJlable or of the word. Clava,
crer, ca"o; acne, chic.
This is used only b efore a, o, or u and has the sound of s . Ao, aude, Aores.
ch
Like sh in English. Ch, acho, chamar.
1. Similar to the English d, but with the tip of the tongue touching the upper teeth. Do not
pronounce intervocalic d as in Spanish. Dado, dedo.
2. Before the sound i (however it is written, or even if it is not written) like English j. This
sound is not used in many parts of Brazil, nor in Portugal. Digo, bode, admirao.
This is also the sound of the combination dj. Djacir, adjetivo..
This consonant may not end a syJlable in Brazilian pronunciation. When it is so written, a vowel
i foJlows it, forrning an extra syllable. Admirar, advir.
Similar to English. Chefe, f.
1. Like the second g of garage, when followed by e or i. Geral, gente, girar.

7
2. Before any other letter, like g in English go. Do not pronounce intervocalic g as in Spanish.
Grande, glria, garra. G does not end a syllable in pronunciation. Where it is so written, a vowel
i is added, but without affecting the pronunciation of g. Digno, significar, dogma.
gu
1. Before e and i, like gingo. ln a few words, a trema above the letter u indicates it is to be
pronounced. Guerra, guincho, agentar.

2. Before a or o, as gw. Guarda.
Silent in ali cases, except as a part of the digraphs ch, lh, nh.
Like the second g of garage, in ali cases. Jeito, haja.
Not used in Portuguese except in foreign names
1. At the beginning of the syllable, as in Spanish or French. L, l.
2. At the end of a syllable, as in English in the sarne position. Sol, ai.
lh
1. Like Spanish II in Old Castile. Similar to /li of English million. Do not use the pronunciations
of Spanish II heard in most American countries. Lhama, filha.

2. Like initial/, in the words lhe, lhes and whenever nh, Ih or consonantal i follows in the next
syllable. Filhinho, folhelho, alheio.
1. At the beginning of a syllable, as in English. Mo, fome.
2. At the end of a syllable, m is not pronounced as a consonant, but merely nasalizes the pre
ceding vowel, Bom, bamba, falam.
1. At the beginning of a syllable, as in English. No, dona.
2. At the end of a syllable, but not at the end of a word, it is not pronounced as a consonant,
but merely nasalizes the preceding vowel. Canta, onze . However, it is usually pronounced in the
verbal ending -ndo. Falando.
3. ln final position in the word it may be pronounced as a consonant or it may merely nasalize
the preceding vowel. psilon, hfen, clon.
nh
1. At the beginning of a word, like Spanish fi, similar to ny in canyon. Nhame, nhoque. Some
regions of Brazil do not use this sound initially, replacing it with consonantal i. lame, ioque.
2. Between vowels, like nasalizedy. Manh, cunha. The vowel which precedes it is also nasal
ized.
p
qu
Similar to English p, but using less breath. Pai, roupa.
1. Before e or i, like English k. But if a dieresis is written over u, the prounciation is like
kw. Many words vary from one region to another. Quero, quis, freqente, qesto or questo.
2. Before a or o, like kw. Quatro, quota.
8
1.
ln initial position, when written double between vowels, or after n, I, or s, most of Brazil
uses a pronuneiation whieh may approximate any of the varieties of Spanish j. The four southern
most states of Brazil and most of Portugal use instead a strong trill of the tip of the tongue, like
Spanish initial or double r. Rio, carro, guelra, Henrique, Israel.
2.
When written singly between vowels, it is pronouneed with a single stroke of the tip of the
tongue against the upper gums. It is very siITlar to English d, exeept that the tip of the tongue
is eurved to produee the typical r quality. Pra, caro. This is the sound of Spanish r in this posi
tion.
3. At the end of a syllable, i.e., before a eonsonant, either the first pronuneiation given in (1)
above, or that given in
(2) may be
used. Porta, carne.
4. At the end of a word, either of these pronunciations may be used. However, most Brazilians
do not pronounee a final r at aIl. Falar, vir, conhecer.
1.
At the beginning of a word, foIlowing a eonsonant (with a few exeeptions), or written double
between vowels, s has the sound of EngIsh s in sink. Senso, passo, observar.
2.
Written single between vowels, like English
z.
Caso, coisa.
3. ln final position, not followed by another word, like s in sink (in Rio and some other areas,
like a weak English sh). Homens, ns.
4. Before a eonsonant within a word or final before a eonsonant in a following word, it varies
aeeording to the type of eonsonant which follows. Before a voiceless eonsonant (e, f, p, q, s,
t, eh, x), like s in /ist (in Rio and some other areas, like a weak sh). Risco, caspa, esquilo, as
camas, trs coraes.
Before a voieed eonsonant (b, d, g,j, 1, m, n, v, z), like English
(in Rio and some other areas,
like a weak s in measure). Desde, cosmos, as belas damas, as vacas.
5. ln final position before a word beginning with a vowel, like
(in ali Portuguese-speaking
areas). Vamos andar, os outros.
6. ln the prefix trans before a vowel, and in the word obsquio and its derivatives, like z.
Transao, obsequiar.
sc
t
Like s (before e or i). Nascer, descer.
1.
Similar to English t at the beginning of a syllable, exeept that the tip of the tongue touehes
the upper teeth, and Iess breath is used. Pato, tomo.
2.
Before the sound i (no matter how it is written, or even if it is not written), like the ch of
cheese. Pote, tive, aritmtica . ln many areas of Brazil this sound is not used, the letter being
pronouneed approximately the sarne in ali situations.
ti
This is a single eonsonant. The tongue assumes the position to pronounee t, but releases the air
behind it by separating the sides of the tongue from eontaet with the upper part of the moutl)..
Atlas, Atlntico.
Similar to English v, but more energetie. Vou, vivo.

Used only in proper names of foreign origino It is pronouneed like English
in some of them,
e.g., Wilson, but like v in others, e.g., Waldemar.
1. At the beginning of a syllable, like English sh in sheep. Xcara, enxada.

2. ln the prefIx ex- when followed by a vowel, like English z. Exame, exausto.
3. Preceding a consonant, like s (in Rio and some other areas, like a weak sh). Extra.
4. Between vowels in a few words only, like ss. Trouxe, mximo, prximo, and words derived
from them.
5. Between vowels in a few words only, like ks. Fixo, nexo, fluxo, flexo, sexo, and derived
words.
6. ln the prefIx ex- meaning former, as is (or iz before a voiced sound). ex-professor, ex-maestro.
7. ln fInal position, usually ks. ltex.
Used only in foreign words and names, pronounced as in the language from which it is taken.
1. At the beginning of a syllable, like English z. Zero, zunir.

2. At the end of a syllable or word, exactly as a Portuguese s would be pronounced in that
position. Like s in faz, luz, faz tudo; like z in fez um, traz barro.
Conventional signs used in this text
ln many cases it is necessary to indicate certain pronunciations which the spelling does not
clarify. These are indicated in the vocabularies of each lesson and in the general vocabulary be
tween slant !ines, thus IiI, l/, etc., to represent the stressed vowel.
The open sounds of the vowels e and o are indicated by the acute accent: l/, l/. The
closed sounds are represented by the circumflex accent: l/, l/.
Words placed in parentheses in the exercises are explanations, sometimes translations, of the
words given: He got there (arrived) at two o'clock.
Words placed in brackets are not to be translated: He went [over] to his friend's house.
A tilde placed OVeI a vowel between slant !ines indicates that it is a nasal vowel: imenso
/msuj.
10
Lesson I
1.
The noun. The Portuguese noun has gender and number. lt is either masculine or feminine,
and may be singular or plural. It has no case forms to express the usage as subject, object, etc.
Gender of nouns. The genders are simply classifications of the nouns which require agree
ment of adjectives and pronouns. The gender is obvious in most cases, from either the me.aning
or the formo Nouns which refer to male beings are usually masculine, and those which refer to
female beings are usually feminine, without regard to the form of the noun.
2.
man
woman
masculine
feminine
homem
mulher
The gender of other nouns is often easy to recognize from the formo Most nouns which
end in -a, dade, 'gem, or -o are ferninine: casa, universidade, viagem, aco. Those which end
in -o, -me, or stressed - are usually masculine: livro, nome, xar.
3.
PluraIs of nouns. Nouns have plural forms with which all articles and other adjectives must
agree. The usual sign of the plural is -s. However, the plural form sometimes embodies other
modifications in addition to the fmal S.
a. Nouns which end in a single vowel, oral or nasal, or in an oral diphthong (not a nasal diph
thong), simply add S.
livro
casa
irm
cu
book
house
sister
sky, heaven
livros
casas
irms
cus
books
houses
sisters
skies, heavens
b. Nouns ending in m change this letter to n before adding s; this change is purely ortho
graphical and has no effect on the pronunciation.
homem
jardim
man
garden
homens
jardins
men
gardens
4.
The defmite article. The Portuguese equivalent of the has four forms to express the two
genders, each in the singular and plural. The form must agree with its noun in gender and num
ber.
o homem
a casa
the man
the house
os homens
as casas
the men
the houses
a. Pronunciation of the definite article. The masculine forms are pronounced /u/ , /us/. The
-s of the plural forms is pronounced like the double s of kiss before a voiceless consonant
(c, f, p, q, x, s, t, and r) at the beginning of the next word. Before a voiced consonant (b, d,
g, j, I, m, n, v, z), or before a vowel, it is pronounced like English Z.
os homens /z/
as casas /s/
as mesas /z/
Beforej (or g when pronounced likej), x, eh, s, or Z. the final -s of the article is u sually ab
sorbed and not heard as a separate sound. Asjane/as, as xcaras, as chaves, os sacos, os zeros.
11
s.
Contractions of de and em with the definite article. These two prepositions form con
tractions with the various forms of the definite article. Those formed with de are obligatory;
those formed with em are optional, but are usual in speech.
em + o no /nu/
em + a na /na/
em + os nos /nus/
em + as nas /nas/
de + o do /du/
de + a da /da/
de + os dos /dus/
de + as das /das/
Examples: do homem
da casa
6.
of the man
of the house
Use of em. Some of the principal uses of em are the following:

a.
As the equivalent of English in, referring to place or time.

Na casa
No livro
ln summer
No vero
ln the house
ln the book
b . Movement to the inside, English into.

Ele entra na Casa.
He enters (goes into) the house.
c. English on, meaning either on top of or on the surface of.

Est na mesa.
Est na parede.
It is on the table.
It is on the wall
d. The equivalent of at when used of place.

Joo est na escola.
Eles esto em casa.
John is at school.
They are at home.
The possessive of nouns. Since the Portuguese noun has no case forms, possession is ex
pressed by the preposition de placed before the noun denoting the possessor. The phrase fol
lows the thing possessed.
7.
A mesa do professor
The teacher's desk
Vocabulary
Prepositions
de /di/
em
of, fram
in, on, at
Nouns
a aula /aula/
o professor //
a porta //
a cadeira /ra/
o estudante
a estudante
12
atrs de
perto // de
behind
near
Verbs
class, classroom
teacher, professor
door, doorway
chair
student
student
est
esto
(he, she, it) is

(they) are
Phrases
em casa
na casa
na cidade
at home
in the house
in town, in the city,
downtown
o livro
o homem
o jardim
a janela ll
a casa
o menino Irnil
a menina I mil
a cidade
a mesa ll
o portugus
book
man
garden, lawn, front
yard
window
house, home
boy
girl
city
table, desk
Portuguese
Exercise A. Practice saying these expressions at a normal speed; be able to give them in either
language on hearing them in the other:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
I I.
12 .
1 3.
14.
15.
16 .
1 7.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25 .
Os livros dos estudantes.

O livro do professor.
A mesa do professor.
A porta da aula Idaula/.
A cadeira do estudante.
A cadeira est n a aula. Ista naulal
A cadeira est atrs da porta.
O estudante est na cadeira.
O professor est na aula.
O homem est na porta.
Os estudantes esto na janela.
Os homens da cidade.
Os homens esto na cidade.
A casa do estudante.
O estudante est em casa.
O livro est na cadeira.
As mesas esto em casa.
As janelas da aula.
O livro est na mesa.
O estudante est atrs da porta.
O homem est perto da janela.
Os meninos esto no jardim.
A menina est atrs do professor.
As casas da cidade.
A menina na janela.
The students' books.

The teacher's book.
The teacher's desk.
The door of the classroom.
The student's chair.
The chair is in the classroom.
The chair is behind the door.
The student is on (in) the chair.
The teacher is in the room.
The man is in the doorway.
The students are at the window.
The men of (from) the city.
The men are in the city (downtown).
The student's house.
The student is at home.
The book is on the chair.
The tables are at (my) home.
The windows of the classroom.
The book is on the table.
The student is behind the door.
The man is near the window.
The children are on the lawn.
The girl is behind the teacher.
The houses of the city.
The girl at the window.
Exercise B. Give the plural forms of the following expressions, pronouncing the S of the article
as indicated:
1.A aula Iz/
2. O menino Izl
3. A porta /s/
4. A janela l-I
5 . O homem Izl
9.A cadeira /s/
6. A mesa Izl
10.O livro Iz/
7.A cidade l -I
8.O jardim 1-/
12.O estudante /zl
I I . O professor Isl
Exercise C. Put in the plural ali possible words:

I . O livro do menino.
4. A janela da casa.
2. A porta da aula.
5 . A cadeira da estudante.
3.O homem atrs da mesa.
6. A porta do jardim.
13
Exercise D. Pronounce the following pairs of words, distinguishing the quality of the stressed
vowel:
//
//
//
//
seca
peco
governo
comeo
desprezo
vedo
teso
sede
rego
peso
seca
peco
governo
comeo
desprezo
vedo
teso
sede
rego
peso
porto
olho
gosto
posso
fosse
toco
boto
bordo
dose
fora
vov
porto
olho
gosto
poo
fosse
toco
boto
bordo
doze
fora
vov
Lesson II
8.
Regular verbs of the first conjugation. The infmitive (e.g., to speak) of the first conjugation has the ending -ar. There are six personal endings, corresponding to the three persons in
the singular and plural. However, the second person plural is completely archaic, never used in
conversation. The second person singular has only lirnited use, and it is not necessary for the
use of the foreign student. The complete conjugation, in ali six forms, is given in the Appendix,
but only the four forms usual in conversation in Brazil are given here. The third-person forms
are used for the second person, usually along with the new subject pronouns.
To form the simple present indicative, remove the infinitive ending -ar and add to the stern the
folIowing endings:
Falar
to speak
fal o
fal a
fal amos
fal am
I speak
you speak, he speaks
we speak
they speak
Important note: These forms are not used in BF to mean I am speaking, etc.
9.
The personal pronoun subjects. The forms of the personal pronouns used as subjects of
the verb are:
eu
voc
ele
ela
I
you (sing.)
he
she
ns
vocs
eles
elas
we
you (pI.)
they (masc.)
they ( fem.)
Voc and vocs are the familiar or intimate second-person subjects. The more formal will be
given later.
The subject it is not usually expressed. I f it refers to a noun, it may be expressed by ele or ela,
according to the gender of the noun.
The subject pronouns may be ornitted whenever the subject is clear from the contexto How
ever, they are used more often than in Spanish and may be used at any time, but are not
generally repeated immediately with a second verbo
14
10.
Conjugaton of the verb estudar in the simple present indicative, with subject pronouns.
Estudar to study
voc estuda
you study
ele estuda
he studies
ns estudamos
we study
vocs estudam
you study
eles estudam
they study
The irregular verb estar, to be.
11.
1 2.
I study
eu estudo
eu estou
I am
ns estamos
we are
voc est
you are
vocs esto
you are
ele est
he is
eles esto
they are
Plurals of nouns. Nouns which end in -r, in z or in -s preceded by a stressed vowel, add
-
-es to form the plural.

os professores
o professor
a flor
as flores
o portugus
os portugueses
a voz
as vozes
Vocabulary
Nouns
o ingls pI. ingleses
Englishman, English
Jos /juz/
Joseph, Joe
o dia
day
Maria
Mary
a noite
night
o Rio (de Janeiro)
Rio (de Janeiro)
a manh
morning
a flor //
flower, blossom
o rapaz
(older) boy, fellow
a voz //
voice
a moa //
girl, young woman,
o trem
train
"lady"
Preposition
with
a escola /6/
school
a gua
water
o leite
milk
mas /mais/
but
o caf
coffee; caf
e /i/
and
o caf da manh
breakfast
com
Conjunctions
Verbs
Adverbs
falar
speak, taIk
trabalhar
work
there, over there
estudar
study
para l /pra l/
there (to that place)
passar
pass; spend (time)
l atrs
back there
brincar
play; "kid"
perto //
near, nearby
ficar
stay, remain ; be
depressa //
quick, fast
onde
where
atrs
back, behind
(permanently 10cated)
15
Expressions
Bom dia
Boa noite
Tomar o caf da manh
Good morning
Good evening; good night
Have breakfast, eat breakfast
Exercise A. Read, putting ali possible words in the plural form:

1 . Ele fala ingls.
2. Eu trabalho na cidade.
3. Voc estuda portugus.
4. O menino brinca no jardim.
5 . O rapaz fica em casa.
6. O estudante est na escola.
7. Onde voc toma caf?

8. Onde est o trem?
9. A flor est na mesa.
1 0. Onde voc passa a noite?
1 1 . O ingls fica no trem.
1 2. A moa estuda na escola.
Exercise B. Read for practice at a normal speed; be able to give the equivalent of either lang
uage in the other, orally :
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1 0.
11.
1 2.
1 3.
1 4.
15.
1 6.
17.
18.
19.
20.
O homem est na cadeira.

A menina brinca na escola.
O professor passa o dia em casa.
Jos e Maria esto na aula.
O rapaz fica n o trem.
O estudante toma gua.
As moas passam para l.
Os professores ficam na aula.
Voc estuda ingls?
A escola fica na cidade.
O professor fica atrs da mesa.
Ele toma caf com leite.
A menina fala na aula.
O rapaz est no Rio de Janeiro.
Eu no fico atrs.
Onde ele toma o caf da manh?
Jos trabalha com o professor.
Jos e Maria estudam portugus.
Maria est no jardim.
Ela est na cadeira atrs de Jos.
The man is on the chair.

The girl plays at school.
The teacher spends the day at home.
Joe and Mary are in class.
The boy stays on the train.
The student drinks water.
The girls go over there.
The teachers stay in the (class) room.
Do you study English?
The school is downtown.
The teacher stays behind the desk.
He takes rnilk in his coffee.
The girl speaks (up) in class.
The boy is in Rio de Janeiro.
I don't stay (lag) behind.
Where does he have breakfast?
Joe works with the teacher.
Joe and Mary study Portuguese.
Mary is in the yard.
She is in the chair behind J oe.
Exercise C. Say in Portuguese:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1 0.
16
He is at school.
They speak English.
He drinks water.
Vou study English.
He works downtown.
He passes the city.
I stay at home.
Joe drinks coffee with milk.
Joe and Mary are in the classroom.
Good morning, Mary.
1 1.
1 2.
1 3.
14.
15.
1 6.
17.
1 8.
1 9.
20.
The girls play in the yard.

I study Portuguese from the book.
The student's book is on the table.
Mary passes the window.
The boy is near the window.
Joe's desk is back there.
Good night, Joe.
The flowers are on the table.
I spend the night at Joe's.
The coffee is back there.
Exercise D. Pronunciation of j and soft g. Read aloud :

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Jos est n o jardim.

O jornal de Jos est na janela.
Eu janto j.
J amais janto na janela do jardim.
Jorge gerente geral.
Geraldo ajuda a gente a girar.
Lesson III
The progressive form of the verbo As in English, the simple and progressive forms of the
verb are carefully distinguished in BF, although not always in the literary language. There are
occasional differences between usages in the two languages, but they usually correspond
closely. The simpie form cannot be used in place of the progressive form in the spoken language
without constant misunderstanding, as in English.
13.
The progressive is formed with the auxiliary estar (also with some others in certain situations),
followed by the present participle (known as gerndio in Portuguese) of the main verbo The
present participle is regular in ali verbs, and simply replaces the -r of the infinitive with -ndo.
Contrary to usage in other situations, the letter n is pronounced as a consonant here . The pre
ceding vowel is nasal. The present participle is invariable in form, and cannot be used as an ad
jective.
to speak
to be
falar
estar
speaking
being
falando
estando
estou falando
I am speaking
Questions. ln most cases in Portuguese, a question which does not begin with an interrog
ative word is placed in the sarne order as a statement. Only the tone of the voice (or the ques
tion mark which is placed after the sentence in writing) indicates that the sentence is a questiono
No auxiliary, such as the English do, is needed in the simple present tense.
14.
Voc fala ingls?

Voc est trabalhando?
Do you speak English?

Are you working?
1 S. The indefinite article. The equivalent of English a, an is um /ii/ (masculine) and uma
/uma/ (feminine). The m of the feminine form is sometimes lost in pronunciation, especially
before a word which begins with this sound.
um homem
uma menina (often /ua mininal)
a man
a girl
Contractions with the indefmite article. The prepositions de and em may form contrac
tions with the indefinite article, but they are not obligatory. Those with de are not usual in the
speech of Rio ; those with em are generally used.
16.
de + um = dum
de + uma = duma
A casa de um (dum) professor.
Ela est numa (em uma) aula.
em + um = num
em + uma = numa
The house of a teacher.
She is in a class.
17
1 7. Negation. The verb is made negative by placing the word no immediately before it. No
auxiliary such as the English do is used.
I don't speak.
We are not working.
No falo.
Ns no estamos trabalhando.
1 8.
The Portuguese equivalents of yes and no. ln order to express affirmation in Portuguese,
the verb of the question is repeated. The sarne tense is used as in the question, but the person of
the verb varies to fit the logic of the circumstances. No pronouns, either subjects or objects, are
used.
Voc trabalha na cidade?
Vocs falam portugus?
Eles tambm falam?
Do you work downtown? Yes.

Do you speak Portuguese? Yes.
Do they speak it too? Yes.
Trabalho.
Falamos.
Falam.
If the verb of the question consists of more than one word, only the auxiliary is used in the
answer.
Are the children playing? Yes.
Os meninos esto brincando? Esto.
ln answer to a question that does not contain a verb, the expression is usually (That's it).
Quente hoje, hein?
Hot today, eh? Yes.
To answer in the negative, one may repeat the verb preceded by no or, more often, use no
alone.
No or no falo. Do you speak English? No.
Voc fala ingls?
1 9.
Emphatic affirmative and negative answers. To make an answer more emphatic, one may
say sim or no after the verb form which expresses the answer, i.e ., yes or no.
Voc fala ingls?

Ele no trabalha?
Voc fala espanhol?
Falo, sim.
Trabalha, sim.
No f(llo, no.
Do you speak English? Yes, I do.
Doesn't he work? Yes, he does.

Do you speak Spanish? No, I don't.
Vocabulary
Conjunctions
Nouns
o tempo
o carro
a rua
a xcara
o amigo
a amiga
o copo //
o chapu
o sapato
. weather; time
car, automobile
street
cup
friend
friend
glass
hat
shoe
Adjectives
ruim
frio
quente
18
bad
cold
hot, warm
ou
que
or
that
Inte"ogative pronouns
que? o que?
quem? (s. & pI.)
what?
who?
Verbs
entrar (em)
achar
acabar
tirar
lembrar
lembrar a (Joo)
pensar (em)
enter, come in, go in,

get in (to)
fmd; think, believe
finish, end
take off, take out
remember
remind (John)
think (about), think (of)
Adverbs
bem
mal
muito
no
sim
well
badly, poorly
very; much
no; not
See 1 9
here
today
slow(ly)
Eh? Hunh?
from here
aqui
hoje / /
devagar
hein?/i/
daqui
Expressions
Eu acho or Eu acho que sim.
Eu no acho or Eu acho que no.
Eu acho que ele trabalha.
Eu falo com o menino.
Est bem.
Ele est bem.
I think soo
I think noto
I think he works.
I talk to (chat with) the boy.
O.K.
He is well or He is O.K.
Exercise A. Pronunciation of initial r. Practice reading the following:

Raivoso o rato roeu
o rabo do rodovalho,
e a Rita Rosa Ramalho
do rato roer se ria.
Exercise B. Practice and be able to give either language when you hear the other:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
O professor est falando com o amigo.

Eu trabalho com um portugus.
Ele passa perto de um carro.
Jos est com uma menina.
Um menino est brincando com um livro.
6. Ele est na porta de uma casa.
7. As flores esto na mesa.
The teacher is talking to his friend.

I work with a Portuguese.
He passes near a caro
Joe is with a girl.
A boy is playing with a book.
He is in the doorway of a house.
The flowers are on the table.

1. Of a classroom . .
2. ln a city.
3 . 8ehind a table.
4. Near a teacher.
5 . Of the friends
6. On the chair.
7. ln the shoes.
8. With the book.
9.
1 0.
11.
1 2.
At (the) school.
At home.
From the city.
Of the boy.
Exercise D. Make the following expressions negative:

1 . Eu acho.
2. Ele entra na aula.
3. Acabamos a lio hoje.
4. Estou tomando caf.
5. Voc est estudando?
6. O livro est perto do homem.

7. Vocs acham a porta.
8. Ns brincamos hoje.
9. Voc fala espanhol.
1 0. Eu tiro o chapu.
Exercise E. Answer the following questions with the equivalents of yes or no:
1 . Voc fica na aula?
2. Hoj e est quente?
3. Maria estuda muito?
4. Jos est trabalhando?
5. Ns entramos na casa?
6. Maria est em casa?

7. Vocs acham que ele trabalha?
8. Vocs brincam hoje?
9. Voc est falando portugus?
1 0. Voc lembra o rapaz?
19
Exercise F. Answer the questions, using one of the suggested alternatives:

1 . Jos trabalha bem ou mal?
2. Hoje est quente ou frio?
3. Voc toma gua de copo ou de xcara?
4. Voc toma leite ou gua?
5 . Vocs ficam aqui ou l?
6. Eu falo depressa ou devagar?
7. O professor ingls ou portugus?
8. Voc acha que acaba o trabalho ou no?
9. Voc entra na casa ou fica na rua?
10. Maria amiga ou irm de Joo?
Exercise G. Give the corresponding progressive forms:
1 . Eu falo.
2. Voc brinca.
3. Jos passa.
4. O menino fica.
5. Ele toma leite.

6. O homem trabalha.
7. Voc estuda.
8. O trem passa.
9. Ns brincamos
1 0. Ele pensa.
1 1 . Ele tira o chapu.
1 2. Eu acabo o livro.
Exercise H. Change these statements to questions by reading them w th question intonation; no

change in sentence order is needed:
6. Os meninos esto brincando.
7. O trem passa l.
8. Ela est falando portugus.
9. Ele est na cadeira.
1 0. Voc brinca no jardim.
1. Ele fala ingls.

2. Ns ficamos em casa.
3. Vocs esto trabalhando.
4. Eles tomam caf.
5. Ns estamos estudando.
Lesson IV
20. Plurais of nouns and adjectives. Adjectives form their plurals in the sarne ways
thus, adjectives follow the rules given in the preceding lessons.
frio
wd
bom
falador
portugus
cold
bd
good
talkative
Portuguese
as
nouns;
pI. frios
audes
bons
faladores
portugueses
a. Nouns and adj ectives which end in -o generally form the plural by changing this ending
to es
-
a lio
a ao
mando
lesson
action
bossy
as lies
as aes
mandes
A few nouns and adjectives change -o to -es to form the plural.

o po
o co
alemo
20
bread
dog
German
os pes
os ces
alemes
A few others simply add -s to the ending o These include, but are not entirely limited to,
nouns not stressed on the last syllable.
-
o irmo
a mo
o rfo
a bno
os irmos
as mos
os rfos
as bnos
brother
hand
orphan
blessing
b. Nouns and adjectives ending in -s after an unstressed vowel do not change for the plural.
o nibus
o lpis
simples
bus
peneil
simpIe
os nibus
os lpis
simples
c. Nouns and adjectives ending in -I which is not preceded by i drop the final -I and add -is.
o animal
o motel
o anzol
o paul
lateral
fiel
espanhol
azul
animal
motel
fishhook
swamp
lateral
faithful
Spanish
blue
os animais
os motis
os anzis
os pauis
laterais
fiis
espanhis
azuis
Note: The accents on certain plural forms-those whose stressed

rule that the diphthongs i and i always bear a written accent.
or o is open-obey the
d. Nouns and adjectives in -il change the ending to -is if the last syllable is stressed, but to
-eis if it is not stressed.
o barril
imbecil
fcil
til
os barris
imbecis
fceis
teis
barrei
imbecile
easy
useful
21 .
The feminine forrns of adjectives. Adjectives in frnal -o change this vowel to -a to form the
feminine. Most other adjectives have the sarne form in both genders.
aberto
doente
comum
azul
fcil
open
sick
common
blue
easy
fem . aberta
doente
comum
azul
fcil
Adjectives of nationality ending in a consonant add -a to form the feminine .

portugus
espanhol
Adjectives in -o,
-eu
bom
mau
Portuguese
Spanish
portuguesa
espanhola
and some others have irregular feminine forrns.

good
bad
fem. boa
m
21
The feminine form of the adjective is used to form adverbs by the addition of the suffix -mente,
which corresponds fairly closely with the formation of adverbs in English by the addition of -/y.
adv.
aberto
friamente
frio
22.
fcil
facilmente
comum
comumente
Forms of the present tense of the verb
ser, to be.
eu sou
ns somos
ele
vocs so
voc
23.
abertamente
Uses of ser and
eles so
estar. These two verbs are both translated to be, but they are not inter
changeable and must be carefully distinguished.

a . Only
estar may be used to form the progressive tenses.

Ele est falando.
b.
Ser is used to form the passive voice.

A porta aberta.
c.
He is talking.
The door is opened.
Ser is used whenever the expression represents a normal situation, a permanent quality,
or a permaoent condition. Estar is used when the condition or situation is temporary,

changeable, or has just changed. This difference applies to ali types of expressions, and is
different in several cases from Spanish usage.
If the predicate is a noun or pronoun, the verb will nearly always be ser.
um animal.
It is an animal.
Somos ns.
It is we. (Note that ser

agrees with its predicate.)
When the predicate is ao adjective, the choice is determined by the principIe given above.
Ele est doente.
He is ill.
Ele doentio.
He is sickly.
A gua est fria.

O gelo frio.
The water is cold.

Ice is cold.
ln speaking of location, the determining factor is the same-whether or not the location is
fIxed and permanent.
A cadeira est perto da porta.

A cidade perto daqui.
The chair is near the door.

The city is near here.
Note: ln speaking of permanent location, ficar may replace ser.
A cidade fIca perto daqui.
The city is near here.
Note the following exalllples:

O livro est rasgado.
The book is torno
O livro em ingls.
A porta est aberta.
A porta aberta pelo menino.
The door is open.
The book is in English.

The door is opened by the
boy.
22
The street is covered with
A rua coberta de asfalto.
asphalt. (passive or not)

Ganhei na loteria; estou rico.
I won in the lottery; I'm
Eu sou rico.
I'm rich.
Os noivos j esto casados.
The bride and groom are
Joo casado.
John is a married mano
rich.
now married.
24.
Ela est bonita.
She looks pretty today.
Ela bonita.
She is a pretty girl.
Omission of the indefmite article after ser. The indefinite article is omitted after ser be
fore an unmodified noun or adjective. If the noun is modified, the article is generally used, but
may be omitted if the two words are taken to be the expression of one single idea.
Ele ingls.
He is an Englishman. (or
Ela uma professora portuguesa.
She is a teacher from
Ele bom estudante.
He is a good student.
He is English.)
Portugal.
Vocabulary
Nouns
Verbs
a lio
lesson
ser
be (See
o po, pI. pes
bread, loaf
jantar
dine, eat dinner
23)
o co, pI. ces
dog
guardar
keep, put away
o irmo, pI. irmos
brother
deixar
let, allow ; leave behind,

abandono
a irm
sister
a mo, pI. mos
hand
o rfo, pI. orfos
orphan
o nibus
bus
o lpis
peneil
o animal
animal
a tarde
afternoon
o papel //
paper
o motel //
motel
Prepositions
at
until
antes de
before
depois de
after
Adjectives
alemo, fem. alem
German
simples
simple
bom, fem. boa //
good
mau, fem . m
bad
fcil
easy
difcil
hard, difficult
aberto //
open
doente
sick, ill
rasgado
torn, ripped
casado
married
bonito
prettY
espanhol /l
Spanish
Expressions
Boa tarde.
Good afternoon.
At logo.
So long; good bye .
At amanh.
Till tomorrow.
23
Exercise A. Pronounce the following pairs of words, noting similarities and differences:
cara
vira
cera ll
lera Il
cada
vida
ceda ll
Ieda Il
lida
mudo
nada
lira
muro
Nara
Exercise B. Put all possible words into the plural form:

1. A flor azul.
2. A voz boa.
3. O portugus est doente.
4. O trem ruim.
5. O espanhol jan ta em casa.
6. A mo est aberta.
7. O co do rfo bom.
8. L o caf ruim.
9. O nibus entra na cidade.
1 0. O jardim bonito.
1 1 . O homem simples.
1 2 . A cidade fica perto.
13. A lio difcil.
1 4. Voc fala portugus.
1 5 . O irmo est com a irm.
16. Eu janto com o amigo.
1 7 . O animal do alemo mau.
18. Ele guarda o papel na mo.
19. O menino acha que voc mau.
20. A porta azul.
Exercise C. Replace the underlined word with the words in parentheses and make alI other
necessary changes:
1. O irmo simples e bom.
2. Aqui o caf ruim.
3. O nibus est aberto.
4. A lio difcil.
S. Jos casado.
6. O papel est rasgado.
7. O livro difcil.
(irm, espanhis)
(leite, gua, escolas)
(porta, livros, mos)
(trabalho, portugus, aulas)
(os alemes, a estudante)
(lio)
(escola, professores)
Exercise D. Replace the blanks with the correct form of ser or estar.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1 0.
A porta
A escola
Jos
aberta.
na cidade.
um homem rico.
frio aqui hoje.
O professor
um homem.
em casa.
Maria
americanos.
Ns
A cadeira
atrs da porta.
O papel
rasgado.
Ela
uma menina bonita.
1 1 . O menino
1 2. A casa
1 3. Maria
1 4. O homem
1 5. O livro
1 6. Voc
1 7. Ns
1 8. O livro
1 9. Os rapazes
20. A casa
rfo.
azul.
..,
sentada.
jantando.
guardado hoje.
estudando?
casados.
em portugus.
na escola.
na cidade.
___
_
_
_
Exercise E. Say in Portuguese :

1 . The Germans leave the dogs here.
2. The sister is simple and kind.
3. The pencils are with the papers.
4. He lets the orphans stay.
5. I put the books away.
6. The animals are sick.
7. Good evening, Joe.
8. It is warm today.
24
9. The lessons are easy.

1 0. The girls are very pretty.
1 1 . The boys are bad.
1 2. We think he is good.
13. The. student is putting away the pencils.
1 4. He takes the bus in the city.
1 5. The boy stays near the river.
1 6. He speaks English badly.
22. The orphan's hand is cold.

23. He is German, but she is Spanish.
24. The bread is hot.
25. He lets the sister eat dinner.
1 7. Are you finishing the work? Yes.

1 8 . We do not pass the river.
1 9. Where is the school?
20. I speak slowly.
2 1 . Joe is playing in the classroom.
Lesson V
25.
Present indicative forms of the three conj ugations. The endings of the infinitive in the
three conjugations are respectively -ar, -er, and -ir. Note that the vowel of the second conjuga
tion infmitive is always l/o The forms of the simple present follow.
First Conjugation
Second Conjugation
Third Conjugation
falar to speak
eu falo
voc fala
ele fala
ns falamos
vocs falam
eles falam
comer to eat
como
come
come
comemos
comem
comem
abrir to open
abro
abre
abre
abrimos
abrem
abrem
The progressive forms are as follows:

Eu estou falando, etc.
eu estou comendo, etc.
eu estou abrindo, etc.
26.
The imperative: Portuguese possesses imperative forrns in the singular and plural. His
torically, they were used to give commands with the old second-person subjects tu and vs,
but only in the affirrnative. As stated previously, the plural vs is no longer used in the spoken
language anywhere, and the singular tu is comparatively little used in Brazil. But the imperative
singular is in common use with the subject voe, both in the affirrnative and the negative. The
form, for ali regular and most irregular verbs, is the sarne as the third person singular of the
present indicative. As in English, no subject pronoun is used, except for strong emphasis. If
used, the subject may precede or follow the verb o
Fala
Come
Abre
speak
eat
open
Fala voc. You speak.

Voc come. You eat.
The verbs ser and estar have lost this form completely. One uses the subjunctive, respectively
seja and esteja.
The historical imperative plural is completely lost in BF, but a few short indicative plural forrns
are often use d. ln most instances, the meaning is expressed in the form of a request or a state
ment, rather than that of the imperative . The tone of voice in which the words are spoken will
often reveal them as a command. One expression so used is the question, Vocs querem? fol
lowed by the infmitive. The singular, Voc quer, can aiso be used thus instead of the impera
tive singular.
Vocs querem guardar os livros?
Vocs querem falar devagar?
Will you put away your books? or Put away

your books.
(please) speak slowly.
25
27.
Questions with an interrogative word. ln general, when a question begins with an interroga
tive word, a subject may either precede or follow the verb, although there are cases in which one
or the other is more usual.
Para onde vai voc?

Or Para onde voc vai?
Where are you going?
Very often, BF uses the interrogative word followed by the phrase que. The following clause
is then always arranged with the subject before the verbo
What are you eating?
Who leaves tomorrow?
Que que voc est comendo?

Quem que parte amanh?
If the verb consists of more than one word, the subject is always placed before it, either with
or without the use of que.
What are you eating?
o que voc est comendo?
28. Requesting assento To ask for agreement with a statement, the question no T is placed
after it. ln rapid speech, it is often pronounced /n/. ln English, the equivalent varies according
to the auxiliary of the verb of the statement.
You remember Jolm, don't you?

He is kidding, isn't he?
Voc lembra Joo, no ?

Ele est brincando, no ?
29.
Position of adjectives. Adjectives generally follow the noun in Portuguese when they are
used to distinguish one type of person or thing from another, i.e., are used objectively. They
precede when they express the opinion or feeling of the speaker, or call attention to a known
quality, i.e., are used subjectively.
o bom rapaz vai cidade.
The good fellow is going downtown.

(I consider him to be good.)
Os homens bons vo para o cu.
Good men go to heaven. (1 am speaking only

of the good ones.)
Descriptive adjectives generally follow. Certain common adjectives which usually have a sub
jective meaning, e.g., good, bad, great, etc., are likely to precede. Demonstrative adjectives
(this, that) and adjectives of quantity practically always precede.
30. The formal second-person pronouns. The words voc and vocs are used in informal cir
cumstances. We may judge reasonably well when to use them if we reserve them for persons
whom we address by their first names. However, they are used much more widely than the
familiar forms are used in Spanish or French.
To address persons more formally-more or less those that we would address by their last names
with a title-we use the following: (The pronunciations indicated are those of normal, rapid
speech.)
o senhor / u sj/
os senhores /u sjris/
a senhora /a sjra/
as senhoras /a sjras/
masculine singular
masculine plural
feminine singular
feminine plural
Abbreviation: o sr.
os sres.
a sra.
as sras.
These words are also used as titles, with the articles omitted when one addresses the person
concerned.
Sr. Peres, ar sr. lvares est aqui?
26
Mr. Peres, is Mr. Alvares here?
Note that the title of an unmarried lady is senhorita (srta.), but that the pronoun you when she
is addressed is regularly a senhora.
Miss Peres, how are you?
Srta. Peres, como est a sra.?
The verb forms used with the formal modes of address are the sarne as those used with voc and
vocs-the third person singular and plural.
3 1 . Use of the second-person pronouns as objects. All the words used as subjects of verbs with
the meaning you, except the old forms tu and vs, may also be used as direct objects of a verb
or as objects of prepositions. They are placed in the sentence as if they were nouns. As direct ob
jects, they follow the verbo
I don't understand yOU.
Here I leave yOU.
Is he with you?
Is the car yours?
Who is behind you?
Eu no compreendo voc.
Aqui deixo o senhor.
Ele est com voc?
O carro do senhor?
Quem est atrs da senhora?
Vocabulary
Nouns
a pena
Joo
a xicrinha
o Brasil
pen (point)
a carta
John
a came
o arroz //
demi-tasse
Brazi! (use the article)
letter
meat
rice
Verbs
aprender (a)
learn (to)
usar
escrever!
partir (de)
write
depart (from), go
away, leave
marry, get married
(to)
eat
understand
abrir
use; wear (clothes, long

hair, etc.)
open
vender
seU
quer? //
querem? //
will you? (s.)

will you? (pI.)
casar (com)
comer
compreender
Note 1 . The third person forms of this verb have tlie vowel // in the stressed syllable.
Expressions
Escrever com pena.
Escrever a lpis.
Escrever mo.
Aprender a falar.
Eles casam amanh.
Ele casa com Maria.
Partimos da cidade hoje.
To write with a peno

To 'write with penci!.
To write by hand.
To learn to speak.
They are getting married tomorrow.
He will marry Mary.
We are leaving town today.
27
Exercise A. Put into the progressive form :
1 . Ns falamos portugus.
2. Ele deixa a cidade .
3. Elas escrevem cartas.
4. Eu como carne .
5 . Ele usa o lpis.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Eles casam.
Eu no compreendo voc .
Ele toma caf.
Eu abro a janela.
Eles vendem carros.
Exercise B. Express with the imperative singular:
1 . Speak Portuguese.
2. Study the lesson.
3. Play with the boy.
4. Drink the coffee.
5. Finish the lesson.
6. Remember Mary.
7. Be good.
8 . Learn to speak.
9. Eat the breado
1 0. Wear the shoes.
1 1 . Work hard.
1 2 . Spend the day at home.
1 3. Stay here.
1 4. Come in.
I S . Take off the shoes.
1 6. Think of John.
1 7 . Put away the cups.
18. Write a letter.
1 9. Open the door.
20. SeU the caro
Exercise C. Give in the singular. and the plural:
1 . Will you dine with John and Mary?

2. Will you open the door?
3. Will you write a letter?
4. Will you speak to (with) John?
Exercise D. Put in the blanks the correct Portuguese equivalents of the pronoun you :
1 . Sr. Tavares,
quer jantar?
est
estudando
muito.
2. Amigo,
3. Srta. Carvalho, que que
toma?
aprende depressa.
4. Joo,
quer deixar o chapu aqui?
5. Professora,
esto aprendendo portugus, estudantes.
6.
escreve bem.
7 . Menino,
8. Sr. Gomes e sr. Carvalho,
trabalham muito.
, Jos.
9. Hoje eu janto com
1 0. Sra. Gomes, quem est com
?
Exercise E. Replace the blanks with the correct form of ser or estar:
1 . Onde
2. A carne
3 . A lio
4. A porta
Joo?
ruim.
difcil.
sempre aberta.
S. Ele
falando portugus.
alemes.
6. Os senhores
7 . Os papis
rasgados.
8. O irmo do rapaz
um menino.
Exercise F. Put ali possible words into the plural form:
1 . Eu estou aprendendo alemo.

2. O papel est na mesa.
3. O menino bom no quer abrir a porta.
4. A lio difcil.
5 . A flor bonita fica no jardim.
28
6. O ingls vende o animal.

7. Eu lembro a voz do rapaz.
8. Ele come po e toma caf.
9. O lpis do irmo ruim.
1 0. Ele est com um chapu na mo.
1 1 . A flor do rfo.
Exercise G. Put alI possible words in the feminine form:
1 . O rapaz bom.
2. O homem ale mo.
3. O sr. Gomes mau.
4. O menino grande .
5. O professor portugus.
6. O estudante espanhol.
7. O amigo ingls.
Exercise H. Say in Portuguese :

1 . He is eating breado
2. The man wears a good hat.
3. I eat dinner at home.
4. They don't understand you.
5 . Where are the pen and (the) paper.
6. The house is near the school.
7. Eat slowly.
8. Drink the milk.
9. Open the door.
10. He sells flowers.
1 1 . They are playing near the door.

12. John works downtown.
1 3 . The boy is having breakfast.
1 4. Mary stays at the motel.
1 5 . Put the pencils away.
1 6. Take off your (the) hat.
17. Write a letter to the girl.
18. The dogs are on the street.
19. Rio is in Brazil.
20. The car is behind the house.
Lesson VI
32.
33.
Forms of the irregular verb ir, to go.

eu
vou
voc
vai
ele
vai '
ns
vocs
eles
vamos
vo
vo
Uses of ir.
a. This verb is used with the meaning to go and, as in English, often the present is used as if
it were a future tense.
Ele vai l todos os dias.
Eu vou cidade amanh.
He goes there every day.

I'm going downtown tomorrow.
The progressive form of ir is seldom used, and then only in special circumstances.
b. Ir is used like the corresponding verb in English, to form an expression which is an equi
valent of the future tense. As in English, it may or may not involve actual movement. But it
differs from English in that the progressive form is never used. It is not followed by a pre
position.
Eu vou comer.
Vou brincar l no jardim.
Vamos ficar aqui.
I'm going to eat.

I'm going to play out there on the lawn.
We are going to stay here.
c. It is used in inquiring about one's health, and in the answers.

Como vai voc?
Vou bem, obrigado.
How are you?

I'm well, thank you.
29
d. The first person plural is used to make a suggestion for action-the equivalent of English
let 's.
Vamos comer.
Vamos trabalhar.
No vamos partir hoje.
Vamos !
Let's eat.
Let's (go to) work.
Let's not leave today.
Let's go!
34.
The prepositions para and a. These prepositions form contractions with the articles. Those
of para are almost invariably used in speech, but are no! written.
para +
para +
para +
para +
o
a
os
as
pronounced /pru/
/ pra/
/prusl
Iprasl
para +
para
um
uma
pronounced Iprul
Iprumal
The contractions of a and the definite article are written.

a+
a+
a+
a+
o
a
os
as
written ao
aos
s
pronounced lau/
lal
lausl
lasl
This preposition does not form contractions with the indefinite article.
3S.
Uses of para and a.
a. ln addition to its meaning offor, para is frequently used where English would use to.
With the verb ir and other verbs of motion, para is used if the person is going to stay at the
place of his destination, or if it is his normal location. If the person is going to be there only
temporarily, a is used.
o americano vai ao Brasil.
The American is going to Brazil. (He will return.)
o brasileiro vai para o Brasil.
The Brazilian is going to Brazil.
b. Either of these two prepositions may be used to mean to with the indirect object, general
ly interchangeably. Para is more frequent in BF.
Escreve para (or a) Joo.
Write to John.
c. A is used for at with expressions of time. ln reference to place, the usual preposition is
em.
s duas horas.
Ele est em casa.
At two o'clock.
He is at home.
Use and ornission of the defmite article with the names of languages. The definite article
usually accompanies the name of a language.
36.
O portugus a lngua do Brasil.
Portuguese is the language of Brazil. ,
But it is ornitted when the name of a language follows immediately after the preposition em or
the verb falar. It is usually omitted also after other verbs which denote primarily mental acti
vity, although it is considered acceptable to use it in such cases.
Ele fala portugus.
Eles escrevem cartas em ingls.
30
He speaks Portuguese.
They write letters in English.
I am studying Spanish.
You speak Portuguese very well.
Eu estou estudando (o) espanhol.

Voc fala muito bem o portugus.
Note that in the phrase um livro de portugus, the article is omitted because de portugus is an
adjectival modifier. ln such cases the article would nearly always be omitted, before any noun.
Vocabulary
Nouns
a hora jj
o palet
a roa jj
a estrada
Adjectives
hour; o'clck
(suit-) coat
cultivated field;
the country
road, highway
Verb
procurar
look for; try to
Adverbs
pouco
mais
como
tambm
amanh
little, very little

more ; plus
how; as; like
also, too
tomorrow
americano
brasileiro
obrigado
um, fem. uma
dois, fem. duas
trs
ruim (follows noun)
francs
branco
amarelo jj
preto j!
marrom jj
American
Brazilian
thank you
one
two
three
bad, poor
French
white
yellow
black
brown, maroom
Expressions
Um pouco.
Est na hora de comer.
Ele tambm no vai.
Joo da roa.
Em casa de Jos.
casa de Jos.
O trem parte daqui.
Vou partir da cidade.
Ele est com frio.
Ele est com o chapu.
Joo casa com Maria.
Joo e Maria casam.
A little (bit).
It's time to eat.
He isn't going either.
John is from the "sticks."
At Joe's (house).
To Joe's.
The train leaves from here.
I'm going to leave town.
He is cold.
He has his hat.
John marries Mary .
John and Mary get married.
Exercise A . Answer affirmatively in Portuguese :

1 . O trem parte agora?
2 . Voc come bem?
3 . Vocs falam alemo?
4. Eu escrevo mal?
5.Joo casa com Maria?
6. Ele compreende a lio?
7. Ns aprendemos protugus?
8. Ela entra na aula?

9. Voc acha o livro difcil?
1 0. Vocs ficam aqui?
1 1 . Acabamos a lio hoje?
1 2. Eu guardo o livro?
1 3 . Eles vo estudar?
1 4. Voc quer falar devagar?
31
Exercise B. Fill in the adjectives in parentheses, in the correct form and location with respect
to the noun underlined:
1 . (doente) Eu falo com um menino no hospital.
2. (americano) O Mississpi um granderio.
3. (dois) As mulheres partem hoje.
4. (preto) Ele est com um chapu.
S . (aberto) Estamos numa casa com duas janelas.
6. (rasgado) No guardo um papel.
7. (casado) Ela est com um1iinem.
8. (bom) Jos um menino.
9. (mau) Ele vai casar com uma moa.
1 0. (ruim) Eu no tomo o caf.
Exercise C. Read aloud in Portuguese, at a natural speaking speed:
1 . Ele vai para a cidade.
2. So sapatos para um homem.
3. Eu escrevo aos meninos.
4. Ela vai casar com o brasileiro.
5. Vou s duas horas.
6. Eu vou para a rua.
7. Para quem o chapu?
Exercise D. Read the sentences, translating the prepositions in parentheses and making con
tractions where needed:
i. Ele vai (with) voc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
l..et's go (to) o Brasil.

Ela parte (for) a cidade .
Eles esto (at) a escola.
o inno (of) o rapaz.
6. Vamos l (after) amanh.

7. Ela fica aqui (until) a noite.
8. Eu estudo uma lio (from) o livro.
9. Eu vendo o carro (before) amanh.
1 0. Joo est (at) casa.
Exercise E. Answer questions in complete sentences, in Portuguese:

1 . Como vai voc, Maria? (or Jos, etc.)
2. O que voc come?
3. Para quem voc est escrevendo?
4. Com que voc escreve?
5 . De que voc toma caf?
6. Voc usa chapu?

7. Voc estuda muito?
8. Voc compreende portugus?
9. Voc casado?
1 0. O que voc acha da lio?
Exercise F. Say in Portuguese :
1 . I'm going to drink a cup of coffee.

2. He's going to marry a Spanish lady.
3. He wears two shoes.
4. Who understands the lesson?
5. We are leaving for Brazil.
6. Are you learning much or little?
7. He does not wear a coat.
8. I am going to stay here an hour.
9. Do you eat meat with rice?
10. I write with a penciI.
1 1 . l..e t's go to (the) class.
1 2. l..e t's go home.
32
1 3. I'm going to write a letter.

1 4. He is going to drink water.
1 5. We are going downtown.
1 6. They are going to spend the night.
1 7. We spend two hours studying.
1 8. I am looking for my (the) hat.
1 9. Who remembers where it is?
20. Who are they?
2 1 . Two and one are three.
22. [They ] are white and yellow.
flowers.
23. It's time to leave.
27. I don't eat bread, thank yOU.

28. He drinks black coffee.
29. Tomorrow, let's go in.
24. The car is on the road.

25. The house is in the country.
26. I am going to the city.
Lesson VII
37.
The irregular verb ter, to have. The present indicative of ter is as follows:
eu tenho
voc tem,
ele tem
ns temos
vocs tm
eles tm
The third-person form tm is pronounced like the singular. Both are used as imperatives.
38. Uses of ter. ln addition to the literal meaning, to have, to possess, tls verb has severaI
idiomatic usages.
a. Ter que (or ter de )
to have to.
Eu tenho que (tenho de) trabalhar.
have to work.
b. Ter . . . para, to have (sometlng) to (be done).

Ele tem uma lio para estudar.
He has a lesson to study.
c. Tem, always singular and without an expressed subject, is used in BF to mean there is,
there are. Note that the noun wlch folIows is the object of the verb, wlch then does not
agree with it.
Tem meninos aqui? No tem, no.
Are there any boys here? No, there are noto
d. Ali forms of the verb are used, folIowed by certain nouns, to denote conditions of the hu
man body or mind. Ter may be replaced in these expressions by estar com , which is more colIo
quiai in some of them, See the tist of such words given in the vocabulary of this lesson.
Tenho frio. (Estou com frio)
Temos calor. (Estamos com calor)
Ele tem muito medo.
am cold.
We are wann.
He is badly scared.
39.
Possessive adjectives and pronouns, first person. The possessive adjectives corresponding to
first-person subjects are:
Singular
Plural
meu my
minha my
nosso jl our
nossa Il our
Meu livro.
Minha casa.
Nosso amigo.
Nossas amigas.
meus (agreeing with masco noun)

minhas (agreeing with fem. noun.)
nossos ll (with masco noun.)
nossas ll (with fem. noun)
My book.
My house.
Our friend.
Our (lady) friends.
33
The defmite article is often used preceding the possessive adjective. It may either be used
or omitted, without difference of meaning, except that in two cases it is not used:
a. ln direct address.
Meus amigos, como vo?
My friends, how are you?
b. With nouns of relationship, Le., father, mother, cousin, etc.

Meu pai vai trabalhar.
My father is going to work.
Meu primo americano.
My cousin is an American.
As pronouns (when not accompanied by l'.ouns), the sarne words are used, always accompanied
by articles, except after forms of ser.
o meu, a nossa
mine, ours
A casa de Joo e a minha.
John's house and mine.
After the verb
ser there is a slight difference in meaning between the forms with and without
the article . The difference is really more of emphasis than of meaning and is not of great im
portance.
A casa branca minha.
The white house is mine. (Emphasis on
A casa branca a minha.
(Emphasis on which house is meant.)
ownership.)
40.
Possessive adjectives and pronouns, second person. The possessives which refe r to voc,
vocs, and also to the more formal subjects, o senhor, a senhora, and to their plural forms, are
the following (Note that these forms may refe r to any of these subjects.):
Singular
Plural
seu
seus
your (with masco nouns)
sua
suas
your (with femine no uns)
The article is used or omitted with these forms exactly as with those of the first person.
(o) seu livro
Your book
(a) sua casa
Your house
A casa de Joo e a sua
John's house and yours
A casa branca sua.
The white house is yours.
A casa branca a sua.
The white house is yours.
Vocabulary
Nouns
segunda-feira /si/
Monday
a igrej a //
church
tera-feira / /
Tuesday
a missa
mass
party
quarta-feira
Wednesday
a festa //
quinta-feira
Thursday
a professora / /
teacher
sexta-feira /s/
Friday
o filho
son
sbado
Saturday
a ftlha
daughter
domingo / du/
Sunday
a prova //
test; proof
a semana
week
Feira may be omitted in these words whenever the meaning is clear without it. The pluraIs
teras-feiras.
of these words are formed by adding -s to both parts, e .g.,
34
Preposition
Adjectives
grande
pequeno /pi/
todo //
big, large, great

little, small
alI, every
Adverbs
geralmente
s
quando
a
generally
only
when
there (near you)
Numbers
quatro
cinco
seis
sete //
four
five
six
seven
em frente de
in front of
Nouns used with ter
Adjective
o frio
o calor //
o medo
o sono
a fome
a sede //
a sorte //
o azar
a razo
a raiva
a pressa //
a vergonha
cold
hot
afraid
sleepy
hungry
thirsty
lucky
unlucky
right
angry
in a hurry
bashful,
ashamed
cold
heat
fear
sleep
hunger
thirst
luck
bad luck
reason
anger
haste
shame
a vontade (de) wish (to)

Expressions
manh
tarde
De noite
Nas segundas-feiras
Aos sbados
todo (o) homem
Todos os homens
Todo mundo
Todos
Que que ele tem?
ln the moming
ln the aftemoon
At night
On (every) Monday (nas with fem . days)
On Saturdays (aos with masco days)
Each man, every man
Every man, alI men
Everybody
AlI, everybody
What's the matter with him?
De
De
Leitura
Ns vamos s aulas seis dias da semana. Temos aulas de manh e de tarde, todos os dias, de
segunda at sexta. Aos sbados, s temos aulas de manh. Nas segundas, quartas e sextas temos
aula de portugus. Vamos aula com os livros, papel e lpis. Falamos portugus e escrevemos
um pouco. Nas sextas temos uma pequena prova. Nas teras, e nas quintas temos aula de ingls.
L temos que falar e escrever em ingls. Achamos o ingls mais difcil que o portugus. Aos
domingos muitos vo igreja.
Exercise A . Use of idioms with ter and estar com:
1. Voc est com frio hoje?
2. O francs est com calor.
3. Tem muitos brasileiros aqui?
4. Ele tem medo do co.
5. noite e estou com sono.
6. Quando estou com fome, como.
7. Ele est com sede, mas no toma gua.
8. Acho que vamos ter sorte hoje.
9. Voc tem azar com o professor.
1 0. Eu tenho razo , mas voc no tem.
Are you cold today?

The Frenchman is warm.
Are there many Brazilians here?
He is afraid of the dog.
It is nighttime and I'm sleepy.
When I'm hungry, I eat.
He is thirsty, but he doesn't drink water.
I think we'll be lucky today.
Vou have bad luck with the teacher.
I am right, but you are wrong.
35
1 1 . Acho que ele tem raiva de Joo.

1 2 . Estou com pressa, tenho que escrever uma
carta.
1 3 . Ele tem vergonha do carro.
1 4. O menino tem vergonha.
1 5 . O homem no tem vergonha !
1 6 . Tenho vontade de jantar.
I think he's mad at John.

I'm in a hurry, I must write a letter.
He is ashamed of his caro
The boy is bashful.
The man is shameless.
I feel like eating.
Exercise B. Answer in Portuguese (possible answers are suggested):

1 . Quando que voc acaba o livro?
2 . Em que dias voc tem aulas de portugus?
3. O que que voc tem para escrever?
4. Que que tem na mesa do professor?
5. Que dia da semana hoje?
6. Aonde vai voc aos domingos?
7 . Como a filha de Joo?
8. Quando temos prova?
9. Quem vai ao Brasil?
10. Para quem que voc est escrevendo?
(hoje, amanh)
(teras, quintas, etc.)
(um livro, uma lio)
(uma prova, uma flor)
( missa, igreja)
(pequeno, bonito)
(amanh, quarta)
(eu, voc)
Exercise C. Answer in Portuguese :

1 . Que que voc tem hoje?
2. Em que dias voc tem aulas de francs?
3. Onde voc toma o caf da manh?
4. O que tem l atrs da mesa?
5 . Voc fala depressa ou devagar?
6 . Voc toma caf frio?
7. Onde voc guarda os livros?
8 . A lio muito fcil?
9. Os irmos de Jos so bons?
1 0. Com que voc escreve a lio?
Exercise D. Repeat the sentence, supplying the correct form for you :
1 . Sr. Garcia,
vai cidade?
tem festa em casa hoje?
2. Maria,
vo festa?
3. Sr. Peres e Sr. Carvalho :
4. Menino, que que
est escrevendo?
5 . Irm,
compreende os brasileiros?
6. Joo,
casado?
est estudando?
7. Srta. Araujo, que que
8. Jos, eu vou l e
fica aqui.
tm aula?
9 . Estudantes, quando que
1 0. Eu acho que
, os ces, vo comer agora.
Exercise E. Fill in the correct form of the possessive pronoun or adjective:
1 . (mine) A casa branca
2 . (my)
irmo bom.
palet est na cadeira.
3. (your)
4. (yours) O carro marrom
5 . (our)
filha vai . escola.
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
36
6. (my) No tenho
7. (your) Vamos a
8. (ours) O nibus amarelo
lpis.
casa.
_
_
_
_
Exercise F. Say in Portuguese:

1. I am hungry, but he is thirsty.
2. He is afraid, but she is more [afraid] .
3. We have to seU our house.
4. Are there good schools there?
5. What do you have to leam tomorrow?
6. What's the matter with you?
7. I haven't [any]water to drink.
8. What do you have in your hand (the hand)?
9 . We have yeUow flowers in the garden.
1 0. When do you have breakfast?
1 1 . The house has two windows.
1 2 . They have to go in.
13. I have a lesson to study.
14. Vou are learning very little from the book.
1 5. Do you have a coat?
Exercise G. Say in Portuguese :

1 . We don't have classes on Thursdays.
2. There are seven days in a week.
3. Saturday (in the) aftemoon, we are going downtown.
4. On Sunday I go to church.
5. Mr. Garcia, do you eat in the caf?
6. The teacher is a pretty lady.
7. He has two daughters; one is good, but one is bad.
8. We have only meat and rice to eat today.
9. Vou have to work tomorrow aftemoon, boys.
1 0. I am generally at school in the morning.
1 1 . Who is it in front of the house?
1 2. Where do you go at night in Rio?
1 3 . He writes a letter every night to his ( the) son at school.
14. He has a sister.
1 5. We leave for Brazil tomorrow.
1 6 . Who stays at home when you leave?
1 7 . Joe, where are you going?
1 8. On Saturdays, we study the lessons.
=
Lesson VIII
41.
Forms of the irregular verb fazer, to do, to make. Present indicative.

eu fao
voc faz
ele faz
ns fazemos
vocs fazem
eles fazem
37
42.
Uses of fazer. Tls verb has most of the uses of the two English verbs mentioned above.
However, it is neve r used as an auxiliary with another verb, and seidom stands for a previously
mentioned verb, like English do.
Eu fao meu trabalho.

Eu estou fazendo caf.
Voc fala portugus?
Ele no fala portugus, mas sim l.
I do my work.
I am making coffee.
Do you speak Portuguese?
He doesn't speak Portuguese, but he does
read it.
Fazer is used in the tlrd person singular, the infinitive or the present participle, without an ex
pressed subject, followed by the nouns frio or calor, or by tempo and an adjective, to describe
the weather. Note that if one speaks of the weather as it is at the moment, the progressive form
of the verb is used.
Faz calor no Rio no vero.

No est fazendo calor hoje.
Que tempo est fazendo agora?
Sempre faz bom tempo aqui.
It's hot in Rio in summer.

It isn't hot today.
How's the weather now?
The weather is always fine here.
43.
Estar with expressions of weather. Estar may be used impersonally, or with the subject
tempo, in either case followed by adjectives, to describe the sarne conditions of weather, as
well as others in wlch fazer is not used. Estar does not have a progressive formo
O
tempo est bom.

Est quente hoje.
Como est. o tempo?
Hoje o tempo est chuvoso.
The weather is good.

It's hot today.
How is the weather?
Today it's rainy.
44.
The demonstrative adjectives and pronouns. There are three demonstratives, correspondo
ing to the three pe rsons of the pronouns and verbs. The forms are as follows:
Singular Masculine
Plural
Singular Feminine
Plural
Neuter
Tls (near speaker)

este //
estes //
esta //
estas //
isto
that (near you)

esse //
esses //
essa //
essas //
isso
That (far from both)

aquele //
aqueles //
aquela //
aquelas //
aquilo
Pronunciation: Note that each gender is distinguished by different vowels, both in the fmal
syllable and the stressed one. The masculine forms alI have // in the stressed sylIable, the fem
inine forms all have //, wlle the neuter forms have li/o
45.
Contractions formed from the demonstratives. The prepositions de and em form con
tractions with the demonstratives.
naquele
desse
nesse
deste
neste
daquele
naqueles
destes
desses
daqueles
nesses
nestes
naquela
desta
nessa
dessa
daquela
nesta
naquelas
nessas
destas
dessas
daquelas
nestas
disto
naquilo
disso
daquilo
nisso
nisto
The preposition a forros contractions with aquele only. These contractions are pronounced like
the demonstrative alone :
quele, queles, quela, quelas, quilo
38
The preposition para forms contractions with aquele in pronunciation, but not in writing.
para
aquele
(pronunciation only) praquele, etc.
46.
The negatives. When a negative word is used following a verb, a negative word must pre
cede the verb o If no other negative precedes, then no is put before the verbo The position of a
negative word in the sentence is determined by its usage. Thus, if it is a subject, it will precede
the verb, etc. Adverbs may usually either precede or follow the verbo
No tenho nada.
Nunca falo com ele.
No falo nunca com ele.
Nem Joo nem Maria deixa a cidade.
I have nothing.
I never speak to him.
I never speak to him.
Neither John nor Mary leaves town.
Vocabulary
Verbs
Nouns
o tempo
o ar
o sol l l
a brisa
o cu
a neve ll
a chuva
a luz
a loja l l
a rvore
a esquina
weather; time
air
sun
breeze
sky ; heaven
snow
rain
light
shop, store
tree
corner
chover
nevar
brilhar
h
rain
snow
shine
there is, there are
Adjectives
nublado
fresco ll
chuvoso l/ , fem. &
pI. ll
brilhante
abafado
tanto
cloudy
cool, fresh
rainy
brilliant, bright
sultry
so much
*H means the sarne as tem, but is somewhat more literary.

Preposition
Negatives
nada (pron.)
nenhum (adj . &
pron.)
f. nenhuma
ningum (pron.)
nunca (adv.)
nem (conj.)
nem . . . nem (conj.)
nothing
nO, none
no one
never
nor
neither . . . nor
at
as far as
Adverbs
sempre
always
to (with adj . or adv.) so
Expressions
Vou fazer uma viagem.
Faz favor de (falar).
Est ventando.
No h (tem) pressa.
Ele vai com pressa.
No est fazendo tanto calor.
No est to quente.
I'm going to take a trip.

Please (speak).
It's windy.
There's no hurry.
He goes hurriedly.
It's not so hot.
It's not so hot.
39
Exercise A. Answer in Portuguese :
1 . Que tempo est fazendo na cidade hoje?

2. Onde que voc vai?
3. Onde esto os carros?

4. O que vendem nas lojas da cidade?
S. O que h na esquina da rua?

6. O que tem perto da estrada na roa?
7. Onde tem rvores na cidade?
8. Como est o tempo hoje?
(calor, frio, bom tempo, etc.)

( cidade , escola, para casa)
(na rua, na cidade, na estrada)
(livros, po, papel)
(uma casa, uma loja, uma rvore)
(roas, casas, rvores)
(perto da rua, na esquina, atrs das casas)
(frio, quente, ruim, bonito)
Exercise B. Put the following sentences in the progressive form, as indicated by the words given:
1 . Sempre fao meu trabalho.
2. Sempre faz calor aqui.
3 . Todo o dia ela faz caf.
4. O que que Jos faz?
5 . Ns fazemos uma viagem todo ano.
Agora
Agora
Agora
O que Jos
Agora ns
____
meu trabalho .
calor.
caf.
agora?
uma viagem.
Exercise C. Use estar instead of fazer, making any other necessary changes.
1 . Que tempo est fazendo?

2. Est fazendo calor hoje.
3. Est fazendo mau tempo.
4. Hoje est fazendo frio.
5 . Est fazendo um tempo bonito.
Exercise D. Say in Portuguese (That may be expressed in two ways in each case , referring to two
different locations.):
1 . What is that? (neuter)
9. That tree is pretty.
2. What house is that? (fem.)
1 0. I'm going as far as that city.
3. That is a good boy.
1 1 . That man's coat is tom.

1 2. Those doors are white .
13. I'm going to do that tomorrow.
1 4. Those Frenchmen are going to leave.
1 5 . That light is bright.
1 6. This chair is for that boy.
4. What is on that table?

5 . That book is in Portuguese.
6. This hat is mine.

7. These tests are easy.
8. This wind is cooI.
1 . The air is cool today.
1 1 . After the rain, it gets
2. The sun is shining.
1 2. I am not warm now.
3. There is no snow in Rio.
1 3 . But we are very hungry !

14. We are going as far as the comer.
1 5 . There are two trees at the comer.
1 6. These lessons are always so simple.
1 7 . It is windy and snowing today.
1 8. Please open the door.
19. Let's not leave today.
20. I take off my hat when I come in.
4. The light of the sun is brilliant.

5. The sky is cloudy.
6. Today [it}s rainy.
7. This afternoon it is not so hot.
8. It always snows here.
9. It is raining downtown.
1 0. There is a cool breeze today.
40
(fica) sultry.
Lesson IX
47.
The irregular verb querer, to want, to wish; present indicative.

eu
voc
ele
quero //
quer //
quer
ns
vocs
eles
queremos
querem //
querem
This verb is followed by an infinitive without a preposition.

Quero ficar.
I want to stay.
The preterit tense. The preterit (or simple perfect) tense has the following forms in the
regular verbs of the three conjugations.
48.
eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
falar
comer
abrir
falei
falou
falou
falamos
falaram
falaram
comi
comeu
comeu
comemos
comeram
comeram
abri
abriu
abriu
abrimos
abriram
abriram
a. The third person plural form of all preterits is often pronounced in Brazil as if the last
syllable were -rom.
b. Ali regular preterits of the second conjugation have the vowel // when it is stressed.
c. Note that the first person plural of regular preterits is identical with the form of the
present tense.
Uses of the preterit tense. This tense has retained in Portuguese both of the primary uses
of the Latin perfect tense. Thus
49.
a. It refers to a single past action, or to action or condition in the past which is Iimited in
extent of time. It is especially the tense of narration, and therefore of primary importance.
Hoje eu falei com ele.
Eu fiquei duas horas.
Ele trabalhou muito tempo.
Today I spoke to him.

I stayed two hours.
He worked a long time.
b. It is a present perfect tense, referring to an action as recently completed, like the present
perfect in English. ln this meaning it is frequently preceded by the adverb j, which often
does not need to be expressed in English. However, the presence or absence of j is not
necessarily a distinction between the two uses.
Voc j falou com o professor?
Voc j comeu?
Hoje ele trabalhou.
Have you spoken to the professor?

Have you (already) eaten?
Today he has worked. (or, He worked.)
Note: When the verb of a question is accompanied by j, an affirmative answer may be simply
j.
Voc j comeu? J.
Have you eaten? Yes

41
50. The preposition por. /pur/. The final -r is always pronounced in this word, with the
sound of single r between vowels. It forms contractions with the definite article, as follows:
por +
por +
por +
por +
o = pelo //
a = pela
os = pelos
as pelas
=
These contractions are obligatory . But no contractions are formed with por and any other word.
Some uses of por.
51 .
a. The agent by whom something is done is expressed with por.

A porta aberta pelo menino.
The door is opened by the boy.
b. Por = for (the sake of).

Ele faz isso s por fazer.
faz isso pelo filho.
O homem
C.
He does that just for the sake of doing it.

The man does that for (the sake of) his sono
Por = through.
I walked (alI) through the house.
Eu andei pela casa.
52. Possessive adjectives and pronouns of the third person . Although historically the adjec
tive seu applies to the third person, either singular or plural, and is regularly so used today in
the written language, in BF the word seu is reserved only for the meaning "your," whether the
subject is the familiar voc or the more formal o senhor, or their plurais. The student should not
be misled by the fact that "his," "her," "its," and "their" are often expressed by seu in litera
ture, including plays, and even in popular songs. Such usage in speaking will be misunderstood.
The following constructions are used in speech:
a. If the subject Df the clause is the possessor, or the reference is otherwise clear, only the
definite article is used.
Ele vendeu o carro.
Elas estudaram as lies.
Eles deixaram o irmo em casa.
Joo jantou na cidade ; a irm no jantou.
He sold his car.

They studied their lessons.
They left their b rother at home.
John ate dinner downtown; his sister has
not eaten.
b. If confusion would result from the use of only the defmite article, the following con
tractions are added after the noun:
dele
deles
his
their, theirs
Eu vou no carro dele.

O irmo delas alto.
Sua casa e a (casa) dele.
dela
delas
her, hers
their, theirs
I am going in his caro

Their brother is tall.
Your house and his (house).
Similar expressions may be used for the meanings "your," "yours," but not for the first per
san possessives.
Este palet de voc (seu).
Este chapu meu.
42
This coat is yours.

This hat is mine.
Vocabulary
Nouns
a avenida
a calada
o edifcio
o cinema
o teatro
o parque
o campo
o bairro
o vero
o nome
a praa
Adjectives
avenue
sidewalk
building
movie
theater
park
field, open plain
district (of city)
summer
name
(city) square
estreito
largo
alto
baixo
curto
comprido
longo
dividido
cultivado
pouco
poucos
muito /iii/
wish, want
go, walk
buy
Pronouns
Verbs
querer
andar
comprar
Adverbs
assim
enfim
j
thus, in thls way

in short; finally
already ; at once
Conjunction
porque /u/
que (reI.)
tudo (neuter)
qual, pI. quais
(interrog.)
narrow
wide
tall ; hlgh
low; short (stature)
short
long (space)
long (time)
divided
cultivated
little (amount)
few
much, pI. many
who, whlch, that.

aIl, everythlng
which; what (of two or
more)
Prepositions
por /ui
ao longo de
by; for ; through

along
because
Expressions
De onde?
De carro
De trem
Onde se acha?
Passar pela rua
Where from?
By car, in a car
By train, on a train
Where is it?
To go down (up) the street
Leitura
As grandes cidades so divididas em muitos bairros, que tm nomes. Assim, Copa cabana e
Ipanema so bairros da cidade do Rio de Janeiro. Esses bairros tm muitas ruas e avenidas
onde passam os carros que vo a outros bairros, ou que vo at as casas e lojas que se acham nas
ruas do bairro. As avenidas so largas, mas muitas ruas so estreitas. Ao longo das ruas e aveni
das h edifcios grandes e pequenos-lojas, casas, teatros e cinemas. Nas lojas vendem livros,
po, papel, lpis, enfim tudo.
Quando uma rua deixa a cidade e entra na roa, tem o nome de estrada. Na roa h muitas
casas, mas poucas lojas e nenhuns edifcios grandes. Ao longo da estrada se acham muitos cam
pos cultivados. Em frente das casas h jardins bonitos com flores e rvores. Vamos fazer uma
viagem de carro pela roa, porque bonita.
43
Exercise A. Be able to give either language :

1. o senhor est brincando?
Are you kidding?
2. Voc quer jantar l em casa hoje?
Will you have dinner at my house tonight?
3. No quero vender meu carro.
I don't want to seU my caro
4. Est querendo chover.
lt's trying to rain.
5. O senhor quer falar mais devagar?
Will you speak more slowly?
6. No vou porque no quero.
I'm not going because I don't want to.
7. No inverno as noites so longas.
ln winter the nights are longo
8. A longa viagem de volta difcil.
The long trip back is hard.
Exercise B. Give the form of the preterit which corresponds to the following present tense
forms:
1 . Ele acha
1 1 . Ns abrimos
2. Eu tomo
1 2. Eles partem
3. Ns tiramos
1 3 . Eu escrevo
4. Eles jantam
14. Ele estuda
5 . Eu vendo
1 5 . Eles guardam
6. Ele aprende
1 6. Eu deixo
7 . Ns comemos
1 7. Ele acaba
8. Eles compreendem
1 8. Voc passa
9. Eu abro
1 0. Ele parte
19 . Vocs pensam
20. Chove
Exercise C. Answer in the affirmative:

1 . Voc quer ir cidade?
2. Nevou na sexta-feira?
9. Voc comprou um carro?

10. Seu amigo partiu j?
3. Voc come po?
1 1 . Faz calor aqui no vero?
4. H muitas praas na cidade?
1 2. Voc vai ao cinema?
5 . Vocs j jantaram?
1 3 . Voc andou pelo parque?
6. A avenida larga?
14. Vamos passar pela praa?
7. Tem casas ao longo da rua?
1 5 . Voc faz viagens no vero?
8. Vocs j estudaram tudo?

Exercise D. Para responder em portugus, em sentenas:
1. A avenida larga ou estreita?
9. H mais rvores na cidade ou na roa?
2. O edifcio alto ou baixo?
1 0. Voc vai roa de carro ou de trem?
3. A rua curta ou comprida?
1 1 . Qual outro nome de um campo cultivado?
4. O vero quente ou frio?
1 2 . H muitos ou poucos parques nesta cidade?
5 . O teatro grande ou pequeno?
1 3 . Temos praas nas nossas cidades?
6. Qual um bairro do Rio?
14. Em que so divididas as cidades brasileiras?
7. Onde fica a calada?
1 5 . Voc deixou o livro em casa hoje?
8. Onde tem estradas?

Exercise E. Say in Portuguese:
1. A street passes through the city.
7. The name of that city is So Paulo.
2. A road passes throught the country.
8. This avenue is long and wide.
3. He does that for John's sake.

4. The fields are divided by the brothers.
9. He did not remember his coat.

10. I thought of you when I passed your house.
5. I'm going to take a trip by caro
1 1 . Joe married a girl at this church.
6. There are few stores in the country.
1 2. TIs district [of the city 1 has two large squares.
44
13.
1 4.
15.
1 6.
The short man is working in the snow.

17.
Do you want to sell your car?
1 8.
He passed down the street in his maroon caro 19.
My brother is going to write to yours.
20.
Your house is ta11 and white.

Is this your car ar his?
Did he understand his lesson?
I went through the park this aftemoon.

19. As far as the avenue.
20. Behind the theater
2 1 . ln front of the house.
22. With the orphans.
23. At night.
24. By the professor.
25. From the city.
26. Until Sunday.
27 . ln (the) summer.
28. [Leaving] for Portugal.
29. He sold a car to my brother.
30. It snowed at night.
3 1 . I wrote a letter.
32. They ate the rice.
33. I didn't understand you.
34. He learned (a) write.
35. They ate dinner.
1 . Through the fields.

2. Along the road.
3. Near the tree.
4. At the movie.
5. ln the moming.
6. To EraziI.
7. Of the girls.
8. On the building.
9. After (the) class.
1 0. Before (the) night.
1 1 . I want the flowers.
1 2. It rained ali night.
1 3 . He looked for his hat.
1 4. He got married.
1 5 . I used a peneiI.
1 6. He opened the door.
1 7 . He let Jae go.
1 8. Put away your books.
Lesson X
53.
The irregular verb dar, to give. Present indicative and preterit.

eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
Present
Preterit
dou
d
d
damos
do
do
dei
deu
deu
demos
deram //
deram
54.
Uses of dar. This verb, in addition to its basic meaning, is used in a great number of idio
matic expressions, in many of which other verbs are used in English.
Dar uma olhada
Dar um passeio
Dar aula
A janela d para a rua.
D nele!
Deram duas horas.
No d tempo para ir.
Dar bom dia
Dar para a msica
Dar (as) cartas
Dar um grito
To take a look
To take a walk (drive , ride)
To recite
The window faces the street.
Hit him!
It struck two.
There isn't time to go.
To say good moming
To be good at music
To deal (the) cards
To yelI
45
55.
Irregular preterits. The following verbs already given have irregular forms in the preterit
tense :
56.
estar
ser & ir
ter
fazer
querer
eu
estive
fui
tive
fiz
quis
voc
esteve //
foi
teve //
fz
quis
ele
esteve
foi
teve
fz
quis
ns
estivemos
fomos
tivemos
fizemos
quisemos
vocs
estiveram
foram
tiveram
fizeram
quiseram
eles
estiveram //
foram //
tiveram //
fizeram //
quiseram //
Radical-changing verbs, first and second conjugations. The vowels e and o , when they are
the last vowels before the ending of the infinitive, vary in pronunciation in the forms of the
present tense according to flXed rules. ln the first conjugation, they are open whenever they are
stressed, but closed when unstressed. Thus:
levar
morar
eu
levo //
moro //
voc
leva //
mora //
ele
leva //
mora //
ns
levamos
moramos
vocs
levam //
moram //
eles
levam //
moram //
All regular verbs of the first conjugation whose stem-vowels are e and o show this variation ex
cept the following types, which maintain the close vowel in ali forms:
a. Verbs in which one of these vowels is followed by a nasal consonant (n, nh, m), e.g.,
entrar, contar, tomar, desenhar.

b. Verbs in which this vowel is part of a diphthong, and is therefore not the last vowel before
the ending, e.g., deixar, poupar.
c. Verbs which end in -elhar or -ejar, e.g., aconselhar, desejar, However, the verb invejar is radi
cal-changing.
d. Verbs in -oar and -ear. This latter type does have a change, of a kind to be given late r.
Verbs in -oar are completely regular, with the vowel closed in alI forms, e.g. , voar.
e. The verbs chegar and fechar. Fechar is radical-changing in some regions, in others it is not.
Thus one may pronounce fecha either with l/ or with f/o
ln the second conjugation, the vowel remains closed in the first person, but is open in the
third.
conhecer
correr
eu
conheo l/
corro //
voc
conhece //
corre //
ele
conhece //
corre //
ns
conhecemos
corremos
vocs
conhecem //
correm //
eles
conhecem //
correm //
All regular verbs of the second conjugation whose stern vowels are e or o follow this pattern,
except those in which the vowel is followed by a nasal consonant, e.g., aprender, comer. These
maintain the closed vowel throughout. The folIowing verbs already studied have the radical
change : escrever, chover.
46
Vocabulary
Nouns
a olhada (para)
o passeio
o pai
papai
a me
mame
o primo
a prima
o tio
titio
a tia
titia
o, a parente
a visita
os pais
os tios
os primos
Verbs
look (at)
walk, ride, drive
(for pleasure)
father
Daddy
mother
Mommy
cousin
dar
levar
give ; strike
take, carry
morar
chegar (a or em)
fechar
conhecer
tive, dwell, reside

arrive, come, get to
shut, close
know (person) be ac
quainted with, meet,
recognize
run; hurry
like; love
correr
cousin
uncle
gostar de
Uncle
Adjective
aunt
vrios
Aunty
relative
Preposition
visit; visitor
longe de
parents
uncles; uncle and aunt
Adverbs
cousins
depois
amanh
several
far from
afterward (s)
tomorrow
Leitura
Amanh papai e mame vo chegar nesta cidade de visita, com meus tios, um primo e meu
irmo. Todos estes parentes querem visitar e conhecer a cidade onde eu estou morando. Eu
moro numa casa um pouco longe da cidade, num bairro onde h muitos jardins. Amanh de
tarde vamos dar um passeio de carro pela cidade-no carro de meu pai. Vamos ter que correr,
porque temos pouco tempo. Uma tarde no d para andar por todas partes.
Mame gosta de ir s loj as fazer compras. Papai quer conhecer os parques e ruas da cidade
e depois ir tomar caf . Ele no gosta dos passeios que levam muito tempo. Tambm ele acha
que mame compra muito quando vai s lojas.
Meus tios moram em outra cidade, no muito longe daqui. Titio o irmo de minha me
e titia a mulher dele. Ela j morou nesta cidade, onde tem muitos parentes. Os tios vo fazer
uma visita a estes parentes.
Exercise A. Be able to give either language, from the other:
1 . Ele chegou de nibus.

2. Mame est aqui de visita.
3. Ele acaba de chegar.
4. O caf no chega para todos.
5. Isso chega a dez cruzeiros.
6. O passeio levou uma hora.
7. Vou visitar um amigo.
8. Ela gosta de voc.
9. Eu tenho que correr.
1 0. Conheci o Joo no clube.
He came by bus.
Mother is here on a visito
He has just gotten here.
There isn't enough coffee to go around.
That amounts to 1 0 cruzeiros.
The drive took an hour.
I'm going to see a friend.
She likes (loves) you.
I must hurry.
I met John at the club.
47
Exercise B. Change the pronouns and verbs to the plural form:

1. Eu moro nesta cidade.
2. Ele chega em casa.
3. Eu corro para l.
4. Ele gosta de voc.
5 . Ele leva voc escola.
6. Eu fecho a porta.
7. Eu conheo sua prima.
8. Ele escreve cartas.
9. Eu deixo voc aqui.
1 0. Ele toma caf.
Exercise C. Answer in the affirmative :

1 . Voc foi cidade hoje?
2. Seu irmo esteve na aula hoje?
3. Jos e Maria j partiram para o Brasil?
4. Voc ficou em casa sbado?
5 . Ele falou portugus com voc?
6. Voc j comeu?
7. Eles quiseram partir?
8. Vocs fizeram uma viagem?
9. Voc aprendeu portugus no Brasil?
1 0. Vocs j tomaram caf?
Exercise D. Answer with one of the words in parentheses, or others, forming complete sentences:
1 . Por quem a porta foi aberta?
2. Por quanto tempo voc vai ficar aqui?
3. Por onde voc vai passar na viagem?
4. At onde vamos?
5 . Como so as ruas de Copacabana?
(o menino, o alemo, Maria)

(trs dias, uma semana)
(A cidade, a roa, o Brasil)
(a casa de meu tio, o bairro de Ipanema)
(largo, estreito, bonito)
Exercise E. Give the third.person form corresponding to the firstperson form given here:
1 . Falo
2. Chego
3. Fico
4. Tomo
5 . Estudo
6. Acho
7. Entro
8. Acabo
9. Sou
1 0. Estou
1 1 . Dou
1 2. Vou
13. Deixo
1 4. Como
1 5. Parto
1 6. Escrevo
1 7 . Compreendo
1 8 . Quero
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
Fao
Vendo
Levo
Moro
Fecho
Corro
Desejo
Exercise F. Give the preterit forms which correspond in person and number to the follow
ing forms of the present:
1 . Estou
2. Falamos
3. Estudam
4. Trabalha
5. Passo
6. Fico
7. Tomam
8. Sou
9. Deixo
10. Vai
48
1 1 . Quero
1 2 . Come
1 3 . Escreve
1 4. Corro
1 5 . D
1 6. Como
17. Corre
1 8.
1 9 . Vamos
20. Querem
2 1 . Andam
22. Tenho
23. Fazemos
24. Corremos
25. Comem
26. Anda
27. Tm
28. Faz
29. Levo
30. Somos
Exercise G. Say in Portuguese:

1 1 . Do you know my father?
1 2. Where do you live?
1 3 . He struck the boy with bis hand.
1 4. We took a look at the city.
1 5. Let's take a walk on the avenue.
1 6. My aunt's son is my cousin.
1 7. We have to hurry.
1 8. I don't like Mr. Garcia.
1 9. It's going to take a long time .
20. I have several relatives there.
1 . Run to the door.

2. Shut the window.
3. I know you.
4. Take this.
5. Wear your coat.
6. Leam this lesson.
7 . Take off your shoes.
8. Play in the yard.
9. Be good.
1 0. Drink your coffee.
Lesson XI
57.
The irregular verb poder, can, may, be able. Forms of the present and preterit indicative.
eu
Voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
Present
Preteri!
posso //
pode //
pode
podemos /pu/
podem //
podem
pude
pde
pde
pudemos
puderam //
puderam
Note the difference in pronunciation between pode, present tense, and pde, preterit. But
podemos and pudemos are pronounced alike. Poder is followed by the infinitive without a
preposition.
58. Poder in the preterit tense. The uses of the preterit of this verb are limited to situations in
wbich momentary possibilities are indicated. Frequent1y it expresses a successful or unsuccess
fuI attempt to do something.
Eu quis entrar, mas no pude abrir a

porta.
I tried to get in, but I couldn't open the

door.
Eu pude ir na semana passada, mas nesta

semana no posso.
I managed to go last week, but this week I

can't.
59. Use of the simple present for the future. We are already acquainted with the use of the
auxiliary verb ir to express future action. The simple present tense is often used, especially in
BF. If futurity is otherwise expressed, e .g., by an adverb or adverb phrase, or is clear from the
context, the simple present is sufficient to give the meaning. The true future indicative is com
paratively little used in conversation. But do not use the progressive present for the future, as
is often done in English.
Amanh eu falo com o professor.
Ele vai domingo.
Joo no fz o trabalho, mas eu fao.
Ele parte amanh.
Tomorrow 1'11 speak to the teacher.

He is going Sunday.
John didn't do bis work, but 1'11 do it.
He is leaving tomorrow.
49
The progressive present is used for present action.

Joo no fz o trabalho, mas eu estou
John didn't do his work, but I'm doing it.
fazendo.
60.
The personal pronoun objects of the first person. The forms used as either direct or in
direct objects of the first person are as follows:

me /rni/
me, to me, myself, to myself
nos /nus/
us, to us, ourselves, to ourselves
Note : Do not confuse
61 .
nos with ns, "we."
Placing of the object pronouns. The position of these and other object pronouns in re
lation to the verb varies somewhat, but the following are rules which may be followed, and
which permit one to speak colloquially and at the sarne time in a fashion acceptable in the
literary language.
a. Place an object
before a one-word verb, unless it would become the first word of a clause.
If no word precedes the verb in the clause, one may use a subject pronoun first, or may place
the object after the verbo
Ele me deu um livro.
He gave me a book.
Deu-me um livro.
He gave me a book.
b. Place the object before a one-word verb when it is preceded by a negative word, a relative
pronoun, a subordinating conjunction, an adverb, or by an expressed subject.
Aquele o homem que me deu isto.
That is the man who gave me this.
No nos deu trabalho.
It gave us no trouble.
Ele me conheceu quando me achou.
He recognized me when he found me.
Sempre nos do caf .
They always give u s coffee.
Joo me escreveu uma carta.
John wrote me a letter.
c. ln verb phrases made up of querer,
poder, ir, etc. and an infinitive, or of estar and the
present participle, the object precedes the second verb, whether or not the words mentioned
in (b) precede the first verbo
Ele est me escrevendo.
He is writing to me.
Joo no quer me dar o livro.
John won't give me the book.
Voc no pode me pegar.
Vou can't catch me.
d. The object usually precedes the infinitive, unless it would be the first word of a clause.
When the infrnitive follows a preposition, its object may follow, but more often precedes it
in BF.
Pegar-me o que ele quer.
What he wants is to catch me.
Ele correu para me pegar or pegar-me.
He ran to catch me.
Note : When these objects follow a verb form, they are connected with it by a hyphen.
Vocabulary
Nouns
a (sala de) aula
classroom
a caneta / /
pen
a turma
class (
o quadro-negro //
blackboard
people);
"the gang"
50
pI. quadros-negros
Verbs
Nouns
o giz
chalk
pegar
o, a colega //
colleague ; classmate
esquecer
forget
o ano
year
chamar
call
preparar
prepare, get (something)
a universidade
university
a faculdade
college, school
a vez //
time, occasion
a estao
season ; station
a primavera //
spring
o vero
summer
o outono
catch
ready
freqentar
(of a university)
attend
Adverbs
ontem
yesterday
ontem noite
last night
hoje ( noite)
tonight
fall, autumn
ainda
still, yet
ainda no
not yet
o inverno //
winter
Adjectives
o ms
month
pI. meses
Preposition
por /pur/
per
passado
past, last
presente
present (all senses)
ausente
absent
quanto?
how much?
quantos?
how many?
Expressions
Como se chama voc?
What's your name? (What do you call your-
Eu me chamo Pedro.
My name's Pete.
Chamo-me Pedro.
My name's Pete.
Vamos faculdade.
Let's go over to the University.
self?)
Vamos aula.
Let's go to class.
Freqentamos aulas de ingls.
We attend English classes.
Duas vezes
Twice
Trs vezes
Three times
Uma vez
Once
A semana passada
Last week.
Na semana passada
(At some time in) last week
Peguei no sono.
I fell asleep.
Peguei a gripe.
I caught the fluo

Leitura
Ns freqentamos a faculdade de ftlosofia, cincias e letras desta universidade. Temos aulas

de ingls, de histria, de cincia e de portugus.
Vamos s aulas de portugus trs vezes por semana-segundas, quartas e sextas. A sala de
aula grande e tem vrias janelas que do para o jardim da universidade. Os estudantes tm
cadeiras com um brao onde escrevem. O professor tem uma cadeira e uma mesa. H quadros
negros onde podemos escrever com giz.
Temos uma' boa turma de estudantes. Gosto de todos os meus colegas. Todos querem apren
der depressa, preparam bem as lies e do aula falando portugus. Poucas vezes estamos ausen
tes das aulas.
Nos trs meses de vero no temos aulas, mas temos no outono, no inverno e na primavera.
51
Exercise A. Answer in Portuguese :

1 . Como se chama voc?
2. Que foi que voc esqueceu esta manh?
3. A chuva pegou voc na rua?
4. Aonde foi voc ontem noite?

5. Que aulas voc freqenta?
6. Voc ainda lembra os nomes das estaes do ano? Quais so?
7. Que estao temos este ms?
8. Com que voc escreve no quadro-negro?
9. Com que escreve no papel?
1 0. Quando voc vai faculdade?
1 1 . Quantas aulas voc tem hoje?
1 2. Quantas vezes por semana voc tem aulas de ingls?
1 3 . Quantos estudantes esto presentes hoje?
14. Quantos esto ausentes?

1 5. A sua turma grande ou pequena?
1 6. Voc j preparou a lio de amanh?
1 7. Voc vai ao cinema hoje?
1 8 . Voc quer me comprar um caf?
1 9 . Quanto tempo voc passa estudando?
20. Que tempo est fazendo agora?
Exercise B. Give the corresponding form of the preterit:
1 . Eu posso
1 1 . Eles esto
2 . Ele vai
1 2. Voc vai
3 . Ele escreve
1 3 . Ns temos
4. Eu fao
1 4. Eu quero
5 . Ns somos
1 5 . Eu esqueo
6. Eles fazem
1 6. Ele guarda
7. Ele freqenta
1 7. Ele compreende
8. Eu chamo
1 8. Chove
9. Eles esquecem
1 9 . Eu ando
1 0. Ele d
20. Ele corre
Exercise C. Exchange subjects and objects of the verbs in the fol1owing expressions (Example:
I see you. Answer: You see me.):

6. Eu chamei o senhor.
1 . Voc me esqueceu.
2. Os senhores nos conhecem.
7. Eu levo voc festa.
3. Eu achei vocs em casa.

4. A senhora no me compreende.
5. Eu deixei o Joo na cidade.
8. Vocs nos pegaram.

9. Eu estou procurando voc .
1 0. Vocs no podem me deixar.
Exercise D. Read the following words, taking care to give the proper value to the stressed
vowels:
1 . porta
8 . rfo
2. professor
9. arroz
1 5 . sorte
1 6. loja
3. moa
1 0. hora
1 7. todo
4. escola
1 1 . palet
1 8 . nosso
5 . flor
1 2. roa
1 9 . chuvoso
6. voz
1 3 . prova
20. s
7. copo
14. calor
2 1 . hoje
52
Exercise E. Express the following verbs in the simple present, without the auxiliary verb ir:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Eu vou esquecer voc amanh.

Ele vai pegar o trem ainda hoje.
Amanh vamos jantar em casa.
Ele vai me levar cidade hoje tarde.
S. Amanh vou procurar meu colega.
1 . I caught the train at the station.

2. My name is John.
3. I have already gone to class twice.
4. He called us, and we went to his house.
5. How many classmates do you have?
6 . Tomorrow I'm going to school.
7. She gets here tomorrow night.
8. We spent last week with my brother.
9. Take your friend to the coffee shop.
1 0. I couldn't get in through the window.
1 1 . I have forgotten my breakfast.
1 2. He did that two or three times.
1 3. (ln) last summer, we put away our books.
14. How many times per week do you have class?
1 5 . Vou will find the bus station on the comer.
1 6. Are you going to town by car or by bus?
1 7 . He attends classes at the university.
18. He is going to the party tomorrow.
1 9 . He is the friend that you met last week.
20. I caught the rain and it (ela) caught me.
Lesson XII
62.
The irregular verb pr, to put, place, pour.

eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
Present
Preterit
ponho
pe
pe
pomos
pem
pem
pus
ps
ps
pusemos
puseram //
puseram
The third plural present form pem is usually pronounced exactly like the singular. It may also
be pronounced in two syllables, as if written pe-em. Like the singular, the plural is used as an
imperative.
53
Uses of pr. Tbis word has a wide variety of uses. For tbis reason, and because there are
some fifteen verbs derived from it, it is very important to master the forms of pr. Some of the
situations in wbich the simple verb is used are illustrated below.
63.
Ele ps a roupa.
Ele ps a mo no bolso.
Eu ponho gua para voc .
A galinha ps um ovo.
Ela ps a mesa.
Pe a mala a.
He put on bis clothes.

He put bis hand in bis pocket.
1'11 pour you some water.
The hen laid an egg.
She set the table.
Put the suitcase (down) there.
64. Verbs derived from pr. The many derivatives of pr alI have forms like those of the sim
pIe verb, preceded by a prefix or prefixes. They correspond in general to English verbs with the
root -pose, but they often have wider application than these . The accent is not needed on de
rived infinitives. Some of the derivatives are the following:
propor
repor
repor-se
compor
compor-se
depor
dispor de
suggest, propose
put back
recover (strength)
compose, make up
compose onesself
set down ; depose
have at one's disposal
expor
impor
opor (a)
opor-se a
descompor
decompor
recompor
expose; express
impose, be imposing
contrast (with)
oppose
confuse ; scold
cause to decompose
recompose, reconcile
The future subjunctive. The future subjunctive forros of any verb may be derived by re
moving the fmal -ram of the third person plural of the preterit, and adding the following
endings: -r, -r, -rmos, -rem.
65.
fazer: 3rd plural preterit: fizeram
Future subjunctive
eu fizer //
voc fizer //
ele fizer //
ns fizermos //
vocs fizerem //
eles fizerem //
The stressed vowel of the future subjunctive is thus always the sarne as that of the third per
son plural of the preterit. It is helpful to become thoroughly familiar with the future subjunc
tive forms of the verbs wbich have irregular preterits, so that it will not be necessary to derive
them. The following are the singular forms of those irregular verbs we have already studied.
Future subjunctive
estar
ser
ir
ter
fazer
estiver //
for //
for //
tiver //
fizer //
Future subjunctive
querer
dar
poder
pr
quiser //
der //
puder //
puser //
It will be noted that in regular verbs the singular of this tense will be exactly like the infmitive,
e.g., falar, comer, abrir.
54
Uses of the future subjunctive. ln spite of the forbidding sound of the name "future sub- .
junctive," it is one of the simplest forms to master. It is extremely important in colloquial as
well as in !iterary Portuguese. The Brazilian child learns it very early, soon after the preterit,
largely because of its frequent use after the basic conjunctions if and when.
66.
The future subjunctive is used in subordinate clauses following certain, but not al!, adverbial
conjunctions of time, and after some other conjunctions, whenever futurity is implied. The
following conjunctions require, or in some cases, permit, the use of the future subjunctive of
the following verb , whenever it refers to future action or condition. But remember that we have
been using the indica tive with quando, when futurity was not imp!ied. The following must be
followed by the future subjunctive when futurity is implied:
se
if
enquanto while
quando when
The foUowing may be foUowed by the future subjunctive in such cases, and usually are in BF.
The alternative is the present subjunctive.
logo que
depois que
as soon as
after
as soon as
in case
assim que
caso
There are, however, some conjunctions of time which may not be followed by the future sub
junctive. For examples of the use of this form, see Exercise A, below.
67.
The object pronouns se, lhe, lhes.
Se is the reflexive object pronoun used with the new second-person and with the third-person
subjects. It is singular or plural, direct or indirect object. It may be translated as yourself,
yourselves, himself, herself, itself, themselves, to yourself, etc.
Lhe is the indirect object referring to the singular pronouns of the second and third persons,
and is translated to you (sing.), to him, to her, to it, for you, etc. Lhes is used in the plural.
These pronouns are placed with respect to the verb according to the same principies as me
and nos.
Ele se acha no jardim.
He finds hlmself ( is) on the lawn.
Como se chama voc?
How do you call yourself? (what is your
name?)
Eles se deixaram levar.
They let thernselves be taken.
Eu lhe escrevi uma carta.
I wrote him (her, you) a letter.
Ns lhes demos caf.
We gave them (you) some coffee.
=
Vocabulary
Nouns
o casaco
Deus
Verbs
topcoat; lady's coat
God
Pronouns
se /si/
lhe /Ii/
lhes /!is/
See above
See above
See above
cansar
cansar-se
perguntar
parecer
parecer (-se) com
aparecer
contar
lembrar-se de
chamar-se
achar-se
tire ; get tired

get tired
ask (question)
seem, look like, appear
resemble
appear ( be visible)
teU (story); count
remember, remember to
be called, be named
be located
=
55
Conjunctions
se /si/
se . . . no
enquanto
enquanto . . . no
if
if not, unless
while
until
logo que //
assim que
depois que
caso
as soon as
as soon as
after
in case (that)
Expressions
Perguntei isso a Joo.
Perguntamos por voc.
I asked John that.

We asked for you.
Exercise A. Be able to give either language from the other:

1. Eu vou comer quando chegar em casa.
2. Vamos gostar da viagem, se formos com
I'm going to eat when I get home.

We're going to enjoy the trip, if we go with
Joe .
We want to study tonight, if we have time.
Jos.
3. Queremos estudar esta noite, se tivermos
tempo.
4. Passa l em casa, se puder.
5. Chove ainda hoje, se Deus quiser.
6. Eu levo o livro amanh, se no esquecer.
7. Eu fico estudando enquanto vocs
acabarem o trabalho.
8. Vamos tomar caf enquanto no jantarmos.
9. Podemos ficar enquanto no derem quatro
horas.
10. Vamos festa logo que Joo e Maria
chegarem.
1 1 . No podemos brincar no parque quando
fizer frio.
Go by the house, if you cano

It'll still rain today, God willing.
I'll take the book tomorrow, unless I forget.
1'11 keep on studying while you finish your
work.
Let's have coffee while waiting for dinner.
We can stay until it strikes four.
We are going to the party as soon as John
and Mary come.
We won't be able to play in the park when
it gets cold.
Exercise B. Give the verb forms corresponding to those of the present:
Present
1 . Eu ponho
2. Ele est
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Ns podemos
Eles acham
Eu tenho
Eles vo
Ele d
Eu posso
Ns pomos
10. Eles querem
Preterit
Future Subjunctive
ontem eu
ontem ele
ontem ns
ontem eles
ontem eu
ontem eles
ontem ele
ontem eu
ontem ns
ontem eles
se eu
se ele
se ns
se eles
se eu
se eles
se ele
se eu
se ns
se eles
Exercise C. Put in the blanks the correct forms of the verbs in parentheses:
a porta.
1 . (abrir) Ele me pegou quando eu
2. (chegar) Eles vo me levar para l quando eles
_
_
_
_
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
56
(acabar) Eu lhe conto tudo, depois que voc

(pr) Eu ponho o palet, se voc tambm
(fazer) Vamos ficar em casa, caso
(ir) Vou deixar os livros aqui, enquanto
(dar) Vamos estudar, enquanto no
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
____
mau tempo.
ao caf.
duas horas.
8. (chover) Nunca andamos na rua quando

que ir?
9. (ter) Voc quer fechar a porta quando
10. (fechar) Ficou mais quente em casa depois que eu
1 1 . (querer) Eles podem partir quando
com frio.
12. (estar) Voc pode fechar a janela se
_
_
_
_
____
a porta.
_
_
_
_
Exercise D. Give the second and third persons in the sarne tense and number as the examples,
e.g., I got tired, you got tired, he got tired:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Eu me cansei.
Ns nos chamamos Carvalho.
Eu me oponho a isso.
Eu me deixei levar.
Eu me expus neve.
6. Ns nos dispomos a traballiar.

7. Eu no quero me cansar.
8. Lembrei-me do Joo.
9. Ns nos preparamos para partir.
1 0. Eu me comprei um carro.
Exercise E. Change the obj ect pronoun to the third person, e.g., to me-to him:
1 . Joo me deu uma caneta.
2.Voc nos fz uma pergunta.
3. Voc me lembrou que tenho que ir.
4. Perguntou-me o nome.
5. Parece-me que vai chover.
1 . He got tired.
2. I told him that.
3. If you want to learn, study hard.
4. His name is Joe.
5. Go there as soon as you cano
6. He is going to buy a house, in case he
marries.
7. Write him a letter while you are here.
8. Where is the church located?
9. I can't understand unless you speak slowly.
10. Let me take off my coat.
1 1 . It seems to us that you don't know uso

1 2. Do you remember that boy?
1 3 . He wears a topcoat in (the) winter.
14. Put on your coat and let's go to the
party.
1 5 . Vou may have coffee now, if you wish.
1 6. 1'11 think of you when we go to Brazil.
1 7. He will arrive by bus, if he cano
Lesson XIII
68.
The irregular verb dizer, to say, te11.

eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
69.
Present lndicative
Preterit
Future Subjunctive
digo
diz
diz
dizemos
dizem
dizem
disse
disse
disse
dissemos
disseram //
disseram //
disser //
disser //
disser //
dissermos //
disserem //
disserem //
Uses of dizer.
Dizer means to say ar to tell when the statement that fo11ows is a direct or indirect quatatian.
It also means to tell to in the sense af giving an arder.
57
Contar means to tell in the sense of to narra te, or to tell a lie. Falar is to speak, with or without
an object, or to talk. ln Rio it may often be heard when one might expect dizer.
70.
Form of the verb which follows a preposition. With one exception of very limited use,
ali prepositions in Portuguese require that the following verb form be an infinitive. Note that
English often uses the gerund in -ing.

Antes de entrar
Para dizer
Depois de comer
Before entering
ln order to say
After eating
71.
Personal pronoun direct objects, third person. ln BF, the direct objects him, her, them, it
are almost never expressed if they are unstressed. If stress is required for emphasis or contrast,
one uses the subject forms ele, ela, eles, elas. The neuter stressed object, not referring to a noun,
is usually isso.
This construction is considered incorrect by grammarians. However, it has existed in the

language since the Middle Ages, and has been generally accepted as a normal part of BF. The
unstressed forms would be lost in a large percentage of cases in Braziliao speech, because of
encounters with like vowels at the beginnings or ends of other words. ln the few cases in which
clarity would require an object, the sentence is constructed in such a way as to avoid the diffi
culty. The unstressed forms are used in writing to a limited extent, less than in English, to say
nothing of Spanish. ln BF they do not existo
Unstressed forms
Stressed forms
o
a
os
ele
ela
eles
as
o
elas
isso
him; it (masculine)
her; it (feminine)
them (masculine or
masculine and feminine)
them (feminine)
it (neuter)
Unstressed forms are sometimes heard following ao infinitive, in some fixed expressions and in
the higher leveis of speech. ln this case, the infmitive drops the fmal -r, the preceding vowel re
quires an accent in the first and second conjugations, and the object takes a form beginning with
I, as in the following examples :
Muito prazer em conhec-lo.
Antes de faz-lo.
Voc quer lev-Ias?
Vou abri-los
(I'm) very happy to meet you.

Before doing it .
Will you take them?
I'm going to open them.
Actually, only the first example is likely to be heard often . For examples of the use and omis
sion of third person object pronouns, see Exercise A, below.
72.
Regular comparison of adjectives and adverbs. The comparative degree of adjectives and
adverbs is formed by placing mais before them. The superlative degree of adjectives is the sarne,
but preceded by the defmite article (which rnay be replaced by a possessive adjective). With
adverbs, the article is used only when a modifying word, phrase or c1ause follows the adverb.
58
73 .
Positive
Compara tive
Superlative
bonito
frio
perto
mais bonito
mais frio
mais perto
devagar
mais devagar
o mais bonito
o mais frio
mais perto
o mais perto possvel
o mais devagar que se
possa imaginar
Irregular comparison of adjectives and adverbs. The following are irregular:

bom
mau
ruim
muito
grande
pequeno
bem
mal
pouco
melhor jj
pior jj
pior, mais ruim
mais
maior jj
menor jj
(AIso mais pequeno, in Portugal)
melhor
pior
menos
o melhor
o pior
o pior, o mais ruim
o mais
o maior
o menor
(o) melhor
(o) pior
(o) menos
Portuguese equivalents of than. Than is usuaJly expressed by que, but the foJlowing must
be noted:
74.
a. When it is foJlowed by a number, de is used instead of que.

b. When the second term of the comparison is a verb, do que must be used. It does not
change for gender or number. Do que may also be used at any time instead of que alone.
I have more than three friends.
He is talJer than I.
He drinks more than he eats.
Tenho mais de trs amigos.

Ele mais alto que (or do que) eu.
Ele bebe mais do que come.
Vocabulary
Nouns
o sapateiro
o padeiro
o leiteiro
a pessoa jj
duas pessoas
o mdico
o soldado
o rei
o patro
a patroa jj
o empregado
a empregada
a histria
a profisso
Nouns
shoemaker, shoe
selJer, cobbler
baker
milkman
person
two people (persons)
doctor, physician
soldier
king
employer, "boss"
employer, "boss"
employee,
employee, maid
story, history
profession
o prazer jj
o consultrio
a manteiga
pleasure
office (doctor' s)
butter
Adjectives
feliz jfij
rico
velho jj
doente jduj
possvel jpuj
muito
nem muito
happy
rich
old
sick, ill
possible
lots of, a lot of, a good
deal of, much
not much
S9
Conjunction
Verbs
consultar
ou . . . ou
consult
beber
drink
consertar
repair, mend, "fix"
either . . . or
Adverbs
mandar
order, have (done)
menos
less
tratar
treat
mal
badly, m, poorly
entregar
hand over; deliver
deixar de
stop (doing something)
deixar
leave alone.
Prepositions
entre
between; among
durante
during
para /pra/
in order to
Expressions
Encontrei-me com ele.
I ran into him, I met him.
Mandei consertar o casaco.
I had my coat mended.
Falei com vrias pessoas.
I spoke to several people.
Meu irmo mais velho.
My older (oldest) brother.
Trabalho para o sr. Pires.
I work for Mr. Pires.
Ele chamou o Joo de menino.
He called John a boy.

Leitura
Entre as pessoas que trabalham na cidade se encontram padeiros, leiteiros e sapateiros. O

padeiro faz po durante a noite e vende quente de manh. Tambm chamamos de padeiro o
homem que entrega po quente nas casas. Os brasileiros comem po manteiga com o caf da
manh.
O sapateiro ou faz ou vende ou conserta sapatos. Poucas pessoas mandam fazer sapatos agora,
mas muitas levam ao sapateiro para consertar.
O nosso mdico tem um consultrio na cidade. Quando ficamos doentes, vamos consultar o
mdico. Quando eu estive doente, foi ele que me examinou e tratou.
Muitas pessoas trabalham na cidade como empregados. Trabalham para um patro ou uma
patroa. As empregadas domsticas geralmente trabalham para a patroa e fazem trabalhos de
casa. H homens que chamam a mulher de patroa.
Exercise A. Use of object pronouns.
1 . Voc me disse que ele lhe escreveu.
2. Disseram-me que Jos jantou com voc .
3. Ele vendeu o carro e no me disse.
4. Ela conhece essa histria mas no conta.
5. Eu encontrei o Joo e levei cidade .
6. Ele fala portugus, mas no escreve.
7. Achamos uma casa bonita, que compramos.

8. Eu estudei a lio, mas j esqueci.
9. Disseram que Joo e Maria estiveram na festa; encontrei ela l.
1 0. Quero examinar o livro antes de comprar.
1 1 . Chamei voc e ele.
1 2. Ele guardou as cartas e me deu.
1 3 . Falo um pouco de portugus, mas nunca estudei.
14. Ele comprou uma flor e deu a Maria.
1 5 . Perguntei-lhe o nome do irmo.
16. Eu vou at achar a estrada.
60
1 7. Tenho um carro para vender.

1 8 . Depois de jantar, vou ao cinema.
19. Ele mais alto que voc.
20. Por aqui chove mais do que neva.
2 1 . J comi mais de uma /ua/ banana.
22. Meu tio tambm meu patro.
23. Levei os sapatos ao sapateiro e mandei consertar.
24. Que que voc tem na mo? Me d isso!
Exercise B. Be able to give in either language:
My brother is bigger than I .
He is not older.
It is easier to write than to speak.
He is sicker than I .
I have only six classmates who are married.
Today it is cloudier than yesterday.
I like coffee better than milk.
This cup is smaller than that one.
He is bad, worse than his brother.
She speaks well, but you speak better.
Vou are sick ; speak as little as possible.
If you wish to finish the course, you'll have
to study more than any of the others.
1 . Meu irmo maior do que eu.

2. Ele no mais velho.
3. mais fcil escrever do que falar.
4. Ele est mais doente do que eu.
S . No tenho mais de seis colegas casados.
6. Hoje est mais nublado do que ontem.
7. Eu gosto mais de caf do que de leite.
8. Esta xcara menor que aquela.
9. Ele ruim, pior que o irmo.
10. Ela fala bem, mas voc fala melhor.
.
1 1 . Voc est doente ; fala o menos possvel.
12. Se voc quiser acabar o curso, tem que
estudar mais que todos.
4. I know neither John nor Mary.

5 . I never told him that.
6. Nothing will catch you out there.
1 . I don't know anyone here.

2. He doesn't do anything.
3. He thinks he as no friends.
Exercise D. Put in each blank the correct form of the verb used in the first part of the sentence:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ele quer ir. Voc pode ir quando ele

Acho que no posso ficar. Fico se
Pode chover, mas vamos brincar enquanto no
Ele diz que me d um lpis. Depois que
S. Eu vou com eles, caso
6. Abrem as portas s seis horas ; logo que
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
, eu escrevo.
, vou entrar.
Exercise E. Give the pluraIs of the following nouns and adjectives:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
O animal
O hotel
O sol
O papel
O jornal
O motel
O espanhol
8.
9.
1 0.
11.
1 2.
1 3.
1 4.
1 5. social
1 6. nominal
17. numeral
1 8. possvel
19. mundial
20. continental
Total
Fatal
Difcil
azul
fcil
til
geral
Exercise F . Say in Portuguese:

1 . My boss thinks he is the king.
2. A classmate flXed my shoes.
3. I'm going to have this done.
4. Dr. Pires is the doctor who treats uso
5.
6.
7.
8.
We'll deliver this to your house.

What is your profession?
I met Joe at the party.
The house is (situated) among the trees.
61
ln order to arrive tonight, you'lI have to hurry.

Two soldiers are guarding the road.
1 1 . They are older than I [am] .
1 2. We live near the doctor's office.
1 3 . Are the rich happy?
1 4. Either the lady or her maid will be here tomorrow.
1 5 . We drink lots of rnilk during the day.
9.
1 0.
Exercise G.
I . Take this and give it to John.
I took the chalk, but I didn't use it.

I understand German, but I don't speak it.
4. We have a lesson tomorrow, but we aren't going to study it.
5. Here is your hat; take it.
6. Is my book in this room? I can't find it.
7. That pen is mine; leave it talone) .
8. Vou are going to speak Portuguese when you leam it.
9. Write me a letter and I'll open it.
1 0. He speaks well, but I can't understand him.
1 1 . I met him yesterday.
1 2 . Mary went with John; he took her to the station.
1 3. They didn't call me ; I called them.
14. I [will] not forget you.
1 5 . Tell me a story and 1'11 remember it.
2.
3.
!.esson XIV
75.
The irregular verb ver, to see.

eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
Present Indicative
Preterit
Future Subjunctive
vejo //
v
v
vemos
vem
vem
vi
viu
viu
vimos
viram
viram
vir
vir
vir
vinnos
virem
virem
The third person plural present indicative is pronounced in two syllables, of which the first is
not nasal.
The preterit (and derived tenses) of this verb is like those of regular verbs of the third conjuga
tion.
76.
Uses of ver. ln English, verbs of perception and of predominantly mental activity often do
not take the progressive formo ln Portuguese, however, these verbs are put in the progressive
form in the same situations as any other verbs.
Voc explicou isso, e agora eu estou vendo.
Estou vendo o Joo na porta da casa.
No estou compreendendo.
62
Vou e xplained it, and now I see.

I see John in the doorway of the house.
I don't understand.
77.
Forms of the personal pronouns used as objects of prepositions. A preposition is followed

by the subject form of the pronoun, except in the first person singular and the third person re
flexive. These two have special forms.
a mim
para voc
por ele
sem ela
But a si
to me
para ns
for you
entre vocs
by him
com eles
without her
sobre elas
to yourself, himself, themselves, etc.
for us
among you
with them
about them
a. The preposition com combines in special forros with some pronouns.

comigo /k/
with me
conosco with us
consigo with himself,
b. The prepositions de and em form contractions with the third-person pronouns as follows:
dele
dela
deles
delas
nele
nela
neles
nelas
78.
Prepositional phrase used as indirect object. The indirect object may be expressed as a
prepositional phrase in all cases. If the object is a pronoun, it can be emphasized by the use of a
phrase instead of the simple pronoun. ln other cases, the phrase is optional. Either form, e.g.,
lhe or a ele, may be used in any c1ause containing a verb, but one never uses both, as in Spanish.
To express the meaning "for me," the preposition is para. For "to me," either a or para may be
used in most cases, with some preference for para in BF.
Note that the prepositional phrase is placed in the sarne position in the sentence, whether a noun
or pronoun is used. ln most cases, this is the sarne position occupied by the phrase in English.
Eu lhe dei o jornal.
Eu dei o jornal a ele.
Ele tem um presente para voc.
Vamos escrever-lhe uma carta.
Vamos escrever uma carta para (a) ele.
D isso para mim.
Conta-nos essa histria.
I gave him the newspaper.

I gave the newspaper to him.
He has a present for you.
Let's write him a letter.
Let's write a letter to him.
Give it to me.
TeU that story to us.
79. Que and qual. As interrogative pronouns, these two words should be distinguished. Que
(singular or plural) is used to ask for what amounts to a definition; qual (plural quais) asks for a
selection among individual specimens. The confusion arises purely from English, which is likely
to use what in either case.
Que o livro?
Qual o livro?
Qual o seu nome?
What is the book? (a novel, etc.)

Which one is the book?
What is your name? (which of the possible
names is yours? )
Qual is not properly used as an adjective, although it may be heard in BF in certain situations.
Que should be used in ali cases before li noun.
Que casa a sua?
Qual a sua casa?
Which (what) house is yours?

Which one is your house?
63
Vocabulary
Nouns
Nouns
o cruzeiro
o jornal
o dinheiro
a compra
o presente
o largo
a livraria
o livreiro
o preo ll
a falta
as Lojas Brasileiras
o brinquedo ll
a diferena
cruzeiro (Braz.
monetary unit)
newspaper
money
purchase, buy
present
square (in city)
bookstore
bookseller
price
lack; need; shortage
Pronouns
mim
si
comigo Ikl
conosco Ikl
consigo
Adjectives
outro
um outro
noutro
(em + outro)
novo l l
fem. and pI. ll
me (after prep.)
himself, etc. (after
prep.)
with me
with us
with him (seU), etc.
Verbs
explicar
arranjar
other, another
another
in another
dever
receber
saltar
new, young
Adverb
ento
variety stores
toy
difference
then (expletive),
then (at that time)
tentar
ganhar
voltar
explain
get (for one), arrange,
fix up with
owe, ought, should
receive, get
jump, jump down, get
off
try to
earn, make (money), get
(present), win (game)
return, go back, come
back
Expressions
Esse livro est em falta.
Ela est fazendo compras.
Ele me deu isto de presente.
Vocs devem acabar o traballio
Devem ser duas horas.
Ele deve receber mais amanh.
O po faz falta.
Voc faz falta na turma.
We are out of that book.

She is shopping.
He gave me this as a gift.
Finish your work. (You must finish your
work.)
It must be two o'clock.
He should (is to) get more tomorrow.
One needs breado
Vou are missed in the gang.
Leitura
Ontem fui cidade fazer compras. Tomei o nibus na esquina aqui perto e ele me levou at
o Largo da Carioca. L saltei do nibus e fui andando at a Rua do Ouvidor. Entrei numa liv
raria para ver os livros novos. Vendo um livro interessante, perguntei o preo ao empregado.
Dei para ele quatro cruzeiros e ele me entregou o livro. Tentei arranjar outro livro novo noutra
livraria, mas no pude achar. O livriro me explicou que esse livro est em falta. Devo ir l na
outra semana, quando o livreiro deve receber mais.
Depois entrei numa Loja Brasileira, onde comprei um brinquedo para levar de presente a meu
irmo mais novo. Ele no freqenta a escola ainda e gosta de passar o tempo com brinquedos.
Ento tomei outro nibus para voltar para casa. O preo do nibus muito pouco.
64
Exercise A . Be able to give in either language :

1 . Explica esta lio para mim.
2. Para amanh, devem estudar esta lio.
3. Voc no me deve nada.
4. Recebemos uma carta dele.
5. Vocs devem estar com muita fome.
6. Faz falta aqui um bom livreiro.
7. O caf est em falta hoje.
8. Aqui sempre tem po, mas agora est em
falta.
9. O senhor pode nos arranjar uma boa
Explain this lesson to me.

For tomorrow, study this lesson.
Vou don't owe me anything.
We got a letter from him.
Vou must be awfully hungry.
A good bookseller is needed here.
We are out of coffee today.
We always keep bread, but we are out of it
now.
Can you fix us up with a good mad?
empregada?
1 0. Quando vocs chegarem, eu vou porta
receb-los.
1 1 . Voc recebeu meu presente?
1 2. Ganhei outro do meu amigo.
1 3. Fui fazer compras na cidade.
14. Levei as compras para casa.
1 5 . Qual a diferena entre "largo" e "praa"?
No tem.
1 6. Voc ganha bem no seu trabalho?
1 7 . Quantos cruzeiros devemos?
1 8. Os jornais fazem falta quando no temos.
When you arrive, 1'11 go to the door to receive

you.
Did you get my present? (Did it arrive? )
I got another one from my friend.
I went shopping downtown.
I took my purchases home.
What is the difference between largo and
praa? There isn't any.
Do you make good money at your work?
How many cruzeiros do we owe?
Newspapers are missed when we don't have
any.
Exercise B. Be able to give in either language:

1 . Estou vendo voc l atrs da porta.
2. No podem me pegar se no me virem.
3. Se Joo esteve l, eu no vi.
4. Ele vai me ver amanh.
5. Quero ver ele correr.
6. No estou vendo meninos na rua.
7. Ele falou para si.
8. Joo levou o dinheiro.
9. Seu amigo deu comigo no cinema.
10. Amanh eu vou lembrar isso a voc.

1 1 . Quais so seus irmos?
1 2. Que trem chega hoje?
I see you there behind the door.

They can't catch me if they don't see me.
If John was there, I didn't see him.
He is going to see me tomorrow.
I want to see him run.
I don't see any kids on the street.
He spoke to himself.
John took the money with him.
Your friend ran into me at the movie.
Tomorrow 1'11 remind you of that.
Which ones are your brothers?
Which train comes in today?
Exercise C. Answer in Portuguese:

1. Quanto dinheiro voc tem?
2. Que compras voc fez ontem?
3. Que carro voc arranjou para ir festa?
4. De quem voc recebeu uma carta hoje?
5. Voc ganha bem ou mal no seu trabalho?
6. Voc me deve um cruzeiro?
7. Os preos esto altos ou baixos?
8. Com quem voc falou ontem?
9. Que presente voc ganhou ontem?
1 0. Tem o nosso livro na livraria, ou est em falta?
65
Exercise D. Say in Portuguese :

1 . What do you see out there?
6. Did you see what I see?
2. He sees me and I see him.
7 . Explain this to me ; I don 't see i t.
3 . I saw you yesterday in class.
8. He always says "Good morning" when he

sees me.
9. We don't see what we saw before.
4. If you see me, speak to me.
S. They have never seen this city.

1 . He is taller than I.
6. My coffee is blacker than yours.

7. The boss is worse than the employee.
8. I have fewer than three cars.
9. He talks better than he writes.
1 0. This lesson is easier than the other [one] .
2 . It is cooler here than there.

3. It is cloudier today.
4. This street is wider than that [one] .
5 . He is bigger than his brother.

1 . Remember me to your uncle.
2. Try to open the door.
3 . Get off the bus at the comer.
4. Fix me up with some coffee, please .
5 . It's cold today.
6. A shoemaker makes and fixes shoes.

7. There is no difference between these two
cups.
8. Let's leave them [alone] .
9. The coffee is cold.

1 0. I'm cold.
1 1 . This town has two newspapers.
1 2. I bought this present for a cruzeiro.
1 3 . A bookseller works in a bookstore.
1 4. A milkman delivers milk in the morning.
1 5 . We attend church on Sunday.
Lesson XV
80.
The irregular verbs saber and caber. The present indica tive of these two verbs has only one
irregular form, the first person singular. All other forms of these two verbs differ only in the
first letter. Both verbs are irregular in the preterit and derived tenses.
Present lndicative
eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
81 .
sei
sabe
sabe
sabemos
sabem
sabem
caibo
cabe
cabe
cabemos
cabem
cabem
Preterit
Future Subjunative
souber //, etc.

coube
soube
coube
soube
couber //, etc.
coube
soube
soubemos coubemos
souberam couberam //
souberam couberam //
Uses of saber and caber.
Saber means "to know something factual," "to know how to," "to find out," or "to learn a
fact." It must be distinguished from conhecer, "to be acquainted with," "to meet" (= get ac
quainted with).
Eu sei minha lio.
Ele sabe acender o fogo.
Ns sabemos que voc ganhou.
Eu sei quem mas no conheo.
66
I know my lesson.
He knows how to light the fire.
We know you won.
I know who he is, but I am not acquainted
with him.
Caber means "to be contained in," "to fit into," "to get into" (find room in). English often
looks at the sarne situation from the opposite point of view, i.e., How many will it hold?
Quantos cabem no seu carro?
Meu p no cabe neste sapato.
Ele no cabe em si de contente .
No cabe dvida.
How many can get into your car? (How

many wll t hold? )
My foot won't go into thls shoe.
He is beside hmself with joy .
There is no room for doubt.
82. The imperfect indicatve. There are two sets of endings for the imperfect indicative, one
used with verbs of the first conjugation, the other with the second and thlrd.
eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
Falar
comer
abrir
falava
falava
falava
falvamos
falavam
falavam
comia
comia
comia
comamos
comiam
comiam
abria
abria
abria
abramos
abriam
abriam
83. Verbs irregular in the imperfect. There are only four verbs, plus the compounds of some
of them, whlch are irregular in the imperfect indicative.
ter - eu, voc, ele tinha; ns tnhamos; vocs, eles tinham
pr - eu, voc, ele punha, ns pnhamos; vocs, eles punham
ser - eu, voc , ele era; ns ramos; vocs, eles eram
vir - eu, voc, ele vinha; ns vnhamos; vocs, eles vinham.
84.
Uses of the imperfect tense. The imperfect is used:
a. To describe a state or condition in past time. The beginning and the end of the condition
are not indicated, only that the condition existed at a certain point in the past. Thus, de
scriptions of past conditions are in the imperfect.
o tempo estava bonito.
Fazia frio.
The weather was beautiful.

It was cold.
The condition may be mental or emotional.

Ele queria comer batatas.
Cf. Ele quis comer batatas.
Os meninos sabiam os nmeros.
No gostvamos dele.
He wanted to eat potatoes.

He tried to eat potatoes.
The chlldren knew their numbers.
We didn't like hlm.
b. To denote habitual action in past time. There must be no expressed lirnitation on the
duration of the action.
Quando eu era menino, corria muito.
Ele sempre me chamava.
When I was a boy I ran a lot.

He always used to call me.
67
c . To express an action in progress at the time of another past action, condition, or point
in time. Tls latter may be a single or limited past action, expressed in the preterit, or it
may be another action in progress, expressed in the imperfect.
I was eating when he called.
We were listening while he talked.
Eu comia quando ele telefonou.

Escutvamos enquanto ele falava.
d. For the conditional in any circumstances: (normally expressed in English by the auxiliary
would).
I'd like to go.
He said he'd go.
Eu queria ir.
Ele disse que ia.
The progressive form of the imperfect. The progressive is used in the imperfect, as in the
present and in all other tenses. But the simpie form may at any time replace the progressive
form without change of meaning, in this tense only. The progressive form makes the expression
of the meaning more exact, of course.
85.
Eu estava falando quando ele chegou.

Dr Eu falava quando ele chegou.
I was speaking when he arrived.
Vocabulary
Nouns
o fogo l l pI. fogos
l l
a luz
o p
a dvida
a batata (inglesa)
o nmero
a cafeteira
a came
o piquenique
a cama
o lago
a gente
Adjectives
fire
light
foot
doubt
potato
number
coffeepot
meat
picnic
bed
lake
people
Adjectives
contente
doce l l
cheio
pleased, happy
sweet
full
Verb
desligar
68
empty
necessary
green
Verbs
caber
saber
acender
botar
escutar
responder (a)
apanhar
assar
apagar
ligar
fit into, be contained in

know
light (fire); tum on
(lights)
put
listen to, hear
answer
pick up, catch; be
beaten
roast
put out (fire , light)
tum on (light, radio,
motor)
Adverbs
tum off
tarde
no . . . mais
so that, in such a
way that, so
Preposition
Conjunction
de modo que Iml
vazio
preciso
verde ll
sem
late
no longer
without
Expressions
He ought to study. (But he doesn't).
It must have been two o'c1ock.
I owed him a cruzeiro.
I'm going by his house.
We're going to have a picnic.
I don't know.
He speaks people's language (i.e., Portuguese)
He doesn't like people (Le ., us).
What does one do?
A little while ago.
Ele devia estudar.

Deviam ser duas horas.
Eu devia um cruzeiro a ele.
Vou passar pela casa dele.
Vamos fazer um piquenique .
Eu sei l.
Ele fala lngua de gente.
Ele no gosta da gente .
Que que a gente faz?
H pouco.
Leitura
Vocs no queriam ir roa hoje? Podemos ir no meu carro, se coubermos todos. Devemos
passar pela casa do Luiz para apanh-lo tambm. Ele tem um carro grande onde cabem seis
pessoas. Podemos ir no carro dele se o meu estiver muito cheio.
Eu sei de um parque onde podemos acender um fogo e fazer caf. J botei uma cafeteira no
carro, de modo que podemos tomar caf quente.
O Carlos ia conosco, mas chamou h pouco para dizer que no podia mais ir. Parece que o
primo ia chegar para passar o dia com ele, e Carlos no queria deixar a casa. Eu respondi que
levava o primo tambm, mas ele no quis ir.
Na semana passada eu fui ao parque com a turma. Era uma noite bonita e fazia um pouco de
frio. A luz que tnhamos vinha do fogo que acendemos. Assamos batatas doces e carne. Foi um
bom piquenique. Voltamos tarde para casa e eu fui para a cama.
Exercise A. Be able to say in either language on hearing the other:
1 . Escuta quando ele fala.
2 . Eu no vi voc chegar.
3. O menino apanhou do pai.
4. Voc gosta de carne assada?
5 . Voc j respondeu carta dele?
6. A mulher punha carne para assar.
7. preciso saber quando ele chega.
8. A cafeteira est vazia.
9. De noite acendemos as luzes.
1 0. O Brasil tem muitas batatas doces e batatas
inglesas.
1 1 . Ele disse que me apanhava s seis.
12. Eu lhe dei tudo o que lhe devia.
13. Ele botou o p na porta.
14. Voc vai aula, no ?
1 5 . Assvamos carne e comamos sem po.
1 6. Eu escutava sem compreender.
1 7. Voc est contente de saber que ele
deve chegar?
1 8. preciso assar as batatas antes de comer.
1 9. Eu lhe disse -Chega para l.
20. Apaga a luz e acende o fogo.
Listen to him when he speaks.

I didn't see you come in.
The child was whipped by his father.
Do you like roast meat?
Have you answered his letter?
The woman was putting meat on to roast.
It is necessary to know when he will arrive .
The coffeepot is empty.
At night we turn on the lights.
Brazil has lots of sweet potatoes and Irish
potatoes.
He said he would pick me up at six.
I gave him ali I owed him.
He put (stuck) his foot in the door.
Vou are going to c1ass, aren't you?
We used to roast meat and eat it without
breado
I was listening without understanding.
Are you glad (to know) that he is coming?
It is necessary to roast the potatoes before
eating them.
I said to him, "Move over that way."
Turn off the light and light the fire.
69
Exercise B. Give the impe rfect tense in the same person and number as the example given in
the present:
8. Ele diz
9. Ns comemos
1 0. Eles do
1 1 . Eu ponho
1 2. Ns vamos
1 3. Eles tm
1 4. Ele cabe
1 . Eu vou
2. Ele
3. Ns pomos
4 . Eu vejo
5 . Eles sabem
6. Ns entramos
7. Eu tenho
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Ns vemos
Ele faz
Eu parto
Eu sei
Eu digo
Eu corro
Exercise C. Fill in each blank with the correct form of the imperfect or preterit of the verb in
parentheses:
(ir)
(pr)
(ver)
(dizer)
(brilhar)
(morar)
(saber)
(poder)
(ir)
(caber)
casa dele.
1 . Naquele tempo eu sempre
2. Antes de ir escola, eu sempre
o palet.
3. Ele no compreendia tudo o que
4. Ele contou o que voc lhe
durante um ms.
5 . O sol
6. Ns
l cinco anos.
7. Perguntei se ele
portugus
8. No tendo sapatos, ele no
andar.
9. Ele me disse que
jantar.
1 0. No carro dele s
quatro.
____
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_____
_____
_____
____
Exercise D. Write and be able to teU in Portuguese:

lt was a warm day and the sun was shining. The sky was blue and beautiful. We took my car
and went to the park to have a picnic. There was a smaU lake in the park. Near it there were
many trees, aU green. We took the meat out of the car and roasted it over a fire. We walked
around in the park, but two remained talking near the fire.
When we used to go to the other park, we always saw many animaIs. Fewer people went there,
so the animaIs were less afraid. They came (= chegar) elose to us and ate from our hands. We al
ways took bread to give them. We would like to go back there on Sunday.
1 . How many people can get into this room?
2 . I found out that he was looking for me.
3. Did you know who I was?
4. What will they do when they find out?
5. lt is John ; I know him well.
6. He was putting on his coat when I called him.
7. I was warm because the weather was hot.
8. We used to eat lots of sweet potatoes.
9. Vou walk [by] putting one foot in front of the other.
1 0. He always went to bed late.
1 1 . He made good money (= eamed weU) in that work,
1 2 . Vou should seU that house and buy a better [one] .
1 3 . He answered that he did not know.
14. They had two windows which faced the street.
1 5 . A glass of water is better than an empty glass.
70
Lesson XVI
The following paragraphs explain the more frequent and basic usages of some of the principal
and more difficult prepositions. There are, of course, other uses of most of them.
86.
The preposition a expresses:
a.
To, direction to a place, except when the place is the habitual or normal location of a
person, and a verb of motion is used. (See 96b).
b.
Vamos cidade.
We are going downtown.
Eu vou casa de Joo.
I'm going over to John's.
At, with expressions of time.

Ele chegou s duas horas.
He got here at two.
Ela voltou noite.
She carne back at nightfall.
Vamos igreja aos domingos.
We go to church on Sunday. (used with

Saturday and Sunday)
c.
To, before an indirect object. (But see 96d).

Ele deu um presente a ela.
d.
87.
a.
To, following certain verbs, before an infinitive. Each instance must be learned separately.
Ele aprendeu a ler.
He learned to read.
Comecei a trabalhar.
I began to work.
The preposition at expresses:
As [ar as, with reference to space.

Eu vou at a esquina.
b.
He gave a gift to her.
I'm going as far as the comer.
Until, in expressions of time.

At amanh.
Until tomorrow.
Fiquei at a meianoite.
I stayed till midnight.
c. By, as the limit of time.

Tenho que acabar at quarta-feira.
d.
88.
I must finish by Wednesday .
Even, that is, to an unusual degree. (adverbial use).

At meu irmo mais novo vai comigo.
Even my youngest brother is going with me.
Ele falou at alto.
As a matter of fact, he spoke aloud,
The preposition de expresses:
a. Of, ownership, often put in the possessive case in English.

Este o carro dele.
This is his car.
A mulher daquele homem alta.
The wife of that man is tall.
71
b. From, 0[, origino

De onde voc ?
Esta msica veio do Brasil.
Este o sr. Garcia, do Rio.
Where are you from?

This music carne from Brazil.
This is Mr. Garcia, from Rio.
c. By, before a means of transportation of persons, except a horse.

Ele viaja de trem.
De carro, de nibus, de avio, de navio.
Ele andava a cavalo.
He traveis by train.
By car, bus, plane, ship.
He was going by horse.
d. The fact that one noun is used as a mbdifier of another. No article is used with the modi
fying noun. ln English, the modifier is placed immediately before the noun modified. How
ever, if the modifier is a noun denoting a person, it is often in the possessive case. ln many
instances, in both languages, there is also an adjective which may replace the phrase as a
modifier.
A summer day.
Um dia de vero.
A dog's life.
Uma vida de cachorro.
A wooden lego
Uma perna de pau.
e.
About, 0[, on the subject of, concerning.

O que voc acha dele?
Esto falando de mim.
What do you think of him?

They are speaking Cill) of me.
f. To, after certain verbs, before an infinitive. Each instance must be learned separately.
No me lembrei de chamar.
Esqueci-me de ir.
89.
I didn't remember to call.

I forgot to go.
The preposition em expresses:
a. ln, location in the interior of.

Ele est na cidade.
Eles moram no Brasil.
He is in town.
They live in Brazil.
b. At, location which may be in or near.

Ele est na escola.
Ela est em casa.
He is at school.
She is at home.
c. On, location on top of.

O copo est na mesa.
Ele est sentado na cadeira.
The glass is on the table.

He is sitting on the chair.
d. On, location on the surface of.

O quadro est na parede.
The picture is on the wall.
e. Into, anta, movement to the inside or to the surface of.

O cavalo entrou na gua.
Ele jogou a roupa no cho.
The horse went into the water.

He threw the clothes on the floor.
f. ln, on, in a period of time or on an occasion.

Temos festas nas segundas-feiras.
Faz calor aqui no vero.
Vamos embora no dia primeiro.
72
We have parties on Monday (s).

It's hot here in summer.
We're going on the first.
g. A t the house 0[, at the shop of with a family name in the plural or with a word denoting
a shopkeeper.
Estivemos ontem nos Pereira.
Eu vou no barbeiro.
We were at the Pereiras' yesterday.

I'm going to the barber's (shop).
Vocabulary
Note the following adverbs which may be changed to prepositions by the addition of de:
depois
antes
atrs
perto jj
(l) em cima
em frente
dentro
em baixo
fora jj
diante
afterwards
before
back
near, nearby
up there, upstairs
in front
inside
below, down there
outside
ahead, before
depois de
antes de
atrs de
perto de
em cima de
em frente de
dentro de
em baixo de
fora de
diante de
after
before
behind
near
above, over
in front of
inside (of)
under
outside of
in front of, in the presence of
Verb
Nouns
side
midnight
noon
airplane
sandwich
picture, painting
o lado
a meia-noite
o meio-dia
o avio
o sanduche
o quadro
jogar
play (game) ; throw ;

gamble
Expressions
s vezes
O navio j oga muito.
Joga isso fora.
Joga a bola para mim_
sometimes
The ship pitches a lot.
Throw that out.
Throw the ball to me.
Exercise A. Be able to say in Portuguese :

I . The fellow went back to the country.
2. I want to get ( pass) to the other side

of the street.
3. I'm coming back to this house tomorrow.
4. He's going to Portugal this summer.
5. I turned off the lights at midnight .
6 . We get off the bus here at times. (s vezes)
7. I answered him that I did not wish to go.
8. I write a letter to my mother every week.
9. Here we are going to learn to (a) speak
Portuguese .
10. I have already told you that.
=
I I . Let's walk as far as the river.
1 2. They are going to play [ball] until (the) nighJ

1 3 . You should do this by Thursday.
14. Whose cup is that?
1 5. John's brother and Mary's sister are here.
1 6 . I like his coat.
1 7. Where is he from?
1 8. This word is from our book.
19. I bought these shoes from the shoemaker.
20. She traveis on a (by) train.
2 1 . This is a girl's coat.
22. A dog house is needed.
73
Exercise B. Be able to give either language from the other:

1. O que voc pensa de mim?
2. Estamos falando de outra pessoa.
3. Eu gosto de viajar.
4. Deixa de fazer isso!
5 . Ele acaba de jantar.
6. Joo est no teatro.
7. Pe o caf na mesa.
8. Isso foi numa sextafeira.
9. Aos domingos os parentes passam
l em casa.
1 0. Vamos nos Carvalho(s) amanh.
What do you trunk of me?

We are talking about someone else.
I like to traveI.
Stop doing that!
He has just had dinner.
John is at the theater.
Put the coffee on the table.
That was on a Friday.
On Sunday(s) relatives come by the house.
Let's go to the Carvalhos' tomorrow.

1 . Afterwards, we eat.
2. I have never seen rum before.
3. Who is that fellow back there?
4. Is there a store nearby?
5. My unc1e is upstairs.
6. The town is still far away.
7. The house has a yard in front.
8. John is in there (there inside).
9. The kids are playing down there. (l
em baixo).
1 0. After eating, we go home.

1 1 . We come in before dark.
12. Leave the car behind the house.
13. The church is near here.
14. What is that on top of the table?
1 5 . We tive far from the school.
1 6 . Stand (fica) in front of the car.
1 7 . The table is inside the house.
1 8 . The dog ran under the table.
Exercise D. Review the position in the sentence of the two sets of object pronouns: ( 1 ) me,
nos, lhe, lhes, se and (2) voc, vocs, o senhor, etc., ele, ela, eles, elas. Place each pronoun in a
correct position in the following sentences:
(me)
(voc)
(ele)
(nos)
(ela)
(lhe)
(se)
(o senhor)
(me)
(voc e ele)
1 . A tia viu.
2. Meu amigo conhece.
3. Eu estou escutando.
4. O colega no chamou.
5. Pega.
6. No quero dizer a verdade.
7. Lembra da Maria?
8. Esse trabalho vai cansar.
9. Eu chamo Jos.
1 0. Vamos deixar aqui.
Exercise E. Pronounce the following words, taking care to give the correct value to the stressed
vowels:
1 . janela
2. mesa
3. caf
4. Jos
5. chapu
6. igreja
7. medo
8. sede
74
9. pressa
1 0. cu
1 1 . neve
1 2. caneta
1 3. colega
1 4. primavera
1 5 . inverno
1 6. rris
1 7 . vez
1 8. aberto
19. amarelo
20. preto
2 1 . este
22. esse
23. papis
24. fresco.
Lesson XVII
90.
The irregular verb vir, to come

eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
Present lndicative
Preterit
lmperfect
Fu ture Subjunctive
venho
vem
vem
vimos
vm
vm
vim
veio
veio
viemos
vieram ll
vieram
vinha
vinha
vinha
vnhamos
vinham
vinham
vier l l
vier
vier
viermos
vierem
vierem
The third person plural of the present has also the form veem, both syllables of which are
nasal. It is little used.
91 . Uses of vir. This verb is used without a preposition before an infmitive , except in certain
special meanings. Vir is very seldom used in the progressive formo
Ele j vem fazer o trabalho.
92.
He is already coming to do the work.
Cardinal numbers.
1
um, fem. uma
dois, fem. duas 2
trs
3
quatro
4
cinco
5
seis'"
6
sete l l
7
8
oito
nove l l
9
10
dez l l
onze
doze ll
treze l l
quatorze ll or catorze
quinze
dezesseisl dizeseisl
dezessete I dizestil
dezoito I dizitul
dezenove I dizenvil
vinte
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
vinte e um
vinte e dois, etc.
trinta
quarenta
cinqenta
sessenta
setenta
oitenta
noventa
cem
21
22
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
1 00
"'ln giving telephone numbers, house numbers, etc., meia is generally used instead of seis.
93. Usage of the cardinal numbers. The numbers one and two have feminine forms which
agree with a feminine noun. ln larger numbers which end in one or two, e.g., forty-two, the
agreement is also made. If the cardinal numbers are placed after the noun, to take the place of
ordinais, however, most speakers do not make the agreement, assuming the word n mero as the
basis of agreement.
Quarenta e duas moas.
Lio vinte e dois.
Forty-two girls.
Lesson twenty-two.
The word cem is not preceded by um. It becomes cento when a number from one to ninety-nine is
added to it.
Cento e dois. 1 02
Cento e sessenta e quatro. 1 64
ln theory, the word e is always placed between the parts of compound numbers. ln practice,
some of these are often omitted, in certain large numbers.
75
94.
Time of day. Note the following expressions:
So duas (horas).
So trs (horas).
What time is it?

It's one (o'clock).
It's two (o'clock).
It's three (o' clock).
So oito e meia.
So quatro e dez (minutos).
So cinco e quinze (minutos).
So seis e quarenta e oito.
Faltam vinte e oito para as sete.
So vinte e oito para as sete.
It's 8: 30.
It is 4: 1 0.
It is 5 : 1 5 .
It is 6 :48.
It is 28 to seven.
It is 28 to seven.
meio-dia.
meia-noite .
meia-noite e vinte.
meia-noite e meia.
meio-dia e meia (often meio)
It is
It is
It is
It is
It is
Que horas so?
uma (hora).
1 2 : 00 noon.
1 2 : 00 midnight.
1 2 :20 a.m.
1 2 : 30 a.m.
1 2 : 30 p.m.
Hora(s) and minuto(s) may be omitted whenever the sense is clear without them.
The numbers one and two are feminine when they refer to hours, but masculine when they re
fer to minutes.
The verb ser (and any other verb used with the hours, but with no other expressed subject) is
singular only when used with one; otherwise'it is plural.
Eu chegava quando deram duas horas.
Devem ser duas horas.
I was coming in when it struck two.

It must be two o'clock.
Quarto is a masculine noun. Meia is an adjective, ferninine to agree with hora. After meio-dia
one often hears the masculine form, as if to agree with this noun.
It will be noted that after ser the article is not used before the hour. However, it is used after a
and other prepositions.
76
uma (hora)
s duas (horas)
quatro e dez.
s vinte e oito para as sete.
At one (o'clock)
At two (o'clock)
At 4: 1 0
At 28 to seven
Ao meio-dia.
meia-noite.
meia-noite e vinte.
s oito da manh.
s cinco da tarde.
So dez horas da noite.
Depois da meia-noite.
At (o) meio-dia.
At noan.
At rnidnight.
At 1 2: 20 a.m.
At 8 : 00 a.m.
At 5 : 00 p.m.
It is 1 0 : 00 p.m.
After rnidnight.
Until noon.
Vocabulary
Nouns
Verbs
o meio-dia
noon
vir
come
a meia-noite
midnight
faltar
lack, be lacking, be
o minuto
minute
o quarto
quarter
almoar
eat lunch, have lunch
missing
o cento
(group o) 1 00
levantar
get up, rise; raise
janeiro
January
deitar
lie down; go to bed; lay
fevereiro
February
wake up
down
maro
March
acordar
abril
April
dar
strike
maio
May
nascer
be bom; come up (sun ,
junho
June
julho
July
agosto //
August
setembro
September
mesmo //
sarne; self
outubro
October
algum, alguma
some
novembro
November
primeiro
first
dezembro
December
inteiro
whole, entire
as frias
vacation
a data
date
plant)
Adjectives
Adverbs
cedo l/
early
here
para c
here (to this place)
Expressions
da manh
a.m.
da tarde
in the aftemoon, p.m.
da noite
p.m.
Hoje dia feriado.
Today is a holiday.
Ele veio a saber do que passou.
He found out what happene d .
Vem c.
Come here.
Chega para c.
Come closer.
C nos Estados Unidos no plantamos caf.
We don't raise coffee here in the United
o sol nasce s seis.
The sun comes up at six.
States.
Leitura
Em casa levantamos cedo. No inverno acordamos antes do sol nascer. Levantamos e tomamos
caf. Os meninos tm que ir escola e eu tenho que trabalhar. Alguns vo s sete horas, outros
s oito.
Ao meio-dia voltamos para almoar em casa. Ao meio-dia e meia vamos outra vez ao trabalho
ou s aulas. De tarde chegamos em casa a horas diferentes, porque as escolas e o trabalho no acabam
na mesma hora. s seis estamos todos em casa para jantar. Depois os meninos preparam as lies
para o outro dia e a gente grande v o jornal, ou escreve cartas. Mais tarde todos vamos deitar.
77
Exercise A. Be able to give either language from the other:

Today is Friday, Oct. 25.
1 . Hoje sexta-feira, dia vinte e cinco de
outubro.
I go to class at 8 : 00 a.m.
2. Eu vou aula s oito da manh.
A day has twenty-four hours.
3. O dia tem vinte e quatro horas.
A week has seven days.
4. A semana tem sete dias.
We have classes five days per week.
5. Temos aulas cinco dias por semana.
Tomorrow is October 26.
6. Amanh o dia vinte e seis de outubro.
Yesterday we didn't have lunch till two,
7. Ontem s almoamos s duas horas, porque
because we got in late.
chegamos tarde.
He never goes to bed before midnight.
8. Ele nunca deita antes da meia-noite.
We were with him after two o'clock.
9. Estivemos com ele depois das duas horas.
We wake up early in the moming.
10. Acordamos cedo de manh.
Exercise B. Answer in Portuguese :
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
A que horas voc janta?

A que horas acende as luzes?
Quais so os meses de vero aqui?
Quais so no Brasil?
Quantos dias tem setembro?
Que dias so feriados?
Onde que voc vai estar s dez horas?
Que dias da semana temos aula aqui?
Qual a data de hoje?
1 0. Quanto so dez mais oito?

1 1 . Onze mais onze?
1 2. Dezesseis menos quatro?
1 3 . Quanto so quatro vezes nove?
14. Que ms vem depois de janeiro?
1 5 . Qual o ms mais curto?
1 6. A que horas voc almoa?
1 7 . Voc acordou cedo ou tarde hoje?
18. Voc se levanta sempre mesma hora?
Exercise C. Put the correct form of vir in each blank, in the sarne person and number as the
example in the present:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hoje eu venho.
Hoje ns vimos.
Hoje ele vem.
Hoje vocs vm.
Ontem eu
Ontem ns
Ontem ele
Ontem vocs
. Antes eu sempre.
amanh.
. Se ns
amanh.
. Se ele
. Antes vocs sempre
_
_
_
_
Exercise D. Read in Portuguese (e .g. 2 + 3 = 5 : Dois mais trs so cinco.):

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
7 + 6 = 1 3.
8 + 4 = 1 2.
6 + 1 3 = 1 9.
1 1 + 2 = 13.
10 + 5 = 15.
6. 1 4 + 9 = 23.
7. 25 (menos) 8 = 1 7 .
8. 33 - 1 2 = 2 1 .
9 . 7 x(vezes) 4 = 28.
1 0. 6 x 3 = 18.
-
Exercise E. Fill in the blanks with the correct translations of the words in parentheses:
o amigo Joo, que (remained)
Ontem ns (went)
(to see)
em casa
na cidade quando ns (left)
de l. Quando (we arrived)
o nosso
e (saw)
. Ns (went in)
dele , j (it was raining)
mesa. (We knew)
amigo, que (was working)
que ele (would stop)
de (writing)
(coffee made)
e (would have)
que ele (wanted)
para ns. (He called)
a empregada e (said)
sala. Ns
caf mais tarde. Ele (thought)
que ela (would bring)
(stayed)
duas horas com o Joo, (talking)
sobre os amigos e colenesta
e nos tempos em que ns (lived)
gas (we used to have)
cidade.
_
_
_
__
____
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
78

1 . It is 2 : 30.
2. Come at ten to two.
3. We eat (dinner) at 7 : 00 p.m.
4. Today is the first of the month.
5. We are going on the 1 1 th of November.
6. We have a vacation in summer.
7. Today is the 1 3th of June.
8. He used to work at night.
9. We open the doors at ten.
1 0. We tum out the Iights at 5 : 1 5.
1 1 . On the sixth of February.

1 2. On Tuesdays and Thursdays.
1 3. At ten minutes to four.
1 4. Before midnight.
1 5 . We leave in the aftemoon.
1 6 . 1'11 do this tonight.
1 7 . December comes after November.
1 8. There are 3 1 days in July.
1 9. Some times February has 29 days.
20. When you wake iJp, come [over] to my
house.
Lesson XVIII
Verbs irregular in one form only. The following verbs are irregular only in the first person
singular of the present indicative. The present subjunctive, as will be shown later, is derived
from this formo Ali other forms of these verbs are regular. Present Indicative of:
95.
eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
96.
pedir
ouvir
perder
valer
peo //
pede //
pede //
pedimos /pi/
pedem //
pedem //
ouo
ouve
ouve
ouvimos
ouvem
ouvem
perco // or //
perde //
perde //
perdemos
perdem //
perdem //
valho
vale
vale
valemos
valem
valem
The preposition para expresses:
a. Toward, for, movement in the direction of a place, without being specific about arrival.
Partiram para Portugal.
Vamos para frente.
They set out for Portugal.

!.et's go forward.
b. To, movement to a place, including arrival, when it is one's normal place or situation, or
will become such.
Eu vou para casa.
Ele se mudou para a cidade.
I'm going home.

He moved to town.
c. ln order to, to, purpose.

Vamos entrar para comer.
Para ganhar, preciso jogar bem.
!.et's go in to eat.
ln order to win, it is necessary to play well.
d. For, to, with the indirect object.

Ele deu um sanduche para mim.
Eu comprei um presente para ele.
He gave a sandwich to me.

I bought a gift for him.
e. For, to, in comparisons, especially after muito, bastante, and similar words.
Isto muito grande para mim.
Eu tenho bastante dinheiro para a viagem.
Isto muito doce para comer.
This is too big for me.

I have enough money for the trip.
This is too sweet to eat.
79
f. For, before the intended recipient of something, of the benefits of labor, etc.
97.
Tenho uma carta para voc.
I have a letter for you.
Eu trabalho para o patro.
I work for the boss.
Uma xcara para caf.
A coffee cup.
The preposition por expresses:
a. By, the agent of an action.

A terra cultivada pelos filhos.
The land is cultivated by the sons.
Um livro escrito por Verssimo.
A book written by Verssimo.
b. For, to get and take away.

Vamos passar por voc.
We'll come by for you.
Foram pelo mdico.
They went for the doctor.
c. For, in exchange for.

Paguei muito pela experincia.
I paid a lot for the experience,
Dei um cruzeiro pela caneta.
I gave a cruzeiro for the peno
d. For, in place of.

Quer ir aula por mim?
Will you go to class for me?
Vou trabalhar por ele.
I'm going to work in his place.
e. For the sake of.

Arte pela arte.
Art for art's sake .
Eu fao isso por voc.-
I'll do that for you.
f. Per, a.
Comemos trs vezes por dia.
We eat three times a day.
Vinte por cento.
Twenty percent.
g. By, by way of.

Viajei por mar.
I traveled by sea.
Mandei a carta por avio.
I sent the letter by plane.
h. Through, up, down, along, move ment through space.

o vento entrou pela janela.
The wind carne in through the window.
Ele est passando pela rua.
He is going up (down, along) the street.
Andei pelo pas inteiro.
I went ali over the country.
i. A round, through, location or movement in a more or less vague area.

No tem ningum por aqui.
There is no one around here.
j. Around, about, near the time mentioned.
80
L pelo meio-dia.
Along about noon.
Por ento no tinham carros.
Back then they didn't have cars.
Vocabulary
Nouns
o mundo
o sorvete //
a televiso
o rdio
a msica
a pena
a pergunta
a mala
a cerveja //
o barulho
Prepositions
world
ice cream
TV
radio (set)
music
trouble; pity
question
suitcase
beer
noise
Verbs
pedir
ouvir
perder
valer
sem
segundo
sobre //
alm de
without
according to
on; concerning
besides
Adverb
atrs (See expressions) ago
Adjectives and adverbs

too, too much
enough, quite a bit
loud, aloud
muito
bastante
alto
ask for, beg

hear
lose, miss
be worth
Expressions
Dez dias atrs.
Todo (o) mundo.
Tomar sorvete.
Ver televiso.
Ouvir (o) rdio.
ouvir msica.
Valer a pena.
Ter pena de . . .
Ouvir dizer que . . .
Perder o trem.
Pedir para ver a casa.
Fazer uma pergunta.
Fazer as malas.
Ten days ago.

Everybody.
To eat ice cream.
To watch TV.
To listen to the radio.
To listen to musico
To be worth while (the trouble).
To be sorry for . . .
To hear that . .
To miss one's train.
To ask to see the house.
To ask a questiono
To pack one's bags.
.
Exercise A. Be able to give in either language :

1 . Tem trem para So Paulo?
2. Os brasileiros voltaram para o Brasil.
3. Volto (muito) tarde para jantar.
4. Voc vai consertar os sapatos ou mandar
consertar?
5. Eu disse para ele que devia ficar.
6. Escreve para mim.
7. Para quem voc escreve este papel?
8. Chamei pelo mdico.
9. Joo no pode ir trabalhar; eu vou por ele.
1 0. Mandei uma carta por avio.
1 1 . Vocs no podem passar por aqui.
1 2. Acho que ele est aqui perto.
Is there a train to So Paulo?

The Brazilians went back to Brazil.
I'm coming back too late to eat.
Are you going to fix your shoes or have them
fixed?
I told him he should stay.
Write to me.
For whom will you write the paper?
I called for the doctor.
John can't go to work; I'm going in his place.
I sent an airmail letter.
You can't get through here.
I think he's elose by.
81
Exercise B. Give the plurais of the following nouns and adj ectives:
o nibus
o lpis
3 . o pires
4. simples
1.
5.
2.
6.
o
o
7. o
8. o
a lio
o vero
1 1 . a mo
1 2. o rfo
co
po
alemo
irmo
9.
1 0.
Exercise C. Words which end in -vel /vl/ in Portuguese usualIy correspond to English words in
-ble. Give the English for the following words, and note small differences in the spelling of some:
possvel
2. provvel
3 . impossvel
4. indelvel
5 . mvel
6. solvel
7. estvel
1.
dirigvel
9. utilizvel
1 0. potvel
1 1 . incorrigvel
1 2. terrvel
1 3 . horrvel
14. intangvel
8.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
indestrutvel
passvel
inevitvel
filtrvel
desejvel
legvel
comvel
Exercise D. Say in Portuguese:

Prepare the meat for a picnic.
We have enough bread for everybody.
3. No (without) doubt, you are going to the country.
4. According to John, the man is going to talk about Brazil.
5 . Those shoes are Mother's.
6. There were severa I women there, besides the children.
7. I have lots of friends around here.
8. He can't catch me without running.
9. I have bought you some flowers.
10. We meet at the movies.
1 1 . They spent the night at a motel.
1 2 . He talks on "Today's College."
13. It looks good enough to eat.
14. He hurried to arrive before night.
1 5 . I'm going to bed.
1 6. Go to the store for breado
1 7 . Will you give me a cruzeiro for this?
1 8 . We went by plane, because I don't like to traveI by sea.
19. There he comes down the street.
20. They are worth twenty cruzeiros a hundred.
1.
2.

1 . He
asked me for [some] paper.

We
asked to listen to the radio.
2.
3. Speak louder; I don't hear welI.
4. Speak up; I don't hear yOU.
S . I have lost his letter.
6. It's not worth while looking for it.
7. He will give it to you if you ask for it.
8. He missed the bus and had to walk.
9. I am worth as much as the next one.
1 0. Everybody eats ice cream.
1 1 . We watch TV every night.
1 2 . He lived there thirty. years ago.
82
Ele me pediu papel.

Pedimos para ouvir o rdio.
Fala mais alto, no ouo bem.
Fala alto, eu no estou ouvindo.
Perdi a carta dele.
No vale a pena procurar.
Ele d se voc pedir.
Ele perdeu o nibus e teve que andar (a p).
Valho tanto como o outro.
Todo mundo toma sorvete.
Vemos televiso todas as noites.
Ele morava l trinta anos atrs.
Tenho pena dele.

Perguntei o nome dele.
No faz essa pergunta.
Voc quer tomar cerveja ou gua?
13. I'm sorry for him.

14. I asked his name.
1 5 . Don't ask that questiono
1 6 . Will you drink beer or water?
Lesson XIX
98.
The irregular verbs ler, to read, and crer, to believe.

eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
Presen t Indicative
Presen t Indicative
leio
l
l
lemos
lem
lem
creio
cr
cr
cremos
crem
crem
The other tense forms are regular.

99.
Forms of the present subjunctive. There are two sets of endings in the present subjunc
tive. The first conjugation has the vowel e, the second and third have the vowel a.
que eu
que voc
que ele
que ns
que vocs
que eles
falar
comer
abrir
fale
fale
fale
falemos
falem
falem
coma
coma
coma
comamos
comam
comam
abra
abra
abra
abramos
abram
abram
The present subjunctive of any verb which has a first person present indicative form ending in
-o (except querer) can be found by removing this final -o and adding the endings of the con
jugation. This method will give the irregular stems used in the present subjunctive , and also the
quality of the vowel in forms stressed on the stern. The student should become familiar with the
following subjunctive forms of verbs that have been studied :
Infinitive
1 st singular present indicative
Present Subjunctive, singular
caber
crer
dizer
fazer
ler
ouvir
pedir
perder
pr
poder
ter
valer
caibo
creio
digo
fao
leio
ouo
peo //
perco // or //
ponho
posso //
tenho
valho
caiba
creia
diga
faa
leia
oua
pea //
perca // or //
ponha
possa //
tenha
valha
83
Infinitive
1 st singular present indica tive
Present Subjunctive, singular
ver
vir
levar
dever
vejo //
venho
levo //
devo //
veja //
venha
leve //
deva //
The other personal endings are added to the same stem. Open vowels close when they occur in
unstressed syllables.
100.
The subjunctive of will. Any verb or phrase which expresses the imposing or the attempt
to impose the will of one person or group on another requires that the dependent verb be in the
subjunctive. Among the verbs which require the subjunctive in such circumstances are the foi
lowing:
querer, desejar
wish, want, desire
mandar
order
dizer
teU to
pedir
ask to
proibir
forbid, prohibit
aconselhar
advise to
deixar, permitir
let, allow to, permit to
preferir
prefer
Note that if the logical subjects of the two verbs are the same, there can be no imposition of
the will of one subject on another. ln that case, the infmitive is used.
The verbs mentioned above are always followed by que before the clause that contains the sub
junctive.
ln many, but not alI cases, there are alternate ways to construct a sentence with these verbs,
without using the subjunctive. Since these constructions vary from verb to verb , however, it is
better to learn first the subjunctive, which is uniform for alI. For examples of the present sub
junctive, see Exercise A, below.
101.
Note on spelling. Certain regular and predictable changes in spelling are made in verb
forms, so that the pronunciation of the stem will be correctly indicated in alI forms. Thus
a. Verbs whose infmitive ends in -car change c to qu before e.

ficar: present subjunctive fique , fiquemos, fiquem
preterit
fiquei, but ficou,
b. Verbs whose infinitive ends in -gar change g to gu before e.
chegar: present subjunctive chegue, cheguemos, cheguem
cheguei, but chegou, etc.
preterit
c. Verbs whose infinitive ends in -cer require a cedilla under the letter c before a or o.
Conhecer: present indicative conheo, but conhece, etc.
present subjunctive conhea, conheamos, conheam
d. Verbs whose infinitive ends in -ar drop the cedilla before e.
comear: present subjunctive comece, comecemos, comecem
preterit indicative comecei, but comeou, etc.
84
Vocabulary
Verbs
Nouns
waiter
waitress
package
truth
apple
o garom
a garonete l l
o embrulho
a verdade
a ma
desejar
mandar
dizer
pedir
proibir
aconselhar
permitir
preferir
ajudar (a)
want, wish, desire

order, command
teU to, order to
ask to
forbid, prohibit
advise to
permit, aUow
preferir, like better
help (to)
Expression
Eu preferia ficar.
I 'd rather stay.
Note the use of written accents on the forms of proibir.
Present lndicative
Present Subjunctive
prolbo
prolbe
proibimos
proibem
prolba
prolba
proibamos
prolbam
Exercise A . Examples of the use of the present subjunctive:

1 . O sr. quer que eu ajude?
2. O que deeja que eu faa?
3 . Ele manda que fiquemos aqui.
4. Joo diz que jantemos com ele.
5 . Peo que me levem cidade.
6. Prolbo que voc fale com ela.
7. Aconselhamos que vocs usem chapus.
8 . No deixo que ele beba cerveja.
9. Permitimos que vejam televiso.
1 0. Preferimos que no chamem o garom.
Do you want me to help?

What do you want me to do?
He orders us to stay here.
John teUs us to have dinner with him.
I ask you take me downtown.
I foroid you to speak to her.
We advise you to wear hats.
I don't let him drink beer.
We let them see TV.
We'd rather you didn't call the waiter.
Exercise B. Replace the underlined verb with each of the verbs in parentheses, in the sarne per
son and number:
1 . Eu quero que voc acabe o trabalho.
(entregar) o embrulho.
(arranjar) uma empregada.
(ouvir) a msica.
(compreender) a lio.
( dizer) a verdade.
2. Ele manda que os meninos brinquem no jardim.
(fechar) as janelas.
(correr) para casa.
(levantar) cedo.
(beber) leite.
(vir) para casa.
85
3. Ns permitimos que vocs almocem conosco.

(escrever) para eles.
(vender) as mas.
(abrir) a porta.
(pr) o chapu.
(freqentar) a e.scola.
4. Eles pedem que eu responda s perguntas.
(apagar) a luz.
(no perder) a caneta.
(voltar) para casa.
(fazer) uma visita.
(explicar) a pergunta.
5. Ele prefere que ns esqueamos a histria.
(estudar) a lio.
(poder) ir com ele.
(ver) televiso.
(aprender) portugus.
(assar) a carne.
Exercise C. Give the other tenses of the following verbs in the sarne person and number as those
given in the present indicative :
Present Indicative
Preterir
Imperfect
Present Subjunctive
Future Subjunctive
1 . falo
2. pedimos
3. ouve
4. perdem
5. valemos
6. ouo
7. tem
8. pem
9. cabe
1 0. deve
1 1 . vem
Exercise D. Pronounce the following forms, taking care with stressed e and o :
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Aconselho
deixa
desejam
almoa
acordo
6. botam
7 . acendam
8. volto
9 . recebe
1 0. deva
1 1 . veja
1 2. entregue
1 3 . consertam
14. bebo
1 5 . esquea
1 6. pegue
1 7 . possa
1 8. corra
1 9. conheam
20. fe'cha
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
chega
more
levem
neve
chove
come
escreve
vieram
perderam
corre

1 . It is 3 :00 p.m.
2. Today is November first.
3. It's a quarter to midnight.
4. We go at 8 : 20 a.m.
86
5.
6.
7.
8.
He is coming on Tuesday the twenty-second.

I teU him to do the work.
I let my classmates listen to the radio.
He asks me to get off the bus with him.
9. John's father forbids him to play with Joe.

1 0. I don't want you to rniss your train.
1 1 . I order John to help his brother.
1 2 . He prefers for us to teU him.
1 3 . We advise you to think of this.
14. The boss doesn't perrnit me to ask questions.
1 5 . Everybody is eating ice cream.
1 6. The waiter took that package [with him.]
1 7 . TeU me the truth.
1 8 . We used to listen to music every day.

19. Is it worth while to buy apples?
20. He asks to meet the young lady.
2 1 . I missed my lunch.
22. I find the noise [to be] very loud.
23. This ice cream is not very cold.
24. Let's help him.
25. Let me help you.
Lesson XX
102.
The irregular verb trazer, to bring.

eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
Present Indicative
Preterit
trago
traz
traz
trazemos
trazem
trazem
trouxe /trosi/
trouxe
trouxe
trouxemos /trusmus/
trouxeram /trusr/
trouxeram
Present subjunctive traga, tragamos, etc.

Future subjunctive trouxer, etc.
103.
Radical-changing verbs of the third conjugation. There are severa! types of radical
changes in this conjugation. The situation is quite different from that of the other conjugations,
in that it is not possible to predict which verbs will change by noting the spelling of the infini
tive. Each of the verbs which change must be learned. Some times verbs which are compounds
of the sarne root are eonjugated differently. Note that there are ehanges in spelling, as weU as in
pronunciation. Note also the influence of a stressed i on the pronunciation of a preceding e or o.
a. The most frequent change is that which affeets most verbs of this conjugation whose
stem-vowel is e or o. Thus:
engolir
vestir
eu
voc
ele
ns
voes
eles
Present Indicative
Present Subjunctive
Present Indicative
Present Subjunctive
visto
veste //
veste
vestimos /vi/
vestem //
vestem
vista
vista
vista
vistamos
vistam
vistam
engulo
engole //
engole
engolimos /gu/
engolem //
engolem
engula
engula
engula
engulamos
engulam
engulam
When the stem-vowel e is followed by m or n, the ehange takes plaee in the first person singular,
but the vowel is c10sed in the third person forms. There are no verbs of this type with o fol
lowed by m or n.
87
sentir
Present Indicative
eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
Present Subjunctive
sinto
sente
sente
sentimos /s!/
sentem
sentem
sinta
sinta
sinta
sintamos
sintam
sintam
b. A second type has the stem-vowel u, which changes to o in certain forms. If it is followed
by m or n, the vowel remains cIosed.
subir
sumir
Present Indicative
Present Indicative
eu
subo
voc
sobe //
ele
sobe
ns
subimos
vocs
sobem //
eles
sobem
Present subjunctive suba, etc.
sumo
some //
some
sumimos
somem //
somem
soma, etc.
Verbs of the type of vestir are quite numerous. One should generally assume that a verb of
the third conjugation whose stern vowel is e will bel ong to this type, although there are some
exceptions. There are only a few verbs like engolir, since there are not many whose stern
vowel is o. But several of these are words of high frequency in the spoken language. There are
few more than a dozen of the type of subir, but some are quite important.
Vocabulary
Nouns
Nouns
o correio
o vestido
o cheiro
a escada
a camisa
a volta //
a sala (de estar)
a sade
o esporte //
mail; post office

dress
smell, odor
stair; ladder
shirt
tum: return; stroll
(living) room
health
sport
Verbs
trazer
vestir (eu visto)
vestir-se
despir (eu dispo)
despir-se
seguir (eu sigo)
engolir (eu engulo)
88
o mai
o calo
(woman's) b athing suit

(men's) trunks
Adverbs
cad (colloq.)
l fora
de volta
where is, where are

out there, outside
back
Verbs
bring, wear
put on; dress
dress
take off; undress
undress
follow; go on, keep on
swallow
dormir (eu durmo)

subir (ele sobe)
sumir (ele some)
sentir (eu sinto)
ir (se) embora
sleep; go to sleep.
go up; come up
disappear; be gone
feel; be sorry
go away
Expressions
Eu vou (-me) embora.
Ns vamos embora.
Dei uma volta.
Ela ps um vestido.
Ela se vestiu.
Bastante bem.
De uma vez.
Sentir pena de.
Sentir-se bem (mal, doente, etc.)
Sentir um barulho.
Sentir um cheiro.
Meu lpis sumiu.
Ontem eu dormi tarde.
Hoje eu dormi at tarde.
Eu sinto falta dele.
Uma passagem de ida e volta.
Andar a p.
I'm going away.

We're going away.
I took a strol1.
She put on a dress.
She got dressed.
Rather well.
Once and for all; all at once.
To feel sorry for.
To feel well (bad, sick, etc.)
To hear (sense) a noise.
To smell an odor.
My pencil is gone.
I went to sleep late last night.
I slept late this morning.
I miss him.
A round-trip ticket.
To walk.
Hoje noite Joo me leva a uma festa e depois vai me trazer de volta. Eu no sei que roupa
eu devo vestir. Os rapazes usam camisa esporte e m algumas festas, mas as moas geralmente
vestem uma roupa mais elegante.
Na semana passada fui a outra festa na casa de um colega. L pelas oito horas peguei um
nibus que ia at aquele bairro e saltei perto da casa onde ele mora. Depois subi uma escada
que leva da rua at a porta da casa. Como fazia calor, as jarielas estavam abertas e o vento en
trava pelas salas trazendo o cheiro das flores to jardim.
Exercise A. Be able to say in either language from the other:
1 . Eu vou sua casa e voc me traz de volta.
2. Por que voc no veste o mai?
3. A Adlia est se vestindo para ir fazer
compras.
4. Levanto cedo e visto-me antes de tomar caf.
5. Vamos ver se tenho uma carta dele, quando
trouxerem o correio.
6. No toma esse caf quente to depressa.
7. Voc deve tomar devagar e no engolir
tudo de uma vez.
8. Como que voc est se sentindo?
9. Eu me sinto bastante bem nesta cidade.
10. Estou ouvindo o barulho de vozes.
1 1 . Podemos sentir o cheiro das flores que
esto na mesa.
1 2 . Ele subiu a escada correndo.
1 3 . Vou subir ao quarto.
14. Temos que subir a p.
1 5 . Os preos esto subindo.
1 6 . Esta estrada sobe a serra.
1 7. Ele subiu no nibus e foi embora.
I'll go over to your house and you'll bring

me back.
Why don't you put on your bathing suit?
Adelia is dressing to go shopping.
I get up early and dress before breakfast.
We'll see whether I have a letter from him,
when they bring the mail.
Don't drink that hot coffee so fast.
Vou should drink it slowly and not swallow
it ali at once.
How do you feel?
I feel rather well in this town.
I hear the sound of voices.
We can smell the flowers that are on the
table.
He ran upstairs.
I'm going up to my room.
We must walk up.
Princes are rising.
This road goes up the mountain.
He got on the bus and left.
89
Where's my book? It's gone.

Get out of here !
Follow that caro
Undress before you go to bed.
He took off his coat and went in his shirt
sleeves.
1 8 . Cad meu livro? Sumiu.

1 9 . Some daqui!
20. Segue aquele carro.
2 1 . Despe-se antes de dormir.
22. Ele tirou o palet e ficou de camisa.
Exercise B. Give the third-person form in the sarne tense and number as the form given:
1 . Dispo-me.
2. Durmo
3. Visto
4. Sinto
5. Sumo
6.
7.
8.
9.
1 0.
Engulo
Trago
Subimos
Preferimos
Valho
1 1.
12.
1 3.
1 4.
Peo
Ouo
Perco
Sei
I S . Vejo
1 6. Despimos
1 7 . Dormimos
1 8 . Sentimos
1 9. Sumimos
20. Sigo
Exercise C. Fill blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in parentheses:
I . (seguir) Eu mando que ele me
2. (trazer) Permitem que eu
3. (subir) Aconselho que voc
4. (dormir) E u quero que voc
5 . (pedir) Preferem que voc
6. (engolir) Ele probe que os meninos
7 . (vestir) Ele manda que ns
8 . (despir) Vocs permitem que eu me
9. (sumir) No quero que vocs
l O. (sentir) No queremos que vocs
_
_
_
_
um amigo.
ao quar t o .
logo .
outro.
o chocolate.
os palets.
nesse quarto?
_
_
_____
_____
____
_
_
_
_
____
pena de ns.

1 . lt is 6 : 30 p.m.
2. He carne at midnight.
3. I leave at 20 to 8 : 00 tomorrow morning.
4. 22 women carne to see me this evening.
5 . It snowed on the 1 5th of November.
6. It was raining at 3 : 00 p.m., when I carne in.
7. My hat is gone.
8. I put a letter in the mail.
9. I can hear the noise of the train.
1 0. He went up the ladder and entered by the window.
1 1 . 42 + 26 = 68.
1 2 . 65 - 1 2 = 23.
1 3. 73 - 33 = 40.
1 4. 3 x 5 = 1 5 .
1 5 . Good night. Sleep well.
Exercise E. Fill in each blank with the correct form of the verb in parentheses:
1 . (poder) Vocs devem dormir logo que
2 . (pedir) Eu dou isto para eles quando me
3. (brilhar) Vai ficar bonito enquanto o sol
4. (voltar) Vamos falar com ele logo que
a verdade.
5 . (dizer) Eu no deixo que vocs joguem, se no me
o trabalho.
6. (fazer) Ele volta para casa, assim que
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
90
7.
8.
9.
10.
(pr) Vocs vo sentir frio , se no

(querer) Vocs podem tomar caf quando
( caber) Vamos levar dois carros, caso no
(passar) Vai ficar bonito, depois que a chuva
____
os casacos.
_
_
_
_
_
____
num.
_
_
_
_

1 . She dresses well.
2. I feed bad today.
3. He slept late this morning.
4 . He brought his friend.
5. Take this book, if you are going up.
6. Go on up the street.
7. I can smell the apples on the fire.
8. She put on a white dress.
9. He swallows his beer too fasto
1 0. !t's quite cold outside.

1 1 . Take off your coat.
1 2. Go around in your shirt [sleeves l .
13. Where's the waiter?
1 4. I want him to bring coffee.
1 5 . Tonight I'm going to sleep late.
1 6 . I feel sick.
1 7 . He feels sorry for me.
1 8. Get a round-trip ticket.
Lesson XXI
1 04 .
The reflexive verbs. A reflexive verb is one whose object is the sarne person or thing as
the subject. A verb is made reflexive by the use of the reflexive object pronouns. Thus:
Chamo-me Jos or Eu me chamo Jos.

Chama-se Maria or Ela se chama Maria.
My name is Joe.
Her name is Mary.
105.
Use of the reflexive verbs. The reflexive construction is used in various ways, some
with very different meanings from others.
a. The action which the subject perforrns upon itself may be literal.
Ele se viu no espelho.
He saw himself in the mirror.
b. If the subject is inanimate, singular or plural, the reflexive form of the verb may be used
instead of the passive voice. While this usage is fairly frequent, it should be remembered that
the real passive is much more used in BF and limits the reflexive usage considerably.
Falam-se vrias lnguas na Suia.
Fz-se o trabalho num minuto.
Several languages are spoken in Switzerland.

The work was done in a minute.
c. If the verb is in the third person singular, the reflexive se is used in many expressions al
most as if it were an impersonal, unidentified subject, more or less equal to one in English.
But see the use of the impersonal subject a gente, below.
Como que se pode no gostar de caf?
Vai-se cidade de nibus.
How can one help liking coffee?

Vou go (one goes) downtown by bus.
d. The reflexive pronoun objects may have a recfprocal meaning (each other) in the plural.
Eles se escrevem de vez em quando,
Ns nos vemos com freqncia.
They write to each other from time to time.

We see each other often.
Since in many cases it would be difficult to distinguish whether or not the reflexive pronoun
should be understood as reciprocaI, the situation may be clarified by the use of um ao outro,
either as a direct or as an indirect object. If this expression is used, the reflexive pronoun is
omitted.
91
If ali persons or things inc1uded in the expression um ao outro are feminine, both words be
come feminine-uma outra. Otherwise, both are masculine. If more than two individuals
are involved, both words become plural.
Joo e Maria escrevem cartas um ao outro.
As trs mulheres vem umas s outras.
John and Mary write each other letters.

The three women see each other.
1 06 .
Omission of the reflexive object. ln many cases, the use of the reflexive object simply
maintains the transitive character of the verb, where English would use it intransitively. But BF,
like English, is no longer much concerned with maintaining the distinction between transitive
and intransitive verbs. ln such cases the reflexive object is very often omitted, as in English.
Ele (se) deita.

Eu (me) levanto.
He lies down.
I get up.
The reflexive pronoun nos is never used in BF foUowing the verb, It is either omitted or placed
before the verbo
Ns nos levantamos or Levantamos.
We get up.
Some verbs have alternate expressions, one with a noun or pronoun object, the other with a
reflexive pronoun followed by a preposition.
Eu lembro isso.
Eu me lembro disso.
I remember that.
I remember that.
1 07 .
Equivalents in Portuguese of the impersonal subject "one." ln English there are several
subjects which may be used to denote that the subject is a vague, unidentified person or persons
one, people, you, they, etc. The subject most frequently used in Portuguese is a gente.
A gente estuda muito e aprende pouco.
One studies a lot and learns little.
A second construction uses the third person singular of the verb and the reflexive pronoun se.
Estuda-se muito e aprende-se pouco.
When action is attributed to unknown persons, the verb may be expressed in the third person
plural, without an expressed subject.
Dizem que no vai haver Carnaval.
They say there won't be a Carnival.
Note: The word um as a subject is always a number, never an indefmite pronoun.

Um vai e outro vem.
1 08.
92
Cardinal numbers above 1 00.

duzentos, -as
200
trezentos, -as
300
quatrocentos, -as
400
quinhentos, -as
SOO
seiscentos, -as
600
700
setecentos, -as
oitocentos, -as
800
novecentos, -as
900
One goes and another comes.
mil
um milho
um milhar
1 ,000
1 ,000,000
1 ,000 (group)
duas mil e duzentas casas

um milho de casas
milhares de pessoas
milhes de pessoas
dois milhes de pessoas
Um milho duas mil e trs casas
2,200 houses
1 ,000,000 houses
thousands of people
]J1i1lions of people
two million people
1 ,002,003 houses
The hundreds from 200 to 900, and the numbers one and two agree with feminine nouns
except when they precede milho, which is a masculine noun. ln theory, the word e is placed
before any number which is added to the preceding number. ln BF, it is generally used in the
following cases, but omitted in others.
a. Before tens and units, and before cem and cento.
Oitenta e seis
Cento e dez
Trezentos e quarenta e trs
Um milho e cem
86
1 10
343
1 ,000,100
b. After milho and mil, before a multiple of cem, if no smaIler number follows the latter.
mil e quinhentos
Um milho e seiscentos
1 ,5 00
1 ,000,600
Note that in writing numbers the use of the comma and period is exactly reversed from the use
in English.
Fourteen thousand three hundred ninetytwo and twenty-eight hundredths.
14.392,28
The period is implicit in the reading of the numbers; the comma is read vrgula.
trs vrgula cinco
3,5
1 09 .
three point five
Ordinal numbers. The ordinaIs from fust to tenth are as follows:

primeiro
segundo /si/
terceiro
quarto
quinto
fiest
second
third
fourth
fifth
sexto //
stimo
oitavo
nono
dcimo
sixth
seventh
eighth
ninth
tenth
Above tenth the ordinaIs are little used, doubtless because they are long and complexo The
cardinal numbers may be used as ordinaIs by placing them after the noun, using the word
nmero when needed.
Captulo 23
Chapter 23
With the names of kings , etc., the ordinaIs are used up to tenth, but the cardinaIs thereafter.
No article is used.
Carlos Quinto
Luiz Quatorze
Charles V
Louis XIV
With days of the month, only primeiro is used. AlI other dates are expressed by cardinaIs.
93
Vocabulary
Nouns
o telefone
a palavra
o relgio
o caderno //
Verbs
telephone
word
watch; clock
notebook
Adjectives
til
cego //
coitado
certo //
errado
fraco
leve //
pesado
escuro
useful
blind
poor, pitiful
certain; correct, right
incorrect, wrong
weak
light (weight)
heavy
dark
enxergar
mudar
encher (de)
atravessar
atrasar
demorar
emprestar
convidar (para)
chamar
chamar-se
lavar (-se)
despedir (like pedir)
Adverbial and Prepositional Phrases
Verbs
para c
despedir-se (de)
para c de
para l
para l de
do lado de l
do lado de c
do lado de fora
do lado de dentro
desta vez
quanto tempo
em breve //
de leve //
this way , in this

direction
on this side of
that way
on the other side of,
beyond
on the other side
on this side
on the outside
on the inside
th.is time
how long
soon
lightly
divertir
divertir-se
(eu me divirto)
catch sight of, manage

to see
change ; move
fill (with)
cross
delay; get behind
delay; be long
lend
invite (to)
call
be called, be named
wash (one's self)
discharge, fire (an employee)
take leave (of), say

good-bye (to)
amuse
have a good time
Other expressions
Eu queria saber.
No presta ateno a ele.
Coitado do Pedro!
Eu vou me mudar.
I wonder. (I'd like to know)

Don't pay any attention to him.
Poor Pete !
I'm going to change clothes; I'm going to move.
Exercise A. Use of idiomatic expressions:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
94
Est muito escuro; no posso enxergar o

telefone.
Quanto tempo voc vai demorar para aprender essa palavra?
O telefone til para chamar as pessoas.
O coitado cego.
Parece um pobre coitado.
J enchi o caderno de apontamentos_
It's very dark; I can't see the telephone.

How long will it take you to learn that word?
The telephone is useful for calling people.
The poor fellow is blindo
He looks like a pitiful fellow.
I've filled my notebook with notes.
7. Temos que mudar de roupa antes da

festa.
8. Voc j mudou de casa?
1 0. fcil atravessar esta rua estreita.
1 1 . Tenho uma coisa atravessada na garganta.
1 2. Voc est certo.
1 3 . Estou certo que ele vem atrasado.
14. Meu relgio atrasou dez minutos.
1 5 . Voc quer me emprestar o caderno?
1 6 . Desta vez no me convidaram para a
festa.
1 7 . H um carro do lado de c
1 8. A loja fica do lado de l da rua.
19 . Chega mais para c.
20. Ele anda de l para c e de c para l.
2 1 . Este caf est para l de ruim.
22. A casa est acabada do lado de fora.
23. Quero convidar voc para jantar l em
casa.
24. Vou ao correio, mas no demoro.
25. difcil enxergar na chuva.
26. O menino lavou as mos.
27. No prestei ateno lio.
We must change elothes before the party.

Have you moved yet?
It is easy to cross this narrow street.
I have something stuck in my throat.
You are right.
I'm sure he'll come late.
My watch got ten minutes slow.
Will you lend me your notebook?
This time they didn't invite me to the party.
There's a car on this side.
The shop is one the other side of the street.
Come eloser.
He paces back and forth.
This cffee is awful. (worse than bad)
The house is finished on the outside.
I want to invite you to eat dinner at my
house.
I'm going to the post office , but I won't be
longo
It's hard to see in the rain.
The child washed his hands.
I paid no attention to the lesson.
Exercise B. Read in Portuguese :

1.
2.
3.
4.
ln the year 1 892.

ln 1972.
1 ,372,43 1 .
1 ,426
5.
6.
7.
8.
1 ,500.
2,438 persons.
5 62 houses.
8 5 1 women.
Exercise C. Use of reflexive verbs:

1 . Ele se chama Jorge.
2. Chama Jorge para almoar.
3. Levantamos s oito.
4. No demoro para me deitar.
5. Voc se diverte na praia, ou diverte
os outros?
6. Voc se esqueceu disso, no ? Esqueci.
7. A me dele lava para fora.
8. Uma mo lava a outra.
9. Agora despeo-me de vocs.
1 0. Despedi a empregada.
1 1 . Joo e Maria (se) casaram.
1 2. Maria (se) casou com Joo.
1 3. Eu vou me vestir.
14. Vestiram a menina de azul.
1 5. Veste a roupa.
1 6. Eles se encontraram na aula.
1 7. PrOlbe-se tomar banho nesta praia.
His name is George.

CalI George for lunch.
We get up at eight.
I won't be long in going to bed.
Do you enjoy yourself at the beach, or do
you amuse the others?
You forgot that, didn't you? Yes.
His mother takes in washing.
One hand washes the other. (We help each
other out.)
Now I say good-bye to . you.
I fired the maid.
John and Mary got married.
Mary married John,
I'm going to dress.
They dressed the girI in blue.
Put on your clothes.
They met in elass.
I t is forbidden to bathe at this beach.
95
1 8 . Perdeu-se um cachorro.
Lost: a dog.
1 9. Procura-se empregada.
Wanted: a maid.
20. A luz se acendeu.
The light was lit.
2 1 . Ganha-se muito neste trabalho.
You make a lot at this job.
22. Uma boa casa se arranja.
You can get a good house .
23. Consertam-se relgios.
Watches repaired.
24.Ns nos conhecemos.
We know each other.
2 5 . No nos falamos mais.
We don't speak to each other any more .

1 . (the) King Louis X
6. The tenth of August
2. Charles XII
7. The third (= second) floor
3. Henry II (Henrique)
8. The fourth year of school

9. The tenth number
4. Leo XI (Leo)
1 0. The forty-third person
5 . The first of May

1 . He moved to another town.
1 6. I have been fired.
2. The poor fellow is weak after being sick.
1 7 . We are going to say good-bye to Aunty.
3. I'm sure you're wrong.
1 8 . I have forgotten everything I learned.
4. We'll take a long time to move this heavy table. 19. Did you have a good time?
5. Please pay more attention.
20. He wonders who you are.
6. The town is beyond the mountains.
2 1 . The package has words on the outside.
7. He filled his glass with water.
22. How long are you going to be gone (= fora)?
8. My watch is ten minutes slow.
23. We are going to cross [over] soon.
9. I was invited to spend the night.
24. This is a very usefui word.
1 0. I can't see well in the dark.
25. The poor fellow lost his coat.
1 1 . These clothes are too light for winter.
26. The street is narrow and dark at night.
1 2. He called me to the house.
27. He touched me lightly.
1 3 . Those things are called blackboards.
28. The school is on this side of the post office.
14. Get up and follow me.
29. He filled my glass with beer.
1 5 . She washes clothes for me.
30. This time get (= prepare) your lessons.
Lesson XXII
1 1 0.
The personal infmitive. Thus far, the impersonal infmitive only has been used in this
texto It is invariable in form and has no subject. There is also a personal infinitive, Le., one
possessing personal endings, which are added to the impersonal infinitive. The translation of
this form varies with the usage. The forms of the personal infmitive are as follows:
Impersonal lnfinitive
falar
Personal lnfinitive
eu falar
voc falar
ele falar
ns falarmos
vocs falarem
eles falarem.
96
There are also endings for the old second person forms. It will be noted that, in verbs which are
are regular in the preterit, the personal infrnitive coincides in its forms with the future sub
junctive. But future subjunctive forms of verbs whose preterits are irregular have a different stern.
Thus fazer:
Future subjunctive fizer, fizermos, fizerem
Personal lnfinitve fazer, fazermos, fazerem
111.
Use of the personal infinitve. There are no rules governing the use of the personal infinitive which have not been violated by the best authors of the language. And there is not a
single idea which cannot be expressed correctly in Portuguese without the use of this formo
However, it is in constant and frequent use both by writers and by speakers of aU levels of
speech, and it is therefore very important. Its use in BF is rather cleariy defined, basically as
foUows:
The infinitive is personal when its logical subject has not yet been mentioned in the sentence,
either as subject or direct object of the preceding verbo It may occasionaUy be heard in these
circumstances also if the infmitive is separated from the preceding verb by several words. A
pronoun used as the subject of the infinitive is always in the subject (nominative) formo It may
be expressed whenever it is emphasized, or merely for clarity, especiaUy in the singular.
The personal infmitive may very often replace the subjunctive, and some times the indicative.
At other times it is used instead of the impersonal infinitive, for greater clarity. When it re
places the subjunctive, the construction varies from verb to verb, so that it is necessary to learn
the constructions which follow each verbo Thus, we may use either the subjunctive or the per
sonal infinitive after dizer, to teU to.
Ele diz que faamos o trabalho.
Ele nos diz para fazermos o trabalho.
He tells us to do the work.

He teUs us to do the work.
ln this instance, the indirect object may be used or omitted. The preposition para must be
used.
Also after pedir the sarne construction is used.
Joo pede que ajudemos na loja.
Joo pede para ajudarmos na loja.
John asks us to help at the store.
Whenever a conjunction requiring the subjunctive is paraUeled by a preposition having the sarne
meaning, we may replace the conjunction and the subjunctive by the preposition and the personal
infinitive.
Vo jantar depois que ns chegarmos.
Vo jantar depois de ns chegarmos.
They will dine after we arrive.
1 1 2.
Radical-changing nouns and adjectives. Some nouns and adjectives which end in o in
the masculine singular have the stern vowel // in that form, but have // in alI others. This
applies to adjectives and to nouns in which the difference in gender is shown by changing final
o to a. It should be remembered that most nouns and adjectives keep the vowel of the mascu
line singular in all forms, whether it is // or /j. Those which change must be learned.
97
Vocabulary
Nouns
o av
pI. avs
a av
pI. avs
o fogo ll
pI. fogos ll
o olho l l
pI. olhos ll
o ovo ll
pI. l l
a horta l/
o legume
a couve
o quiabo
o pomar
a laranja
a laranjeira
a manga
a mangueira
a jaca
a jaqueira
Nouns
grandfather
grandmother
fire
eye
egg
garden
vegetable
kale
okra
orchard
orange
orange tree
mango (fruit)
mango tree
jack fruit
jack fruit tree
Adjectives
novo //
pI. and fem. //
castanho
feio
frito
mexido
domstico
new, young
brown (hair, eyes)
ugly
fried
stirred, scrambled
domestic
o cavalo
a vaca
a cabra
a galinha
o pato
o cachorro I/
a fazenda
o fazendeiro
a famma
o aniversrio
o dente
. a lua
a planta
a parte
o lugar
o cabelo //
o milho
a coisa
horse
cow
goat
chicken; hen
duck
dog
farm; ranch
farmer; rancher
family
birthday
tooth
moon
plant
part
place
hair
com
thing
Verbs
calar
olhar (para)
cozinhar Ikul
plantar
existir
criar
montar
put on (shoes, gloves)

look (at)
cook
plant; raise
exist
raise (animaIs)
ride (horse)
Adverbs
ali
quase
tambm no
right there
almost
not . . . either
Expressions
Toda parte
Outra parte
Alguma parte
Fazer anos
Fazer 29 anos
Olha o carro !
Olha para o carro.
Montar a cavalo
A maior parte de
A faze nda mesma
98
Everywhere
Elsewhere
Somewhere
To have a birthday
To have one's 29th birthday
Look at the caro Look out for the caro
Look at the car.
To ride horseback
Most of
The farm itself
Leitura
Meus avs moram na roa. Meu av tem uma pequena fazenda em Minas Gerais. Tem muitos
fazendeiros naquele estado. Algumas fazendas so grandes, mas muitas so mais ou menos
pequenas.
Meu av planta milho e tem uma pequena horta onde planta legumes como couve e quiabo.
Existe tambm na fazenda um pomar, com laranjeiras, mangueiras e jaqueiras. Ele cria tambm
animais domsticos, como cavalos, vacas e cabras. Os cavalos so de montar. As vacas e cabras
do leite e carne para a famI1ia. Meus avs criam tambm galinhas e patos que pem ovos. E meu
av tem um cachorro que anda sempre com ele pela fazenda e guarda a casa de noite.
A maior parte do que a famI1ia e os empregados comem da fazenda mesma. H uma empre
gada que cozinha tudo para a casa.
Exercise A. Learn to say the following, using either the subjunctive or the infinitive:
1 . Ele (nos) diz que sigamos atrs dele.
2. Eu peo que vocs me tragam um sorvete .
3 . Voc permite que eu acenda a luz?

4. Ns aconselhamos que eles acordem cedo.
S. Ele deixa que abramos a j anela.
6. Nossos pais probem que tornemos
cerveja.
7 . Ele manda que voltem amanh.
8.Eu prefiro que vocs brinquem l fora.
9. Queremos que eles calcem os sapatos.
1 0. Desejo que guardem os livros.
1 1 . Ele manda que venhamos com voc.
Ele diz para seguirmos atrs dele.

Eu lhes peo para trazerem um sorvete para
mim.
Voc me permite acender a luz?
Ns lhes aconselhamos acordarem cedo.
Ele nos deixa abrir a janela.
Nossos pais nos probem tomar cerveja.
Ele manda voltarem amanh.
(subjunctive only)
(subj unctive only)
(subjunctive only)
Ele nos manda vir com voc.
Exercise B. Use of the infinitive :

1 . Vocs no podem ir embora at tocarmos
esta msica.
2. Ternos medo de entrar na loja.
3. No queremos pagar at saber que a
coisa boa.
4. Antes de criarmos vacas, vamos plantar
milho.
5 . Olhamos para a rua antes de atravessar.
6. Depois de lermos este livro, vamos saber
mais sobre o Brasil.
7. Para ganharmos dinheiro, preciso
trabalhar.
8. No gosto destes cachorros, por serem
feios.
9. Eles partiram sem sabermos.
l O . Quero saltar nesta esquina.
1 1 . No aconselhamos fazer isso.
1 2. Prefiro no ficar.
You can't leave until we play this musico

We are afraid to enter the store.
We don't want to pay until we know the arti
ele is good.
Before we raise cows, Iet's raise some com.
We look at the street before we crosS.
After we read this book, we are going to
know more about Brazil.
ln order to earn money, we must work.
I don't like these dogs, because they are
ugly.
They left without our knowing.
I want to get off at this comer.
We don't advise doing that.
I prefer not to stay.
99
Exercise C. Word usage. Be able to give in English from hearing the Port uguese :
1 . Voc tem razo quando diz que ele feio.

2. Se ele nasceu nesta data, hoje o aniversrio dele.
3. Comemos laranjas, mangas e jacas.
4. A que horas a lua nasce hoje?
5. Este menino tem um dente nascendo.
6. Meu irmo tem cabelo castanho.
7. Existe muita coisa feia neste mundo. (Note sing. muita coisa)
8. Tenho que calar os sapatos.
9. Essa moa tem olhos azuis.
1 0. Creio que aquele est olhando para mim.
1 1 . Eu creio que sim. Voc no acha?
1 2. Olha o cachorro!
1 3 . Uma rvore uma planta grande.
1 4. Ele no gosta deste lugar e eu tambm no gosto.
1 5 . Em que dia voc faz anos?
1 6. Quantos anos voc faz hoje?
1 7. Alguma coisa no est no lugar.
1 8. Eu no nasci aqui; eu ou de outra parte.
19. Voc gosta de montar a cavalo?
20. Ela cozinha sobre o fogo.
1 . This hen laid an egg.
2. My grandparents live in the country.
3. I like fried eggs.
4. They cooked ( prepared) scrambled eggs on the fire.
5. My grandmother has brown hair.
6. Put on your shoes and come with uso
7. What do you eat for ( with) breakfast?
8. My plants have come up.
9. The sun has come up.
1 0. The moon rises at 9 : 30 p.m.
1 1 . He says for us to come up.
1 2 . Before dressing, we must take a bath. (tomar banho)
1 3. After hearing this, they called me.
1 4. He asks (for) you two to get him a dog.
1 5. Without finishing our work, we can't go.
1 6 . I was able to leave without their forbidding it.
1 7 . He said for us to keep the money.
1 8. We prefer to stay alone.
1 9 . ln order for me to read this book, a light is needed,
20. I heard the boys talking in the store.
=
Exercise E. Fill in blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in parentheses :
1 . (olhar) No querem que ns
para elas.
os sapatos.
2. (calar) Ele manda que eu
3. (existir) No permitem que essas coisas
a cavalo.
4. (montar) O mdico aconselha que voc
5. (criar) Prolem que ns
cabras na cidade.
_
_
_
_
_
1 00
6. (cozinhar) Desejo que voc

7. (despedir-se) Preflfo que eles
8. (demorar) Pedimos que eles no
9 . (encher) Queremos que a garonete
1 0. (dormir) No deixam que ns
____
para ns.
de ns.
_
_
_
_
_
_____
nossas xcaras,
_
_
_
_
_
Exercise F. Fill in blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in parentheses:
sono.
1 . (ter) Mandaram-nos para cama antes de [ns]
uma viagem ao Rio.
2. (fazer) Era bom [ns]
3. (encontrar) Temos vontade de nos
com vocs l
4. (desligar) Pedilhes para
o rdio.
5. (nascer) Fica bonito de manh depois do sol
6. (vir) Tenho medo de eles
muito cedo.
os cales de banho.
7. (trazer) Eu j disse para vocs
8. (cansar) Estudamos at os olhos se
9. (ganhar) Para eu
, preciso voc me ajudar.
1 0. (poder) Na chuva ficamos sem
nos enxergar.
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
1 . People don't do that.

2. He lives beyond the river.
3 . We must move to another house.
4. They go (to) everywhere.
5. The sun always shone.
6. The boy is looking at the moon.
7. His eyes are black.
8. Were you bom in this place?
9. When is your birthday?
1 0. His hair is ugly.
1 1 . You are right and I am wrong.

12. He is [right over] there.
1 3 . I don't believe it either.
14. He doesn't either.
1 5 . Look at me !
16. I am [standing] between you.
1 7. I t is [lying] on the table.
1 8. She has brown eyes and black hair.
19. He raises com and okra.
20 The cows give us milk and meato
Lesson XXIII
1 1 3.
Irregular present subjunctives. The rule for forming the present subjunctive states that
we use the first person singular of the present indicative and remove the final 0, to find the
stern of the present subjunctive. However, there are six verbs which do not have a final o in this
formo ln addition, the verb querer does not follow this rule. The present subjunctive of these
seven verbs must be leamed separately. Note further irregularities in the third person plural in
two verbs, dar and ir.
eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
ser
estar
ir
dar
saber
querer
seja //
seja
seja
sejamos
sejam
sejam
esteja //
esteja
esteja
estejamos
estejam
estejam
v
v
v
vamos
vo
vo
d
d
d
demos
dem
dem
saiba
saiba
saiba
saibamos
saibam
saibam
queira
queira
queira
queiramos
queiram
queiram
The seventh verb is haver, which has not yet been studied.
101
1 14 .
The subj unctive of emotion. Any verb, or a combination of a verb with a noun or
adjective, which expresses emotion, is followed by the subjunctive if the dependent verb has a
subject which is different from that of the main ver bo If the logical subject of the two verbs is
the same, the impersonal infinitive is used, although it is often possible to use the subjunctive
in these cases also.
Eu sinto que ele no possa ir.
I'm sorry he can't go.
Eu sinto no poder ir .
I'm sorry I can't go.
Eu sinto que eu no possa ir.
l'm sorry I can't go.
Some of the more frequently used expressions of emotion are the following:
sentir (que)
to be sorry (that), feel sorry (that), regret

(that)
esperar (que)
to hope (that)
tomara (que)
I hope (that), would (that)
temer (que)
to fear (that
surpreende (-me) (que)
(I am) surprised (that), it surprises (me)
ter pena (que)
to be sorry (that)
ter medo (que)
to be afraid (that)
pena
it's too bad (that)
(that)
(que)
estar contente (que)
to be glad (that)
The future subjunctive is not used after expressions of emotion ; the present is used instead.
1 1 5.
The past participle. Regular past participles are formed by adding -ado to stems of
verbs of the first conjugation, -ido to those of the second and third conjugations.
falar
falado
comer
comido
spoken
eaten
ouvir
ouvido
heard
Unless used as part of a perfect tense, the past participle agrees with the noun or pronoun it
modifies.
falada l.
uma conversa ouvida na rua.
Essa lngua
1 1 6.
That language is spoken there.

It's a bit of gossip heard on the street.
Irregular past participles. The following verbs already studied have irregular past parti-
ciples:
vir
vindo
come
ganhar
ganho
won, earned
ver
visto
entregar
entregue
dizer
dito
said, told
pr
posto jj
put, placed
seen
jj
pI. and fem.
1 02
delivered
jj
fazer
feito
abrir
aberto jj
open, opened
escrever
escrito
written
done, made
1 1 7.
The passive voice. The passive voice is formed by the use of the auxiliary verb
ser, fol-
lowed by the past participle. The participle agrees with the subject in number and gender.
Joo foi chamado.
John was calle d.
A carta foi recebida.
The letter was received.
As bananas foram entregues.
The bananas were delivered.
Portuguese diffe rs from other Romance languages in that the passive voice is used almost as
frequently as in English. It is also important to remember that the auxiliary
ser may be used
with the past participle whenever the state denoted by the participle is permanent, without
necessarily forming the passive voice.
There is a second construction which corresponds closely with the use of "get" in English with
the past participle . The verb used in Portuguese is ficar.
Fiquei perdido.
I got lost.
Meu amigo ficou cansado.
My friend got tired.

Vocabulary
Nouns
Nouns
a lngua
tongue ; language
a mata
forest
a selva //
j ungle
a geografia /jiu/
geography
o rnato
brush, low fo rest
a montanha
mountain
a serra //
range (hills or
o morro //
hill
o Rio
Rio
mountains)
o Rio de Janeiro
Rio de Janeiro
o Rio Amazonas
Amazon River
o distrito
district
a capital
capital (city)
o centro
center
o leste //
east
o oeste //
west
o norte //
north
o sul
south
a costa //
coast
o mar
sea
o interior //
interior
a plancie / si/
plain
o pas
country
Adjectives
federal
federal
nenhum, nenhuma
no
contente
glad, happy
grosso //
thick
Verbs
cobrir (eu cubro
cover
p.p. coberto //
crescer
grow
variar
vary
estender-se
extend
sentir
be sorry, regret
esperar
hope
tomara
(from
I wish; would that
tomar)
temer
fear
surpreender
surprise ; be surprising to
Preposition
por causa de
because of
Adverbs
antigamente
formerly
at
even
da
from there, from then

on, thence
pI. and fe m. / /
1 03
Expressions
ao norte daqui.
ao sul da cidade
a oeste da serra
a leste do Paran.
Ele est variando.
Espera por ele.
Tomara que chova.
Isso foi antigamente.
E da?
north of here
south of town
west of the mountains
east of the Paran
He's delirious.
Wait for him.
I hope it rains.
This was in the old days.
So what?
Leitura
o Brasil tem vinte e dois estados, alm de quatro territrios e um distrito federal. A capital,
Brasllia, fica no centro do pas, no Distrito Federal. A leste da capital se acha o estado de Minas
Gerais, que tem muitas montanhas. Algumas destas so mais ou menos altas, mas nenhuma est
coberta de neve. A maior parte do estado era antigamente coberta de mato. Uma parte do sul
chamada a Zona da Mata, por causa das rvores altas que cresciam l. No tem selvas nesta parte
do Brasil. A selva se encontra nos vales do rio Amazonas, do Paran e do Paraguai. O Amazonas
passa pelo norte do pas, mas o Paran e o Paraguai ficam no oeste e vo para o sul .
A geografia do Brasil muito variada. Mesmo no Rio de Janeiro existem muitos morros e
at uma serra. A Serra do Mar se estende ao longo de uma grande parte da costa do pas. Longe
no interior h plancies cobertas de mato. Da vem o nome do estado de Mato Grosso. O rio
Paran passa entre este estado e So Paulo.
Exercise A. Read and repeat aloud:

1 . No Rio tem muitas pessoas vindas de outros estados.
2. H at muita gente de outros pases.
3. Muitos deixam o Norte e vo morar no Sul.
4. Temos que subir a serra para ir do Rio a Minas.
5 . Voc conhece o Morro da Babilnia no Rio?
6. A serra no fica muito longe do mar.
7 . Mata mais alta do que mato.
8. A mata do vale do Amazonas se chama selva.
9 . So Paulo fica a oeste do Rio.
I O.Temos que estudar geografia.
1 1 . A plancie se extende pelo sul de Mato Grosso.
1 2. Antigamente o Rio era a capital do pas.
1 3 . Os territrios tm pouca gente.
14. Eu quero que voc d uma olhada no mapa do Brasil.
1 5 . A mata no cobre todo o vale do Amazonas.
Exercise B. Be able to give either language from the other:
1 . Uma pessoa vem. Espero que seja Joo.
2. Eu sinto que ele esteja doente.

3. Tomara que ele venha.
4. Ele teme que vamos embora.
5 . Quero que voc saiba isto.
6. pena que ele no queira ajudar.
7 . Surpreende-me que eles airlda estejam aqui.
8. pena que eles no saibam quem voc .
1 04
Somebody's coming. I hope it's John.

I'm sorry he's sick.
I hope he comes.
He fears we'll Ieave.
I want you to know this.
It's a shame he won't help.
I'm surprised they are still here.
It's too bad they don't know who you are.
9. Estou contente que vo me dar caf.

1 0. Tenho medo de no ganhar.
1 1 . Ele sente no poder ir amanh.
1 2 . Tomara que eu possa dormir bem.
1 3 . Eu sinto muito no conhecer o mdico.
14. Espero que no tenha muita gente l.
1 5 . Surpreende-me que no dem para voc
o que lhe devem.
I'm glad they're giving me coffee.

I'm afraid of not winning.
He's sorry he can't go tomorrow.
I hope I can sleep well.
I'm very sorry I don't know the doctor.
I hope there won't be many people there.
I am surprised they don't give you what they
owe you.
Exercise C. Past participles:

1 . O portugus a l ngua falada no Brasil
2. Tudo foi comido.
3. A voz de Maria foi ouvida por muita gente.
4. Conheci muitas pessoas vindas do Norte.
5. Este dinheiro foi ganho com o meu trabalho.
6. Dito e feito. (No sooner said than done.)
7. No quero ser visto por ele.
8. Aquele embrulho j foi entregue?
9. Vi uma mesa posta para seis pessoas.
10. Uma porta aberta deixou a gente entrar.
1 1 . Comprei uma coisa feita mo. (by hand)
1 2. Ouvi uma coisa dita em voz baixa.
Exercise D. Fil! blanks with correct forms of verbs in parentheses:
1 . (ter) pena que voc
medo.
2. (seguir) No quero que ele me
3 . (cobrir) Temo que a neve
a serra at amanh.
4. (trazer) Tomara que ele
o carro.
5. (ver) Esperamos que ele no nos
mais.
6. (pedir) Surpreende-nos que ele ainda
7. (vestir) Preferem que nos
de branco.
o morro.
8. (subir) Probem que ns
no carro.
9. (caber) Sentimos que alguns no
muito cedo.
1 0. (surpreender) Temos medo que o frio nos
_
_
_
_
____
_
_
_
_
_____
____
____
_____
Exercise E. Replace each of the underlined verbs with the correct form of each of the other
verbs listed:
1.
Ele sente que voc no oua a voz dele.

a. (conhecer)
b. (olhar)
c. (responder)
d. (almoar)
e. (fazer)
2. Eu espero que vocs calcem os sapatos.

a. (vestir)
b. (crer)
c. (ler)
d. (trazer)
e. (subir)
o amigo dele.
para a gente.
s perguntas.
com ele.
uma viagem.
os palets.
minha histria.
a lio.
os livros.
a escada.
1 05
3 . Tomara que ele me diga quem .

a. (perder)
o trem.
b. (permitir)
que vo.
c. (preferir)
ficar.
d. (acordar)
na hora.
e. (vir)
de avio.
4. Tememos que eles nos apanhem aqui.

a. (entregar)
b. (ver)
a roupa tarde.
Maria na rua.
c. (no caber)
na sala.
d. (no pr)
a mesa
e. (no poder)
ir.
5. Surpreendelhe que voc no parta cedo.

a. (abrir)
a porta.
b. (ir)
igreja.
c. (ser)
rico.
d. (estar)
doente.
e. (dar)
dinheiro.
6. pena que ns no falemos portugus.

a. (beber)
caf.
b. (saber)
tocar piano.
c. (receber)
cartas dele.
d. (ter)
dinheiro.
e. (valer)
mais.
Exercise F. Say in Portuguese, using the subjunctive :

1 . I prefer that you give me a giass of water.
9. I hope you (plural) will give him the peno
2. He permits me to go.
l a. We fear you will teU him.
3. He teUs us to know the lesson.
1 1 . I1's too bad you prefer that [one.]
4. We advise the children to be good.
1 2. I am sorry you have to study.
5. We order him to listen to the radio.
1 3 . Let me do that.
6. I ask you to be there .
1 4 . TeU him to put on his coat.
7. We want you to sleep late.
1 5 . I'm surprised he doesn't miss his train.
8. He is sorry we don't want [to] .

Exercise G. Say in Portuguese, using the infinitive:
1 . TeU him to do that.
6. We forbid their keeping the money.
2. I ask them to have lunch with me.
7. He advised us to arrive early.
3. I want to see the boys before they go away.
8. It is necessary for us to write [some] letters.
4. He regrets our having to fix it.

5. They let me live with them.
9. It was a pity they didn't get off the bus.

l a. We carne home after being at the theater.

1 . Do you know a man named Pires?
2. This language is spoken in Brazil.
3. These books are written in Portuguese.
6. This book is called The United States
Seen by a Brazilian.
7 . She found three eggs laid by her hens.
4. I have a chair made from a tree.
8. The open door let them enter the house.
5. He had a coin won from a friend.
9. Here are two packages delivered by the boy .

l a. I found the chalk covered by a pape r.
1 06
Lesson XXIV
1 1 8.
Verbs with infinitives in -air. The verb sair may serve as a model for ali verbs whose infinitives end in -air, of which there are some fifteen.
eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
Present lndicative
Preteri!
lmperfect Indicative
Present Subjunctive
saio
sai
sai
samos
saem
saem
sa
saiu
saiu
samos
saram
saram
saa
saa
saa
saamos
saam
saam
saia
saia
saia
saiamos
saiam
saiam
Past participle: sado

With the exception of written accents, the only irregularities are found in the present indica
tive singular.
1 1 9.
The subjunctive with impersonal expressions. There are very many impersonal expressions, generally formed with an impersonal verb and a noun or an adjective, expressing necessity,
importance , inevitability, probability, etc. The impersonal verb is most frequently ser in the third
person singular. Such expressions, whether affirmative or negative , regularly take the subjunc
tive in the following clause, if there is a subject that is not impersonal. If the impersonal ex
pression indicates certainty, however, the indicative is used in a following clause.
preciso que ele v.

necessrio que eu saiba.
provvel que eles cresam.
seguro que eu vou.
preciso trabalhar.
It is
It is
It is
It is
It is
necessary that he go.

necessary for me to know.
probable that they will grow.
certain that I'm going.
necessary to work.
1 20.
The infinitive with impersonal expressions. Most of these sarne impersonal expressions
may be followed by the personal infinitive which becomes the logical subject of the tlrd-per
son verbo The person of the infinitive may be clarified or emphasized by the use of a subject
pronoun.
preciso ele ir.

necessrio eu saber.
possvel encontrarmos com ele.
urgente acharmos os meninos.
It
It
It
It
is necessary for him to go.

is necessary for me to know.
is possible for us to run into Im.
is urgent for us to find the boys.
1 21 .
The subjunctive of doubt or disbelief. Any verb or other expression of doubt or disbelief is followed by a subjunctive. Tls includes expressions of belief if they are negative. ln the
affirmative, expressions of belief are followed by the indicative.
Eu creio que ele sabe.

Achamos que eles tomam caf.
Acredito que verdade.
No creio que ele saiba.
No acredito que seja verdade.
I think he knows.
We think they drink coffee,
I believe it is true.
I don't think he knows.
I don't believe it is true.
1 07
ln practice, the subjunctive is often avoided by transferring the negative to the subordinate
verbo
I don't think he knows.
Creio que ele no sabe.
Expressions of doubt are followed by the subjunctive, whether they are affirmative or nega
tive.
Duvido que seja ele.
No duvido que seja ele.
I doubt it is he.
I don't doubt it is he.
ln questions containing expressions of belief, the subjunctive may be used to express the
speaker's doubt .
Voc cr que ele faz isso?
Voc cr que ele faa isso?
Do you believe he does that?

Do you really believe he does that?
Vocabulary
Nouns
a comida
o bife
a carne de porco
// pI . //
a vitela //
o presunto
a fruta
a ma
o pssego
o mamo
o morango
o abacaxi
o acar
o sal
a refeio
o prato
a faca
o garfo
a colher //
o ch
Nouns
food
steak
pork
o feijo
a cozinha
veal
ham
fruit
apple
peach
papaya
strawberry.
pineapple
sugar
salt
me ai (dinner, etc.)
plate, dish
knife
fork
spoon
tea
sair
sair (de)
cair
atrair
acreditar (em)
duvidar
viver
fritar
haja (subj. of h)
Adjectives
incrvel
(in) justo
lamentvel
(im) possvel
(im) provvel
1 08
incredible
(un) just
lamentable,
unfortunate
(im) possible
(im) probable
beans
kitchen; cuisine
Verbs
go out, come out
leave
fall
attract
believe (in)
doubt
live (be alive)
fry
there is, there are
Adjectives
necessrio
inevitvel
(in) desej vel
difcil
fcil
importante
aconselhvel
urgente
seguro
cozido
mal passado
bem passado
necessary
inevitable
(un) desirable
unlikely
likely
important
advisable
urgent
certain, sure
boiled, stewed
rare
well done
Leitura
No Brasil, como em outros pases, a gente geralmente come trs vezes por dia. Pela manh a
gente toma caf com leite e come po com manteiga. Algumas pessoas preferem frutas, que l
so muito boas. H frutas em todos os meses do ano, porque no faz frio na maior parte do
pas. H sempre frutas tropicais, como a laranja e a banana. Durante uma parte do ano h tam
bm abacaxis, morangos, pssegos e mamo. As mas geralmente vm de outros pases.
Ao meio-dia a gente almoa. Esta refeio tambm uma parte importante da comida brasi
leira. Os que trabalham na cidade podem comer um bife com batatas fritas e legume s. Mas em
casa o almoo geralmente mais variado. O bife a carne que os brasileiros preferem, mas comem
bastante carne de porco tambm. O presunto e a vitela se encontram mais nos restaurantes do
que em casa.
Exercise A. Be able to give the Portuguese at a natural speaking pace:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Eu sa de casa s oito.
Sai da!
O trem sai da estao.
Vi muita gente entrando e saindo.
Se este livro sair bem, vai ser publicado.
6. Seu filho saiu bem no exame?

7. Joo no est ; j saiu.
8. A ma caiu da rvore.
9. Uma coisa caiu l de cima.
1 0. Os meninos caram em cima do sorvete.
1 1 . Vamos cair na gua.
12. Nessa eu no caio.
13. uma coisa que no me atrai.
1 4. Isto no atrai os olhos da gente.
1 5 . O professor distrado esqueceu a aula.
I left the house at eight.

Get out of there !
The train leaves the station.
I saw lots of people going in and coming out.
If this book turns out well, it will be published.
Did your son pass the examination?
John isn't here ; he has gone out.
The apple fell off the tree.
Something fell from up there.
The kids fell on (ate up) the ice cream.
Let's take a dip.
I won't fall for that one.
It's something that doesn't attract me.
This doesn't attract attention.
The absent-minded professor forgot his class.
Exercise B. Give the following using the infinitive :

1 . preciso que voc espere.
2. Acho necessrio que eles se conheam.
3. inevitvel que voc seja chamado.
4. desejvel que ele mande consertar o carro.
5. possvel que encontremos visita em casa.
6. importante que vocs saibam isto.
7. incrvel que meu primo no responda minha carta.
8. improvvel que jantemos em casa.
9. urgente que eu arranje um mdico.
1 0. lamentvel que ele esteja doente.
Exercise C. Give the following, using the subjunctive:
1 . preciso estarmos em casa hoje.
2. injusto termos que trabalhar sem ganhar.
3. fcil explicarem a lico, se quiserem.
4. desejvel os meninos ficarem em casa.
5. provvel acharmos o jantar preparado.
6. necessrio fazermos o trabalho.
7. No importante eu tomar este trem.
1 09
Exercise D. Use of reflexives:
1.
No inverno a terra se cobre de neve.
6.
2. Cozinham-se arroz e feijo.
3.
4.
Onde se acham flores para comprar?
7. Isso no se deve comer.
Os sapatos devem calar-se.
8.
9.
1 0.
Os morangos se compram barato.
5 . Ganhava-se muito dinheiro nesse trabalho.
A que horas se abrem as portas?

Perdeu-se um chapu.
A carne se vende pelo quilo.
Exercise E. Fill in the correct form of the verb in parentheses:

1 . (compreender) Tomara que Joo
_
_
_
_
conosco.
2. (almoar) Esperamos que voc
3. (chegar) Temem que ns

4. (beber) Sinto que voc no
tarde.
5. (andar) Preferem que eu
por aqui.
6.
leite.
(apanhar) Temos medo que a chuva nos
7 . (ouvir) Peo que voc me
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
8. (conhecer) Surpreende-me que

9. (cobrir) Aconselho que vocs
1 0. (ficar) pena que eles no
ele no
voc.
a mesa.
_
_
_
_
_
Exercise F. Fil! in blanks with the past participles of the verbs in parentheses, making necessary
changes for agreement:
1 . (falar) Uma lngua

2. (dizer) Palavras
-'-3. (deitar) Pessoas
4. (crescer) Um menino
_
_
_
_
em voz alta.
_
_
_____
no cho.
_
_
_
_
5 . (cobrir) Pratos
_
_
_
_
6.
____
(tocar) Msica
7 . (crer) Histrias
na vitrola.
pelo povo.
8. (escrever) Livros
9. (pr) Mesas
1 0. (fazer) Sapatos
1 1 . (entregar) Embrulhos
1 2 . (ganhar) Tempo
1 3 . (ver) Luzes
14. (dar) Andando de mos
em portugus.
na sala de jantar.
____
mo.
_____
para casa.
_
_
_
_
I S . (cair) Neve
____
ao longe.
_
_
_
_
durante a noite.
1.
He left the house eariy.
2. When is the book coming out?
3. Let's get into the water.

4. This street used to attract
people.
1 1 . I carne out well on the exam.

1 2. Go in and don't come out.
1 3 . I fell on the sidewalk.
1 4. A well-set table attracts the kids.
5 . It is impossible for us to go.
1 5 . It is likely he will fmd uso
6.
1 6 . It is important to know this.
It is urgent that we get home
7. It is incredible that he would sell it.
8.
9.
10.
Do you believe it is worth the trouble?
1 7 . There is no doubt he will ask for it.

1 8 . I don't think he'll do it.
We doubt he'll miss dinner.
19. It's unlikely he'U catch it.
Lots of potatoes are eaten in this country.
20. This is the money that was owed to John.
1 10

I want pork for ( no) dinner.
She put a knife, a fork and a spoon at each plate.
I like pineapples better than oranges.
We live well, eating meat, beans, rice, and fruit.
He prefers fried potatoes.
Did you put salt on your vegetables?
7. ln Bahia the food is very good.
8. Today we have apples, peaches, and bananas.
9.This coffee has too much sugar.
1 0. Brazilian cooking uses lots of rice and beans.
1 1 . We eat three meals a day.
1 2 . The rice is better than the breado
1 3 . I doubt that you will like this veal.
14. These strawberries carne from So Paulo.
1 5. We are going to have coffee in the living room, if you wish.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Lesson XXV
1 22.
eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
The irregular verbs rir and sorrir.
Present lndicative
Preterit
lmperfect lndicative
Present Subjunctive
rio
ri
ri
rimos
riem
riem
ri
riu
riu
rimos
riram
riram
ria
ria
ria
ramos
riam
riam
ria
ria
ria
riamos
riam
riam
All forms are regular except the present indicative.
Sorrir is conjugated exactly like rir, with
sor- prefixed to each of its forms.

The imperfect subjunctive. The forms of the imperfect subjunctive of any verb may
be derived from the third person plural of the preterit. The letters -ram are removed, and the
endings -sse, -ssemos, and -ssem are added. The vowel before the ending is always that of the
preterit formo The first person plural requires a written accent on this vowel.
1 23.
singular form
(eu, voc, ele)
ns
vocs, eles
ser
falar
comer
abrir
falasse
falssemos
falassem
comesse
comssemos
comessem
fosse //
abrisse
abrssemos fssemos
abrissem
fossem
1 24.
Use of the imperfect subjunctive. This tense is used instead of either the present or future subjunctive whenever the verb of the main clause is in any past tense. The choice of the
imperfect is purely a matter of the sequence of tenses.
a. If the main verb is in the present or future tense, or in the imperative, the subjunctive in a
dependent clause will be in the prese-nt (or in the future in the cases previously given).
111
b. I f the main verb is in any past tense (inc1uding the conditional), the subjunctive of the
dependent clause will be in the imperfect.
c. ln certain cases the expression of emotion, although put in the present tense may be the
result of a condition which existed in the pasto ln such cases, the imperfect subjunctive may
follow a present tense.
Eu quero que voc v congo.
Eu queria que voc fosse congo.
Ele sente que voc esteja doente.
Ele sentia que voc estivesse doente.
Ele sente que voc estivesse doente.
I want you to go with me.

I wanted you to go with me.
He's sorry you are ill.
He was sorry you were ill.
He is sorry you were ill.
1 25 .
Subjunctive in adverbial clauses. The subjunctive is used in many dependent adver
bial clauses (those introduced by an adverbial conjunction).
a. Following adverbial conjunctions of time, the subjunctive is used if the dependent

clause refers to future action or condition. The futurity may be either in relation to
present time or to the time of the main verbo
lt must be remembered that, following certain of these conjunctions, the future subjunc
tive is used. Following others, the present must be used. Some conjunctions permit the use
of either, but in these cases BF prefers the future. The following conjunctions are regu
larly followed by the future subjunctive, after a main verb in the present or future, if fu
turity is implied.
when
while, as long as
quando
enquanto
The following may be followed by either the present or the future, but BF usually prefers
the future.
logo que
assim que
depois que
as soon as
as soon as
after
The following may only be followed by the present.

antes que
at que
before
until
b. Following an adverbial conjunction of concession (although, even if), the present sub
junctive (never the future) must be used, whether or not the statement of the following
verb is factual. The main conjunctions of this type are:
embora
ainda que
posto que
although, even if
although, even if
although, even if
c. Following an adverbial conjunction of purpose, the present subjunctive is used, after a

present or future tense.
para que
a fim de que
1 12
in order that, so that,

in order that
50
d. Following an adverbial conjunction of result, the subjunctive is used only if purpose is

also implied. Otherwise, the verb is in the indicative.
so that, in such a way that, so
de maneira que
de modo que
de jeito que
ln ali cases, following a past tense, a subjunctive in the dependent clause will be in the im
perfect tense.
Vocabulary
Nouns
Conjunctions
o jeito
a espcie
a pedra //
o futebol //
o time
o pssaro
a cana (de acar)
o pedao
a terra //
a foto (grafia)
o cho
o dedo //
way, manner
kind
rock, stone
soccer
team
bird
cane
(broken) pie ce
land, earth
photo (graph)
ground; fioor
finger; toe
Conjunctions
antes que
at que
embora //
ainda que
posto que //
before
until
although
although
although
para que
de maneira que
de modo que //
de jeito que
in order that, so that

so that, in such a way that
so that
so that
Verbs
rir
sorrir
cortar
pagar
sentar (-se)
descer
comear (a)
chupar
laugh
smile
cut
pay
sit down
come down, go down
begin (to)
suck
Adverb
s
only, just
Adjectives
seguinte /si/
prximo (x Is!)
passado
juntos
s or sozinho //
=
following
next
past, last
together
alone
Expressions
Domingo passado
No ano seguinte
No ano que vem
Ele comea a estudar.
Tomara que eu pudesse.
Tirei uma foto.
Tiraram a mesa.
last Sunday
the next year
next year
He begins to study.
I wish I could.
I took a picture.
They cleared off the table.
1 13
Exercise A. Rir and sorrir:

1 . Ela tem olhos que riem.
2. Ela est (se) rindo de mim.
3. Ela (se) ri destas idias.
4. Ele falou sorrindo.
5 . Meu amigo sorria da minha simplicidade.
6. O menino sorriu para mim.
She has laughing eyes.

She is laughing at me.
She laughs at these ideas.
He spoke smiling(ly).
My friend smiled at my simplicity.
The child smiled at me.
Exercise B. Note the constructions in the following sentences:

1 . Os meninos gostam de chupar cana de
acar.
2. Vocs comem laranjas, mas ns chupamos.
3. Os rapazes esto jogando futebol.
4. O meu time ganhou.
5 . Tirei uma foto de vocs.
6. Um pedao de papel caiu no cho.
7 . Voc no sente frio sentado l no cho?
8. Vou mandar cortar o cabelo.
9. Senta aqui e espera at que ele venha.
1 0. Vamos andando, embora ainda tenhamos
tempo.
1 1 . Vamos j untos festa?
1 2 . Ou voc prefere ir sozinho?
1 3 . Voc quer outra coisa? -No. s.
14. Vou l na quinta e volto no dia seguinte.
1 5 . J estive l no ano passado.
The kids like to suck sugar cane.

Vou eat oranges, but we suck the m.
The boys are playing soccer.
My team won.
I took a picture of you.
A piece of paper fell on the floor.
Don't you feel cold sitting there on the floor?
I'm going to have my hair cut.
Sit here and wait until he comes.
Let's be going, although we still have time.
Shal1 we go to the party together'!
Or do you prefer to go alone?
Do you want something else? No, that's ali.
I'm going there Thursday and I'Il come back
the following day.
I was there last year.
Exercise C. Give the imperfect subjunctive in the sarne person and number as the following
present subjunctives:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1 0.
Que ele pea.

Que ns durmamos.
Que eu almoce.
Que eles permitam
Que voc valha
Que ele oua.
Que eu diga
Que ns venhamos
Que eles prefiram.
Que voc cresa.
1 1 . Que eu leia.
12.
13.
1 4.
15.
1 6.
Que ns saiamos.
Que ele viva.
Que vocs tragam
Que eu saiba.
Que eles vejam.
1 7 . Que ns ponhamos
1 8. Que ele d.
1 9. Que voc queira.
20. Que eles vo.
Exercise D. Put in the blanks the correct forms of the words in parentheses:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
(falar) Eu lhe disse que [ele]

portugus.
ir.
(querer) Ele no acreditou que eu
pena dele.
(ter) Ele pedia que ns
amigos.
(ser) Ele preferia que eles
o trabalho.
(fazer) Deixvamos que ele
doente.
(estar) Eu sentia que voc
7. (morar) Tomara que voc
perto de mim.
8. (ler) Espervamos que voc
o jornal de hoje.
1 14
9. (escutar) Eu temia que ele me

1 0. (conhecer) Surpreendia-me que ele me
l I . (chegar) Era preciso que voc
cedo.
1 2 . (vender) Era importante que eles
a casa.
a cidade.
13. (deixar) Era urgente que ns
nas frias.
14. (divertir-se) Era provvel que vocs
1 5 . (sentar-se) Foi necessrio que eu
no cho.
1 6 . (vir) Eu disse que esperava enquanto ele no
1 7 . (querer) Ele sabia que podia sair quando
1 8 . (voltar) Eu pedi que me chamasse logo que
19. (chover) Ele me disse que ia cidade, embora
entrar.
20. (poder) Abri a porta para que eles
2 1 . (cair) Puseram a gua em cima da porta, de maneira que
22. (querer) Ele no pde vir, posto que
23. (estar) Eu disse a voc que no devia cham-lo quando
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_____
sobre ele.
_
_
_
_
_
____
falando.
Exercise E. Change the following sentences to past time (Note: some sentences may not remain
in the subjunctive):
1. Voc pode ir quando quiser.
2. Vocs vo ficar aqui enquanto formos cidade.
3. O inverno fica feio enquanto no nevar.
4. Eu vou deitar assim que subir ao quarto.
5. Ele vai abrir a porta depois que ouvir as vozes de fora.
6. Voc deve se vestir antes que desa sala.
7. Vamos sair antes que ele chegue.
8. No podemos sentar at que os senhores se sentem.
9. Ele no muito novo, embora jogue futebol.
1 0. Dou dinheiro aos meninos para que se divirtam.
Exercise F . Idiomatic usages:
1 . Ele janta comigo na sexta que vem.
2. Sbado passado foi dia de chuva.
3. Aquelas duas andam sempre juntas.
4. Ele jogou uma pedra em mim.
5 . Cortei o dedo com uma faca.
6. Paguei o almoo dos dois.
7. Paguei vinte cruzeiros por isto.
8. Senta aqui, por favor.
9. No acho lugar para (me) sentar.
1 0. Voc quer descer com este embrulho?
1 1 . Ele est descendo a escada.
1 2. Diverte-se na feira.
1 3. Isto bom de chupar o dedo.
1 4. No tem jeito de fazer isso.
1 5 . De jeito nenhum!
16. Temos que dar um jeito para arranjar
um carro.
17. Ele ficou sem jeito.
1 8 . Meu tio muito jeitoso.
1 9. O nosso mundo a Terra.
He has dinner with me next Friday.

Last Saturday was a rainy day.
Those two are always together.
He threw a rock at me.
I cut my finger with a knife.
I paid for lunch for the two of them.
I paid Cr$20,00 for this.
Sit down here, please.
I can't find a place to sit.
WiJI you take this package down?
He is coming downstairs.
Have fun at the market.
This is finger-Jicking good.
There's no way to do that.
Not at alI! (No way !)
We must find a way to get a caro
He was embarrassed_
My unc1e is very skiJIful.
Our world is the earth.
115
20. Este rapaz da minha terra.

2 1 . Isto uma espcie /sps/ de brinquedo.
22. Que espcie de carro voc tem?
23. Meu livro est caindo aos pedaos.
This fellow is from my part of the country.

This is some kind of toy.
What kind of car do you have?
My book is falling to pieces.

1 . Let's find a way to ( = de) speak to them before they leave.
2. He took off his hat and smiled at her.
3. Don't laugh at me just (= s) because I am ugiy.
4. She smiled at (de) my story, but she didn't smile at (para) me.
5. He threw his shoe on the floor.
6. Cut the bread so we can eat it.
7. We can leave if you will pay for the coffee.
8. Come down the hill to see our team play.
9. There were pieces of paper on the ground.
1 0. I took a picture of a bird on the house.
1 1 . He lives in a kind of stone house.
1 2. The boy was sucking his thumb. ( dedo)
1 3. Have a good time while you are here.
14. Won't you sit down and wait a bit?
1 5 . He 10ves to suck sugar cane.
1 6. What kind of book are you reading?
17. Are you beginning to learn?
1 8. I can't find a way to fix this.
19. He ate (tomou) his ice cream with a spoon.
20. What is the difference between smiling and laughing?
=

1 . Catch him before he goes up [stairs] .
2. If I miss the bus, 1'11 have to walk.
3 . We are not going to give it to him until he asks us [to] .
4. He feels well, although he fell off the ladder.
5. I told (falei) him about it in such a way that he could not understand it.
6. We are going in my car, even though we don't fit [into it] very well.
7. He works so that his children can eat.
8. Next year we are going to travei, even if we don't have much time.
9. (ln) last year, he played soccer.
1 0. So you don't want to get married?
1 1 . I gave him a present so he would think of me on his birthday.
1 2 . Sit down so that you can resto
Lesson XXVI
1 26.
The irregular verb haver.

eu
voc
ele
1 16
Present Indicative
Preterit
Present Subjunctive
hei
h
h
houve
houve
houve
haja
haja
haja
ns
vocs
eles
havemos
ho
ho
houvemos
houveram //
houveram //
hajamos
hajam
hajam
The imperfect indicative is regular. The future and imperfect subjunctive may be derived from
houveram.
1 27.
Uses of haver. Although it is derived from the Latin verb meaning "to have ," this verb
neve r has that meaning in BF.
The third person singular forms in the various tenses of the indicative and subj unctive are used
to mean "there is (are)," "There was (were)" etc. ln addition, all forms of the present and imper.
fect may be used as auxiliaries of the future and conditional as explained below. Oilly the third
person singular of the preterit is used nowadays.
The word h, when followed by a noun or expression of a period of time, means "ago."
H dois anos
Two years ago
1 28.
The expression of futurity in Portuguese. We have already taken up two methods of expressing the future-the use of the auxiliary ir, and the simple present. There are two others.
AlI are used in the colloquial as well as the literary language.
The simple future tense is formed by adiiing the endings -ei, - -emos, -o to the full infinitive of
the verbo The sarne endings are used in all three conjugations.
eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
falar
comer
abrir
falarei
falar
falar
falaremos
falaro
falaro
comerei
comer
comer
comeremos
comero
comero
abrirei
abrir
abrir
abriremos
abriro
abriro
Three verbs add these endings to shortened forms of the infinitive.

fazer
trazer
dizer
farei, etc.
trarei, etc.
direi, etc.
The present tense of the verb haver, followed by de and the infinitive, forms a periphrastic fu
ture tense. This form may have the meaning "He is to speak, he is supposed to speak," etc.,
but is often exactly equivalent to the simple future. The forms are as follows:
falar
eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
hei de falar
h de falar
h de falar
havemos de falar
ho de falar
ho de falar
The least used in BF is the simpie future. The verbs which have only one syllable preceding the
ending serei, 'starei, terei, irei, farei, etc.-are heard fairly frequently ; longer verbs are used much
less in this formo But all the four constructions are perfectly natural in BF. See exercises for ex
amples.
1 17
-
1 29 .
The conditional tense. The conditional represents two quite different meanings, both
in English and in Portuguese. For example, it may represent futurity after a verb in past time .
Compare :
He says we will do it.

He said we would do it.
On the other hand, it is essentially a different mood of the verb in conditional sentences, such as
lf I were you, I wouldn't do it.
There are four ways to express the conditional in Portuguese, similar to those expressing fu
turity.
a. The imperfect indicative. This is by far the most frequent way, and can be used in ali
cases.
Ele disse que vinha.
Se eu fosse voc, no fazia isso.
He said he would come.

If I were you, I wouldn't do that.
b. The imperfect of ir with the infinitive may be used, if the conditional stands for the fu
ture in sequence after a verb in a past tense, but not elsewhere. This usage corresponds to
English.
Ele diz que vai voltar.
Ele disse que ia voltar.
He says he is going to return.

He said he would (was going to) return.
c. The simple conditional tense. This tense is formed by adding the endings -ia, -ia, - amos,
-iam to the infinitive (with the sarne three short forms mentioned above).
eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
falar
comer
abrir
falaria
falaria
falaria
falaramos
falariam
falariam
comeria
comeria
comeria
comeramos
comeriam
comeriam
abriria
abriria
abriria
abriramos
abririam
abririam
d. The imperfect indicative of haver, followed by de and the infinitive, forms a conditional
tense. The meaning may be simply the conditional or there may be also connotations of
of expectation, previous agreement, etc . , as with the similar construction of the future.
falar
dizer
havia de falar, etc. I would speak

havia de dizer, etc. I would say.
The simple conditional (falaria, etc.) is very little used in BF, except in those verbs which
have only one syllable before the ending. Even in these the imperfect is used more or less as
often as the conditional. The construction eu ia falar is used in practically the sarne way as
in English. Eu havia de falar is used quite frequently, but often carries connotations in
addition to the basic meaning of the conditional.
1 30.
Placing of personal pronoun objects with the future and conditional. Formerly the
pronoun objects were in many cases placed between the infinitive and the endings in the sim
pie future and conditional.
Falar-me-
Di-Io-ei.
Verse-iam.
1 18
He will speak to me.

I shall say it.
They would see each other
This construction is becoming rather unusual even in literary style. ln BF it is totally absent. ln
fact, it is practically unintelligible to Brazilians, if used in speech. The objects me, nos, lhe, lhes,
and se should always be placed before the future and conditional. A subj ect pronoun may be
used in order to avoid beginning the clause with an object pronoun.
Ele me falar.
Eles se veriam.
He will speak to me.

They would see each other.
The object pronoun may follow the infinitive in those constructions in which the infinitive is a
separate word. However, it is more usually placed between the forms of ir and the infinitive.
Eles haviam de ver-se.
Eles vo me dizer.
They would see each other.

They are going to teU me.
The other object pronouns -voc, o senhor. ele, etc. -are placed after ali verb forms, as if they
were nouns.
Eu disse que levaria voc . .
I said I would take you.
Vocabulary
Nouns
Nouns
a rede ll
o quarto
a cor ll
o trabalhador
o sotaque Isul
o garoto ll
o jogo ll
pI. jogos I l
net; network;
hammock
(bed) room
color
worker
(foreign) accent
boy
game
Adjectives
japons
forte ll
carioca (m. and f.)
ll
limpo
sujo
alegre ll
pobre ll
moreno
profissional
simptico
Japanese
strong
from Rio
clean
dirty
jolly, cheerful
poor
dark (complexion)
professional
nice, agreeable
o lixo
o escndalo
o bicho
o ar
trash
loud talk, quarrel
animai
air
Verbs
haver
mexer
escolher
caoar (de)
armar
conversar
procurar
cantar
custar
queimar
tocar
(se e above)
stir, mix
choose , pick, select
tease
set up
chat
look for; try to
sing
cost
bum
play (music); ring (bel!);
touch
Adverbs
primeiro
alis
first
besides; or rather
Preposition
apesar de
in spite of
1 19
Expressions
Armar uma rede.
Armar um escndalo.
Custa-me crer.
Alto, moreno e simptico.
Tocar piano.
To put up (hang) a hammock.

To raise a fuss.
It's hard for me to believe.
Ta11, dark, and handsome.
To play a (the) piano.
Leitura
Amanh irei casa de meus tios, que moram numa fazenda. Primeiro telefonarei para eles
para dizer a que horas chegarei l. Quando eu chegar, escolherei uma rede das vrias que eles
tm em casa, para armar num dos quartos da casa. Depois de conversar com os tios e primos,
sairei para procurar os lugares bonitos que eu lembro das outras visitas. Espero que tudo esteja
como era, porque eu gosto de ver os pssaros de cores brilhantes que cantam nas rvores da
fazenda.
H vrios trabalhadores que moram na fazenda. Um deles um japons que planta legumes.
Apesar dos muitos anos que mora no Brasil, ele ainda fala portugus com um forte sotaque.
Alis, meus tios sempre caoam do meu sotaque carioca, que diferente do jeito de falar deles.
Custa-me crer que h dez anos eu j ogava futebol aqui com os outros garotos. Saamos de casa
limpos e alegres e, depois do jogo, voltvamos para casa sujos e cansados. Geralmente perdamos,
porque os fIlhos dos trabalhadores so fortes e jogam muito bem. Havia um deles, um moreno,
que ficou conhecido nos jogos profissionais.
Exercise A. Study the following examples of constructions expressing the future and condi
tional and their equivalents:
1.
Mexerei a sopa para que no se queime.

1'11 stir the soup so it won't bum.
Vou mexer a sopa para que no se queime.
Hei de mexer a sopa para que no se queime.
Mexo a sopa para que no se queime.
2. Eles escolhero os lugares logo que chegarem. They will pick their places as soon as they
arrive.
Eles vo escolher os lugares logo que chegarem
Eles ho de escolher os lugares logo que
chegarem.
3.
Armaro uma rede em baixo de uma

rvore.
Vo armar uma rede, etc.
Ho de armar uma rede, etc.
They will put up a hammock under a tree.
(No clue to futurity would permit armam, unless the context of the conversation makes it
clear.)
4.
Ele achava que choveria de tarde.

Ele achava que havia de chover.
Ele achava que chovia.
Ele achava que ia chover.
He thought it would rain in the aftemoon.
5. Se eu estivesse no seu lugar, jogaria isso

no lixo.
eu jogava isso no lixo.
eu havia de jogar isso no lixo.
(ia jogar would mean "I would go and . . . )
"
1 20
If I were in your place, I'd throw that in the

trash.
6. Ela no faria isso nunca.

Ela no fazia isso nunca.
Ela no havia de fazer isso nunca.
She would never do that.
7. S queria era ver a cara dele.

(only imperfect used here).
I'd just like to see his face.
8. Se quisesse, eu teria uma rede.

Se quisesse, eu tinha uma rede.
(Havia de ter implies insistence.)
If I wanted to, I' d have a hammock.
9. Eu gostaria de viajar.
I'd like to traveI.
(ln this meaning, "I'd like," only the conditional is used with this verbo But the imperfect
is usual if the verb is querer. )
Exercise B. Idiomatic usages:
1 . A mulher armou um escndalo.
2. No mexe nas minhas coisas.
3. Pe acar no caf e mexe.
4. Por que est se mexendo na cadeira?
5 . Queimei um dedo no fogo.
6. Todo mundo caoa de mim.
7. Custa crer que voc sej a ruim.
8. Estou procurando meus sapatos.
9. Ele procura sempre estar limpo.
1 0. Mostra a mo!
1 1 . Antes de haver gente no mundo, havia
bichos.
1 2 . Muitos brasileiros gostam do jogo do
bicho.
l 3 . Tem bichos do ar, bichos da terra e
bichos do mar.
14. Tem at bichos to pequenos que no
se vem.
1 5 . Ele alto, moreno e simptico.
16. Em garoto, eu jogava pedras nos
pssaros.
1 7 . Vocs conhecem a cano "A Garota
de Ipanema"?
1 8 . Eu tenho dois, alis trs bons amigos.
1 9. Apesar de ser pobre, ele est sempre
alegre.
20. Voc tem um pouco de sotaque americano.
2 1 . Esta ma est bichada.
The woman raised a fuss.

Don't bother my things.
Put sugar in the coffee and stir it.
Why are you fidgeting in the chair?
I burned my finger in the fire.
Everybody teases me.
lt's hard to believe you are bad.
I'm looking for my shoes.
He always tries to be clean.
Show (stick out) your hand.
Before there were people in the world, there
were animaIs.
Many Brazilians like the animal lottery.
There are animaIs of the air, the land, and
the sea.
There are even creatures so small they can't
be seen.
He is taU, dark and handsome.
As a boy I threw stones at the birds.
Do you know the song "The Girl from Ipa
nema"?
I have two, or rather, three good friends.
ln spite of being poor, he is always cheerful.
You have a little bit of American accent.
This apple is wormy.
Exercise C. Change the underlined verb to an appropriate past tense and make any other neces
sary changes:
1 . Eu quero que voc ria.
2 . Mando que vocs venham da escola ao meio-dia.
3. Ele proibe que joguem futebol na rua.
4. Eladiz que trar o filho quando vier.
5. Eu peo que me dem uma hora para estudar.
121
6. Aconselhamos que sorriam mais quando falarem com ele.

7. Prefiro que me paguem logo.
8. Espero que nos divirtamos enquanto estivermos l.
9. Temo que voc caia dessa rvore.
1 0. Ele no fala muito, embora saiba muito para falar.
1 1 . Sin to que voc no escolha os melhores livros.
1 2 . Vamos procurar o colega antes que ele suma.
1 3 . Ele nos vende laranjas quando houver.
14. Arranjaremos um quarto para o senhor logo que pudermos.
1 5 . Ela canta aqui hoje, se chegar a tempo.
Exercise D. Give the future and imperfect subjunctives corresponding to the present subjunc
tives which fol1ow, in the sarne person and number:
Future Subjunctive
Imperfect Subjunctive
1 . Haja
2. Vocs mexam
3. Voc caoe
4. Ns queimemos
5. Eu arme
6. Eu desa
7. Ele jogue
8. Eles riam
9. Eu me divirta
1 0. Voc viva
1 1 . Ele caia
1 2. Eu sinta
13. Vocs leiam
1 4. Ele siga
1 5 . Ele traga
Exercise E. Pronounce the following, giving special care to the stressed vowels:
1 . Joga
2. O jogo
3. os jogos
4. Eles cortam
5. Ele desa
6. Eu comeo
7. Eles se divertem
8. Eu mexo
9 . Vocs escolham
1 0. Eles conversam
1 1 . Houvesse
1 2 . Que eu mostre
1 3 . Que ele caoe
14. Alegre
1 5 . Carioca
1 6. Forte
1 7 . Av
1 8. Espcie

1 . Tomorrow 1'11 speak to him.
2. There will be a lot of people at the party.
3. He is going to live on a little farm.
4. I'm afraid they'l1 laugh at my accent.
5. If I were you, I'd play soccer.
6. I hope you aren't going to bum your hand on that fire.
7. He raised a ruckus because he lost the game.
8. It would be very hard (= custar) to choose between the two.
1 22
19. A pedra
20. O leste
2 1 . O oeste
22. A costa
23. O pssego
24. A vitela
25. Os olhos
9. If you put up a hammock here, it will be very hot.

1 0. He is a native of Rio. (Say in two words.)
1 1 . She is very happy ; she met a tall, dark and handsome man.
1 2 . After searching for a long time, the boys found the paper in the trash.
1 3 . I will learn a lot, in spite of the professors.
1 4 . He will begin working there tomorrow.
1 S. They will enjoy themselves when they go to the beach.
1 6. I hope it won't be very cold tomorrow.
1 7 . When he was a boy he would play a lot.
1 8 . Would you do something for me?
1 9 . He believed I would explain this to him.
20. If I could, I would (do it).
2 1 . We wanted to see him before he saw uso
22. I thought you would light a fire.
23. When you get back, our Japanese friend will be living here.
24. We'll be fixing the cars when you get here.
25. He wiIl always be poor, but he is very happy.
Lesson XXVII
131 .
Verbs formed on the stern -duzir. This root does not exist in Portuguese as a verb, but
numerous compounds of it do existo They a11 have one irregular foem; the third person singular
of the present indicative has lost the final e. Ali other forms are regular.
He produces.
He reduces.
You induce.
Ele produz.
Ele reduz.
Voc induz.
Other verbs formed on this root are given in the vocabulary, below.
1 32.
The perfect tenses. The perfect tenses are formed by using the simple tenses of the
verb ter as auxiliaries of the past participle. The verb haver may be used theoretically, and it oc
curs in literary style, especially in the imperfect. But BF always uses ter. The participle is in
variable when used with ter or haver.
eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
Present Perfect lndicative
P/uperfect lndicative
Future Perfect
Indicative
tenho falado
tem falado
tem falado
temos falado
tm falado
tm falado
tinha falado
tinha falado
tinha falado
tnhamos falado
tinham falado
tinham falado
terei falado
ter falado
ter falado
teremos falado
tero falado
tero falado
Conditional Perfeet: teria falado, etc.
1 23
The preterit of ter is not used as an auxiliary.
Present Perfect subjunctive
Pluperfect Subjunctive
Fu ture Perfect
Subjunctive
eu
tenha falado
tivesse falado
tiver falado
voc
tenha falado
tivesse falado
tiver falado
ele
tenha falado
tivesse falado
tiver falado
ns
tenhamos falado
tivssemos falado
tivermos falado
vocs
tenham falado
tivessem falado
tiverem falado
eles
tenham falado
tivessem falado
tiverem falado
Perfect infinitive:
impersonal
ter falado
to have spoken
personal
(eu) ter falado
(for me) to have spoken,
(voc) ter falado
etc.
(ele) ter falado

(ns) termos falado
(vocs) terem falado
(eles) terem falado
Perfect active participle:

133.
tendo falado
English equivalents of the perfect tenses. Most of the perfect tenses correspond rather
closely to the tenses of the English verbo But one must distinguish in some cases.
a. The present perfect in English is usually expressed by the preterit in Portuguese.
Eu G) falei.
I have spoken.
The compound tense is used in Portuguese when the action or condition is either continuous
or continuai in the recent pasto It comes up to, but does not specifically include, the presento
There is no general equivalent in English, but often the best means of expressing the meaning
is the progressive form of the present perfect.
Como que voc tem estado
How have you been?
Que que ele tem feito?
What has he been doing'!
Tenho ido cidade com freqencia.
I have been going downtown frequently.
Temos viajado na Europa.
We have been (for some time) traveling in

Europe.
But note :
Eu j viajei na Europa vrias vezes.
I have traveled in Europe several times.
Ele mora nesta cidade h sete anos.
He has been living in this city for seven years.

(and still does.)
b. The pluperfect or past perfect is used as in English,

Eu j tinha acabado o trabalho.
I had already finished my work.
c. The future perfect tense has the sarne meaning as in English, but is used somewhat more,
and also more than the simple future indicative in Portuguese .
At segunda-feira terei acabado.
1 24
By Monday I will have finished.
d. The conditional perfect is used somewhat more than the simple conditional in Portuguese,
but is often replaced by the pluperfect indicative .
Se eu tivesse visto o Joo, teria falado
com ele. (tinha falado com ele.)
If I had seen John, I'd have spoken to him.
e. The three perfect tenses of the subjunctive in Portuguese are usually expressed in the
indicative in English. Since the future perfect is seldom used in English, the meaning is
usually expressed by the present perfect. But if futurity is implied, after certain conjunc
tions, the form must be the future perfect in Portuguese.
Espero que ele j tenha chegado.
Voc no deve sair antes que tenha
acabado de jantar.
Sentimos que ele tivesse perdido
a festa.
Vamos sair quando voc tiver acabado o
jantar.
Ele ir conosco assim que se tiver vestido.
I hope he has already arrived.

You shouldn't go out before you have
finished eating.
We were sorry he had missed the party.
We are going out when you have finished
eating.
He will go with us as soon as he has dressed.
Note that all three perfect tenses of the subjunctive are in current use in BF.
1 34.
Verb forms used after the conjunction se.
a. If the verbo following se expresses habitual action or state (the most usual meaning of the
simpie present indica tive), the present indicative is used in Portuguese. The present subjunc
tive is not used after se.
Se ele d com um amigo, sempre fica
conversando.
If he runs into a friend, he always stops to

talk.
b. ln the past, if the verb following se expresses an admitted fact or a possible fact, the indi
cative is used.
Se ele dava com um amigo, sempre
ficava conversando.
Se ele esteve em casa ontem, ningum
viu.
If he ran into a friend, he always stopped to

to talk.
If he was at home yesterday, nobody saw
him.
c. A contrary-to-fact supposition is expressed in the imperfect subjunctive .

Se desse tempo, eu iria.
Se ele fosse rico, gostaria de viajar.
If there were time, l'd go.

If he were rich, he' d like to traveI.
d. An assumption or supposition concerning possible future action may be expressed in the

imperfect subjunctive, following se. The main clause is in the conditional or imperfect indi
cative.
Seria (era) gozado se ele nos apanhasse aqui.
Se eu fosse Europa, visitava (visitaria)
Portugal.
It would be funny if he caught us here.

(were to catch, should catch)
If I were to go to Europe, l'd visit Portugal.
e. I f the verb following se refers to action or condition which will or may exist in inde
finite future time, the future subjunctive is used, if the main verb is in the present or
future.
Voc pode ir amanh, se quiser.
You may go tomorrow if you wish.

125
f. When se is followed by alternatives, one or the other of which is true (the meaning o f
"whether"), only the indicative i s used.
No sei se ele foi ou ficou.
Ainda no me disseram se ele vai ou no
vai.
I don't know whether he went or stayed.

They haven't told me yet whether he is
going or noto
Vocabulary
Nouns
o namorado
a namorada
o corao
o noivo
a noiva
os Estados Unidos
a mquina
a perna //
a dor //
a chave
Nouns
boy friend
girl friend
heart
fianc ; groom
fiance , bride
United States
machine
leg
pain ; grief
key
Adjectives
louro
lindo (superlative of
bonito)
firme
ltimo
blond
beautiful
firm, steady
last (of ali)
Adverb
ultimamente
lately
o curso
a encrenca
a arquitetura
a companhia
o contrato
course
difficulty ; "mess"
architecture
company
contract
Verbs
produzir
reduzir
conduzir
reproduzir
introduzir (em)
induzir (a)
pertencer (a)
apresentar
namorar
gastar pp. gasto
quebrar
faltar
sonhar (com)
agentar
formar
formar-se
produce
reduce
conduct, lead
reproduce
lead into, introduce
(into)
induce (to)
belong (to)
present (play); introduce (man)
"go with," "date"
spend (money)
break
be lacking
dream (about)
stand (pain) ; hold firm;
endure
form ; graduate
be graduated
Expressions
Ficaram noivos.
Em fins do ms
Ele se formou em filosofia.
Ela faltou aula.
Ela matou a aula.
Pelo menos
They got engaged.

About the end of the month
He graduated in liberal arts.
She missed class.
She cut class.
At least
Leitura
Meu amigo Waldemar tem uma namorada loura e linda. Quando se viram pela primeira vez,
ele lhe deu logo o corao. Como no conhecia a famtlia da moa nem pertencia ao grupo de
amigos da casa, pediu que eu fosse l com ele e apresentasse. Depois eu introduzi o Waldemar
na roda que os amigos da famtlia formavam.
1 26
Acho que Waldemar sonhou com a moa depois desse primeiro encontro. Pelo menos, sei que
os dois comearam a namorar. Dentro de poucos meses ficaram noivos. Dizem que vo casar logo
que ele acabar o curso na universidade e se formar. Deve formar-se em fins deste ano, se no
houver encrencas.
Waldemar estudante de arquitetura. Depois de formado vai trabalhar para uma companhia
de arquitetos que tem contratos em Mato Grosso. Os noivos vo morar em Cuiab, capital do
estado. uma cidade pequena, mas uma que deve crescer muito nos prximos anos. S que fica
muito longe dos grandes centros culturais do pas.
Exercise A. Verbs in -duzir. Give each sentence with the verb in the preterit tense:
1 . Estas terras produzem muito caf.
2. Por que voc no introduz a msica brasileira aqui?
3. Ele me induz a falar aos estudantes.
4. De tudo isso , deduzimos que ela sua namorada.
S . Meu dinheiro se reduz a muito pouco.
6. Eu conduzo este grupo pela escola.
7. Esta mquina reproduzir o que voc escreveu.
Exercise B. Uses of the perfect tenses of the indicative :
1 . O Joo tem contado esta histria em toda
parte.
2. Ele tem ganho e gasto bastante dinheiro.
3. Tem feito um tempo bonito ultimamente.
4. Voc tem visto o Luiz?
5 . Quantas horas voc tem dormido nestas
ltimas semanas?
6. Voc tem passeado no carro de seu pai?
7. Tenho sonhado com voc todas as noites.
8. Ele quebrou a perna e tem sentido muita
dor.
9. H quanto tempo voc est estudando?
1 0. Ns j nos encontramos muitas vezes.
1 1 . Quando procurei o Joo, ele j tinha
sado.
1 2. Terei entrado em casa antes da chuva cair.
1 3. Ele vai trabalhar no ano que vem, quando
j se ter formado.
1 4. Se tivssemos gasto o dinheiro, no
teramos podido comprar isto.
1 5 . Eu j teria feito essa viagem, se tivesse
tido tempo.
John has been telling that story everywhere.

He has been making and spending quite a bit
of money.
The weather has been pretty lately.
Have you seen Louis (lately)?
How many hours have you been sleeping
these last few weeks?
Have you been going driving in your father's
car?
I have dreamed about you every night.
He broke his leg and has been feeling a lot
of pain.
How long have you been studying?
We have already met many times.
When I looked for John, he had already gone
out.
I will have gone into the house before the
rain comes down.
He is going to work next year, when he will
have graduated. (definite future time.)
If we had spent the money, we couldn't have
bought this.
I would have taken that trip already, if I had
the time.
Exercise C. The perfect tenses of the subjunctive :

1 . Eu espero que no tenha faltado nada a voc. I hope you have lacked nothing.
We are sorry you have lost your book.
2. Sentimos que voc tenha perdido o livro.
He doesn't want to believe that I have earned
3. Ele no quer crer que eu tenha ganho
50 much.
tanto.
1 27
4. Era importante que voc tivesse recebido
It was important that you had received (should
a carta a tempo.
S. Eu no achava que ele tivesse aprendido

portugus.
6. Era possvel que eles tivessem visto voc.
7. Fiquei com pena que Maria tivesse quebrado
have received) the letter on time.

I didn't think he had learned Portuguese.
It was possible they had seen you.
I was sorry Mary had broken the peno
a caneta.
8. Quando voc tiver jantado, vamos sair.
When you have eaten, let's go out.
9. Irei a sua casa depois que tiver entregue
I'll go to your house after I have delivered

this bundle.
este embrulho.
1 0 . Leva esta chave, caso tiverem fechado
Take this key in case they have locked the

door.
a porta.
Exercise D. Ifclauses and conditional sentences:
1 . Se voc est com fome, come isto.
If you're hungry, eat this.
2. Se eu deito tarde, fico com sono no dia
If I go to bed late, I'm sleepy the next day.
seguinte.
3. Eles podem se casar, se quiserem.
They can marry if they wish.
4. Se voc no agentar firme na escada, cai.
If you don't hold on to the ladder, you'll
5 . Se voc pertencesse turma, podia entrar.
If you belonged to the gang, you could come
6. Se nevasse nesta terra, tudo era diferente.
I f it snowed in this country , everything would
7. E se fssemos assar esta carne?
What if we were to roast this meat?
8. Se eu arranjasse um caf, voc tomava?
If I got some coffee, would you drink it?
9. Ns morvamos l se pudssemos.
We'd live there if we could.
falL
in.
be different.
1 0. At amanh terei recebido a carta dele,
I'll have gotten his letter by tomorrow, if he

sent it to me .
se me mandou.
1 1 . Se Joo falou sobre isto, eu no ouvi.
If John spoke about this, I didn't hear him.
1 2 . Se eu respondesse assim, meu pai no
If I answered like that, my father wouldn't

like it.
gostava.
1 3 . Se tivssemos sabido disso, no teramos
If we had known about that, we wouldn't

have spoken.
falado.
1 4. Se fossem pedir uma coisa dessas, ningum
If they were to ask for one of those things,

nobody would give it.
dava.
1 5 . Se o cinema j tiver comeado, vamos
If the movie has already begun, let's wait.
esperar.
1 6. No pode sair enquanto fizer frio.
Vou can't go out while it's cold.
1 . He induced me to reduce the cost (custo).

2. I want to introduce this music into the United States.
3. It is necessary for this farm to produce more.
4. He conducted me to the living room and introduced me to his mother.
5 . I have reproduced the photograph you gave me.

6. Reduce the number of pages we are to study.
7. I have been rnissing class during the past week.
8. This school has graduated many doctors.
9. Have you already spent your money?

1 0. Those two have been going together, and now they are going to get engaged.
1 28
1 1 . He has a steady (firme) girl friend.

1 2. What have you been doing lately?
'
1 3 . He had broken his leg and had to endure the pain.
14. The last time (that) we saw him, he had produced a new book.
1 5 . 1'11 have finished it before you can say two words.
1 6 . If he belongs to that family, he is your cousin.
1 7. If he graduates next year, he is going to get married.
1 8. The bride and groom are going to live here, if they can buy the house.
1 9 . If I had this contract, I'd begin work next month.
20. If you were to miss class, l' d have the lesson reproduced for you.
2 1 . What did you gradua te in?
22. Who(m) do you work for?
23. This job is hard, but we have to stand it.
24. I hope there won't be [any] difficultieswith this company.
25. I don't believe he has learned [very]much.
Lesson XXVIII
135.
Forms of verbs in -ear. Verbs whose infinitive ends in -ear add an i following stressed
e. The affected forms of passear are
Present Indicative
eu
voc
ele
ns
vocs
eles
passeio
passeia
passeia
passeamos /si/
passeiam
passeiam
Present Subjunctive
passeie / yij
passeie
passeie
passeemos jsij
passeiem
passeiem
The verb odiar is conjugated similarly.

Indicative : odeio, odeia, odiamos, odeiam.
Subjunctive : odeie, odiemos, odeiem.
AlI verbs in -ear, but only a few others in -iar are conjugated in this way. Only the present indic
ative and subjunctive and the imperative are affected.
136.
Verbs in -uir and -oer. Verbs whose infinitives end in these spellings (except those like
seguir, in which the u does not represent a sound) have an orthographic irregularity in the third
person singular of the indicative. The vowel of the ending is written -i, to indicate that it forms
a diphthong with the preceding vowel.

instruir: ele instrui
doer: isso di
Note that construir and destruir are radical changing and therefore have the forms constri and
destri respectively :
1 29
1 37.
Position of object pronouns with verbs in the perfect tenses. The object pronouns
are placed with respect to the auxiliary ter in the perfect tenses. They are not connected with a
hyphen when they foIlow ter. ln BF there is also a strong tendency to place the object between
the two parts, even when a negative or conjunction precedes.
Tm me dito.
They have told me .
He had not given to him.
No lhe tinha dado.
1 38.
The relative pronouns.
a. Que is the most frequently used relative pronoun. It may refer to persons or things, singu
lar or plural, and may be subject or object.
b. Quem as a relative pronoun is most often used to include tts antecedent. It may be trans
lated "he who," "anyone who," "the one who." ln this usage it is always singular.
Quem pergunta aprende.
Ele anda como quem tivesse se perdido.
Quem pedir receber.
Quem deve ganhar sou eu.
He who asks learns.

He walks like someone who got lost.
He who (whoever) asks will get.
I'm the one who should win.
Quem is also used as a simple relative pronoun when it is the object of a preposition, always
referring to a person or persons. This usage is generally avoided in BF. ln some cases, the
idea is expressed in a different formo Frequently the preposition is omitted and que is used.
This construction is not approved by normative grammar, but is very frequent in BF. Quem
used in this way may be either singular or plural, but without change ofform.
Aquele o senhor com quem eu jantei.
uma pessoa que eu gosto. (Literary: de
quem)
Aqui vem o homem que eu dei o dinheiro.
(Literary: a quem)
That is the gentleman with whom I ate din

ner.
He's a person l like.
Here comes the man I gave the money to.
c. O que (a que, os que, as que) is properIy a combination of a demonstrative pronoun, o (the

one, that), with the relative que. The singular is sometimes equivalent to quem, but generaIly
refers to a more specific person or thing. The form o que is aIso used as a neuter, equal to the
English relative what.
Aqui est seu carro, mas no estou vendo
o que deixei aqui.
Os que vo embora pensam voltar.
Quero ver o que voc tem.
Here's your car, but I don't see the one I

left here.
Those who go away intend to return.
I want to see what you have.
d. O qual (a qual, os quais, as quais) is practically liIlted to literary usage, often after preposi
tions, sometimes for clarity when the antecedent is not the last noun mentioned.
H uma casa velha l, em frente da qual
se acha um chafariz.
Encontrei com a me de Joo, a qual
tem estado doente.
130
There is an old house there , in front of which

there is a fountain.
I met John's mother, who has been ill .
1 39.
The subjunctive in relative clauses. The su bjunctive is used in relative clauses whenever
the antecedent of the relative pronoun is not a known, predetermined person or thing, but any
one which may fit the conditions stated in the sentence. It is also used if the antecedent is
negative or otherwise shown to be nonexistent.
I wouldn't like a man who did (might do,
Eu no gostaria de um homem que
would do) such a thing.
fizesse tal coisa.

Quero arranjar um carro que no me
I want to get a car that won't give me trouble.
d encrencas.
No tem ningum que possa fazer isso.
There isn't anyone who can do that.
If the relative pronoun may refer to any or all of the individuaIs named by the antecedent, and
the action refers to the future, the future subjunctive is used. Otherwise, one uses the presento
The future is more or less equivalent to the meaning expressed in English by whoever, which
ever, whatever, etc.

Quem quiser comer ter que trabalhar.
Whoever wants to eat will have to work.
O homem que tiver este nmero ganha
The man (whoever) who has this number
o prmio.
wins the prize.
A moa que casar com ele ter sorte.
The girl that marries him will be lucky.
ln any of these sentences, if a past tense is used in the main clause, the present or future sub
junctive will be replaced by the imperfect.
He said that anyone who wanted to eat would
Ele disse que quem quisesse comer
have to work.
teria que trabalhar.

Vocabulary
Nouns
Nouns
a criana
o prmio
child
a piscina
swimming pool
prize
a ceia
supper
o chafariz
fountain
a bicicleta I l
bicycle
o restaurante I tl
restaurant
a toalha
towel
Verbs
a toalha de mesa
tablecloth
a areia
sand
a praia
beach
odiar
hate
o castelo ll
castle
pentear
comb
o fato
fact
nadar
swim
a peteca ll
a game (with a bird
parar (ele pra)
stop
struck with the
espalhar
spread, scatter
hand)
dirigir
direct; drive (car)
dirigir -se a
go to
Adjectives
tal pi. tais
such (a)
apinhado (de)
crowded (with)
antigo
ancient ; forme r
Adverb
l de cima
passear
drive, ride, walk, etc.

for pleasure
Prepositions
feito '
segund02
com0 3
like
according to
like
from above
131
Expressions
Passear de carro.
Go driving.
Passear a p.
Go walking
Passear de bicicleta.
Take a bike ride.
Passear a cavalo.
Go horseback riding.
Eu gostaria que (gostava not used)
I'd like for . . .
Eu queria que (quereria Uttle
I'd like for . . .
used)
De fato.
ln fact.
Um antigo patro meu.
A former boss of mine.
Uma cidade antiga.
An ancient city.
Feito (um) gato.
Like a cat.
Como um gato.
Like a cato
Notes on prepositions:
1
Feito
is in origin a past participle and should agree . But it is used in BF
as
a preposition,
without agreement. It is folIowed by the subject forms.

2
Segundo may only
be foUowed by
subject
forms which may accompany a verb in the third
person.
3
Como
is a conjunction. lt is used like the English preposition like, but is folIowed by the
subject form of a pronoun.

Leitura
Amanh vamos dar um passeio na praia. Eu gostaria de passear de bicicleta, porque podamos
parar onde quisssemos. Vou vestir o calo de banho para ver se achamos um bom lugar para nadar.
Eu gosto de nadar numa piscina, mas prefiro a praia. Se encontrarmos amigos, pode ser que
fiquemos at de noite.
Voc acha bom jantarmos perto da praia? Um pouco para c da avenida que se estende ao
longo do mar h um bom restaurante. Fica em frente daquele chafariz na praa. Segundo o
Pedrinho, a comida boa l. Espero que tenhamos sorte.
Durante a parte da manh tem muitas crianas na praia. De fato , as praias do Rio ficam
apinhadas de gente.
at
difcil s vezes encontrar um lugar para cair na gua. A gente estende
toalhas na areia e deita para tomar o sol. As crianas constroem castelos e cidades na areia,
correm pela praia, ou jogam peteca. s vezes at difcil atravessar a praia para chegar at a
gua.
Exercise A. Examples of usage :
1 . Os cariocas passeiam no parque.
2.
Vamos passear a p ao longo da praia.
3. Eu penteio o cabelo antes de sair.
4.
Ele odeia as cobras.
5 . Por que voc no nada feito eu?
6.
O nibus pra aqui.
The cariocas stroU in the park.

Let's waIk along the beach.
I comb my hair before I go out.
He hates snakes.
Why don't you swim like me?
The bus stops here.
7. No tivemos a sorte de ganhar o prmio.
We weren't lucky enough to get the prize.
8.
Lie down on the sand as the others (do).
Deita na areia como os outros.
9. Segundo voc, esse deve ser um bom

restaurante.
According to (what) you (say), that must be

a good restaurant.
10. Ela viu um homem alto e louro, como eu.
She saw a taU blond man, like me.
1 1 . Voc sabe dirigir?
Do you know how to drive?
12.
I'd like for you to help me.
1 32
Eu gostaria que voc me ajudasse.
Exercise B. Relative pronouns:

Quais so os homens que voc viu?
Foi alguma coisa que caiu l de cima.
Eram fatos que tnhamos esquecido.
Quem vai fazer isso sou eu.
Ele olha para fora como quem quer sair.
Estou numa encrenca sem quem me ajude.
7. Quem partiu foi o Joo.
8. Encontrei o Carvalho, por causa de quem (BF= e por causa dele) estou chegando tarde.
9. Os que nunca estudam nunca aprendem muito.
10. Fui apanhado pela chva, o que me fez esperar.
1 1 . No sei o que ele tem na mo.
1 2. Ele casou com a irm de Pedro, a que estudou nos Estados Unidos.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Exercise C. Fill each blank with an appropriate relative pronoun:

1 . Conheci um homem baixo
no sabia ingls.
2. Joo assou uma galinha
ficou deliciosa.
3. A moa com
fui ao cinema mora em Ipanema.
4. O meu antigo patro para
trabalhei deixou a cidade.
passeou de carro foi Davi.
5.
quiser nadar pode.
6.
Exercise D. Express the following sentences in such a way as to avoid the use of literary relative
pronouns:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1 0.
uma encrenca difcil, apesar da qual temos que continuar.

Voc est vendo aquela serra, atrs da qual fica a cidade?
O homem com quem encontrei hoje meu primo.
Qual a pessoa em quem voc est pensando?
Voc conhece a moa para quem estou olhando?
Tivemos um bom jantar, depois do que fomos para casa.
Vi vrios amigos na livraria, entre os quais o Jorge.
O meu professor de primeiro ano, de quem no me lembro mais, foi morar noutra cidade.
A pessoa de quem recebi esta carta est na Europa.
Esta a escola qual eu vou.
Exercise E. Fill each blank with the correct form of the verb in parentheses:
1 . (saber) No h ningum que no
isto.
dirigir este carro?
2. (poder) H algum que
3. (assar) Estou procurando a Maria, que
a carne bem.
4. (comer) Nunca vi um rapaz que
tanto.
com voc.
5. (parecer) L conheci uma moa que
6. (querer) Todo o homem que
jantar deve escrever o nome aqui.
7. (nadar) Quem
nesta piscina tem que usar calo.
8. (ouvir) Ele falou to baixo que no houve quem
de l.
9. (cair) Quebrou-se o copo que
1 0 . (vir) Ele estava preparado para o que
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

1 . He hates (the) dogs.
2. Comb your hair and put on your shoes.
3. The pool is [over] beyond the hill.
133
4. The square in front of the fountain was crowded with people.

5 . He climbs like a cato
6. They scattered bread on the ground.
7. He drives like a professional .

8. We ate lunch on the sand of the beach.
9. Do you take a towel when you go bathing?
1 0. I don't have any luck today.
11.
I have never seen such children.
1 2. He is a former colleague of mine.

1 . This is the uncle I told you about.
2. What you need is a new maid.
3 . 1 wonder what he took with him.

4. Whoever does a thing like that will be caught.
5. You are the one that has to do the work.
6.
Ii you are caught in the rain, call at the door you are in front of.
7. We went bicycle riding with the fellow you have heard about.
8. I will do whatever you say.
9. He wants to buy a house that has large windows.
1 0. I'm looking for a restaurant that has (= gives) scrambled eggs for breakfast.
1 1 . There is not a room in this hotel that doesn't have two windows.
1 2. I want a shoemaker that can fix my shoes.
l 3 . I don't want a milkman that comes early.

1 4 . According to John, the boys are to wear bathing trunks.
1 5 . Even John swims like a fish C= peixe).
Lesson XXIX
1 40.
The subjunctive with rela tive adverbs. Each of the rela tive adverbs como, quando, onde,
quanto is given an indefinite meaning referring to any manner, time, place or quantity, when
the subjunctive follows. The subjunctive is nearly always future Cor imperfect). ln some instances
in which the reference is to one situation which will fulfill stated conditions, the present is used.
141.
Voc far isso como quiser.
Vou will do that as you wish.
Vem a minha casa quando puder.
Come to my house when Cever) you cano
Compraremos balas onde acharmos.
We'lI buy candy wherever we fmd it.
O sr. pode cantar quanto quiser.
Vou may sing ali you wish.
Quero um hotel onde possa ir 'praia.
I want a hotel where I can go to the beach.
The subjunctive with talvez and similar words. Any verb modified by talvez or synony
mous words or expressions which precede it, is in the subjunctive. If such words follow, the
verb is in the indica tive. The future subjunctive is not used.
1 34
Talvez o Joo jante conosco.
Perhaps John will have dinner with uS.
Qui queira assistir reunio.
Perhaps he wants to attend the meeting.
Pode ser que chova amanh.
Maybe it'll rain tomorrow.
Joo est em casa, talvez.
JoHn is at home, perhaps.
Subjunctive in indirect commands, suggestions to third persons, etc. The subjunctive

is used when one suggests or orders that a third-person subject perform an act. The English
equivalent is Iet.
142.
If he wants to go away, let him caIl a cabo
Se ele quiser ir embora, que chame

um taxi.
Se os meninos esto com fome , que
venham comer.
If the boys are hungry, let them come to eat.
1 43 .
Such expressions as "Let it be as it may." ln these expressions the present subjunctive
is used in the first part, foIlowed by the future . Both forms are put in the imperfect to express
past time.
Let that be as it may, I don't like the situa

tion.
Let anybody (who will) call, I won't answer.
Seja como for, no gosto da situao.

Chame quem chamar, no atendo.
Corra quanto correr, no vai pegar o
cachorro.
Fosse como fosse.
Let him run as much as he will, he won't

catch the dog.
Let that be as it might.
1 44 .
Diminutives and augrnentatives. BF uses very many diminutives and quite a lot of
augmentatives. Many of these must be learned with care, since the connotations, the choice of
suffix in each case, and the form of the suffix may vary.
The most frequently used of the suffixes fonning a diminutive is -(z) inho. It is applied freely
to almost any noun or adjective, and some times to other words. A final unaccented vowel is
dropped before -inho. The form -linho is added to the entire word in the following cases:
a. After words ending in a diphthong, oral ar nasal.
me
mother
mezinha
boi
ox
boizinho
little mother, de ar
mother
little ox.
sister
spade
irmzinha
pazinha
little sister
little spade
animal
animalzinho
little animal
b. After a final accented vowel, oral ar nasal.

irm
p
C.
After final -I.

animal
d. After final -r. ln the pronunciation of most Brazilians, the final -r is silent, leaving a final
stressed vowel.
dor
little pain
pain
dorzinha
little pair
par
pair
parzinho
But: devagar
devagarinho or devagarzinho
The pluraIs of diminutives are forme d from the plurals of the nouns and adjectives, and have ali
the changes found in those plurals.
co
lio
cezinhos
liezinhas
animal
pires
animaizinhos
pirezinhos
135
All diminutives which are formed freely on the base words and which are felt as diminutives
also retain the quality of the vowel which was stressed in the base word, even though certain
vowels are not normally heard in unstressed syllables.
copo //
p
glass
foot
copinho //
pezinho //
li ttle glass
little foot
The most frequently used augmentative suffix is -o, sometimes preceded by any one of sev
eral syllables to give it reinforced vigor. The feminine form is -ana, but many feminine nouns
that do not denote persons take masculine augmentative endings.
a mesa
grande
table
large
a casa
carro
bonito
house
car
pretty
o meso
grandalho,
f. grandalhona
o casaro
carro
bonito, bonitona
large table
huge
mansion
big car
very handsome
Vocabulary
Nouns
as balas
a reunio
o txi /ks/
a situao
o boi
a p
a dor //
o par
o Carnaval
o desfile
a sede //
a fantasia
o passo
povo // pI. //
scio
a dana
Nouns
candy
meeting
taxi
situation
ox
spa de
pain
pair; partner
(dancing)
Carnival
parade
seat, base
costume
step
people
member
dance
Adverbs
talvez //
qui (literary)
perhaps
perhaps
Adjective
popular
oficial
popular, of the
people
official
a Quaresma //
a Pscoa
o compositor
o samba
a marcha
a cano
a organizao
o, a habitante
a atividade
Lent
Easter
composer
samba
march (music)
song
organization
inhabitant
activity
Verbs
reunir-se
atender
preceder
compor
lanar
aceitar
p.p. aceito, aceitado
promover
desfIlar
danar
planejar
assistir a
concorrer
meet, gather
take care of, answer
precede
compose
launch, throw
accept
promote
parade
dance
plan
be present at, attend
(once)
compete
Expressions
Pode ser que ele venha.
Ele atende os fregueses.
1 36
Maybe he'll come.

He takes care of customers.
Leitura
Para o carioca o grande feriado e a grande festa do ano o Carnaval. O povo se prepara
durante meses para os trs dias oficiais (precedidos de vrios dias no oficiais) desta festa tradicional.
Vem logo antes da Quaresma uns quarenta dias antes da Pascoa. Nos morros o povo compe
sambas e marchas que tenta lanar para ver se so aceitos pelo pblico como as canes mais popu
lares do Carnaval.
Em vrios morros do Rio existem "Escolas de Samba," que so organizaes dos habitantes
do morro para promover as atividades do desfile de Carnaval. Cada escola tem uma sede onde os
scios se renem para preparar-se para desfilar, cantando e danando, durante os dias oficiais.
Planej am e fazem as fantasias que vo usar. Tocam as msicas que preferem, practicam os passos
das danas e se preparam para concorrer aos prmios dos desfIles.
Exercise A. Fill each blank with a correct form of the verb in pare"+heses:
1 . (existir) No creio que tal coisa
_
_
_
_
2. (promover) Vo escolher o homem que o patro

3 . (lanar) No h ningum que
4. (aceitar) Talvez voc
_
_
_
_
este livro.
este presente.
S. (ir) Eu sigo voc a toda parte onde
_
_
_
_
a classe.
6. (compor) Estas pessoas talvez
7. (desfilar) Esteja na praa amanh quando a escola de samba

8. (vir) Tira a gua da e
9. (ser) Seja como
_
_
_
_
uma cerveja.
, perdemos o nosso tempo.
1 0. (reunir-se) Vou falar com ele sobre isto quando ns
_
_
_
_
Exercise B. Say in Portuguese, using the subj unctive or the infinitive, or both when possible :
1 . George told them to dance.
6. We sucked oranges until we lost our thirst.
2. It was impossible for us to stay in town.

3. I don't think 1'11 go to the movies tonight.
7 . I wish I had a piece of sugar cane.
4. He ordered us to parade in front of him.
9. Read you lesson in [such a] way [as] to learn it.
S . He sat down so that he could rest.
8. !.et's not leave before the game ends.

1 0. They will come after they eat breakfast.
Exercise C. Say in Portuguese :

1 . He has been living here six months.
2. I have never seen you ti11 now.
3. They have paid what they owed.
4. It has been very cold these last [few] weeks.
S. Vou should have this dress washed.
6. He wi11 have to help me.
7. We will tell you about him when we get back, if we have seen him.
8. If I had done that, I would have told you.
9. I can't talk to him unless he will see me.
1 0. If you were to call him, you might be able to see him.
1 1 . Maybe he will stay at home tomorrow.
1 2. He doesn't like horses, although he lives on a farm.
1 3 . I would have introduced him if I had remembered his name.
14. Every time we have seen John lately, he has been watching TV.
1 5. Had I known that I wouldn't have gone.
137

1 . There is not a man here who can do it.
2. Do you have a friend who speaks Portuguese?
3. The one who opens the doar will be surprised.
4. That river fills [up] when it rains.
5. Anyone who wishes [to] may go.
6. We will find the dog wherever it may be.
7. Whoever intends to go with us had better get ready.
8. What you will see is a little house.
9. To whom did you give the hammock?
1 0. Here's the fellow I lent the bicycle to.
Exercise E. Give a diminutive form of each of the following words :
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Cadeira
Homem
Ingls
Manh
Caf
6. Flor
7. Carro
8. Ruim
9. Bom
1 0. Boa (boazinha)
1 1 . Preto
1 2. Baixo
13. Velho
14. Nova
1 5. Papel
Exercise F. Give an augmentative form of each of the following words:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Sapato
Festa
Tempo
Sala
5. Dinheiro
6. P
7. Escada
8. Gorda
9. Solteira
1 0. Casa
Exercise G. Read each word aloud and give the corresponding thirdperson form:
1 . Construo
2. Devo
3. Visto
4. Peo
5 . Morro
6. Pego
7. Perco
8. Introduzo
9. Passeio
1 0. Durmo
1 38
1 1 . Subo
12. Encho
1 3 . Vo
14. Chego
1 5 . Ouo
1 6. Valho
17. Sumo
1 8. Mexo
19 . Fecho
20. Despeo
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Caio
Hei
Caibo
Instruo
Cubro
Trago
Digo
Fao
Sigo
Sei
Appendix
1 4S. Conjugation of regular verbs. The following verbs are given in the traditional six forms
in each tense, including the old second person forms used with tu and vs.
Impersonal infinitive.
falar
comer
abrir
Personal infinitive
eu
tu
ele
ns
vs
eles
falar
falares
falar
falarmos
falardes
falarem
comer
comeres
comer
comermos
comerdes
comerem
abrir
abrires
abrir
abrirmos
abrirdes
abrirem
Presen t participle
falando
comendo
abrindo
comido
aberto (irregular)
Past participle
falado
Present indicative
eu
tu
ele
ns
vs
eles
falo
falas
fala
falamos
falais
falam
como
comes
come
comemos
comeis
comem
abro
abres
abre
abrimos
abris
abrem
falei
falaste
falou
falamos
falastes
falaram
comi
comeste
comeu
comemos
comestes
comeram
abri
abriste
abriu
abrimos
abristes
abriram
falava
falavas
falava
falvamos
falveis
falavam
comia
comias
comia
comams
comeis
comiam
abria
abrias
abria
abramos
abeis
abriam
Preterit indicative
eu
tu
ele
ns
vs
eles
Imperfect indica tive
eu
tu
ele
ns
vs
eles
139
Future indica tive

eu
tu
ele
ns
vs
eles
falarei
falars
falar
falaremos
falareis
falaro
comerei
comers
comer
comeremos
comereis
comero
abrirei
abrirs
abrir
abriremos
abrireis
abriro
falaria
falarias
falaria
falaramos
falareis
falariam
comeria
comerias
comeria
comeramos
comereis
comeriam
abriria
abririas
abriria
abriramos
abrireis
abririam
falara
falaras
falara
falramos
falreis
falaram
comera
comeras
comera
comramos
comreis
comeram
abrira
abriras
abrira
abrramos
abrreis
abriram
Conditional
eu
tu
ele
nos
vs
eles
Simple pluperfect
eu
tu
ele
ns
vs
eles
Imperative mood
fala (tu)
falai (vs)
come (tu)
comei (vs)
abre (tu)
abri (vs)
Present subjunctive
que eu
que tu
que ele
que ns
que vs
que eles
fale
fales
fale
falemos
faleis
falem
coma
comas
coma
comamos
comais
comam
abra
abras
abra
abramos
abrais
abram
falasse
falasses
falasse
falssemos
falsseis
falassem
comesse
comesses
comesse
comssemos
comsseis
comessem
abrisse
abrisses
abrisse
abrssemos
abrsseis
abrissem
falar
falares
falar
falarmos
falardes
falarem
comer
comeres
comer
comermos
comerdes
comerem
abrir
abrires
abrir
abrirmos
abrirdes
abrirem
Imperfect subjunctive
eu
tu
ele
ns
vs
eles
Future subjunctive
eu
tu
ele
ns
vs
eles
140
Forms of the auxiliary ter, used in the perfect tenses. The preterit indicative is not
used as an auxiliary.
146.
Impersonal infinitive
Personal infinitive
ter
(eu) ter
(tu) teres
(ele) ter
Present indicative
Imperfect indica tive
tenho
tens
tem
temos
tendes
tm
Future indicative
terei
ters
ter
tnhamos
tnheis
tinham
Conditional
teremos
tereis
tero
Present subjunctive
teria
terias
teria
teramos
tereis
teriam
tenhamos
tenhais
tenham
tenha
tenhas
tenha
tinha
tinhas
tinha
(ns) termos
(vs) terdes
(eles) terem
tivesse
tivesses
tivesse
tivssemos
tivsseis
tivessem
Future subjunctive
tiver
tiveres
tiver
147.
tivermos
tiverdes
tiverem
Forms of haver used as auxiliaries of perfect tenses in literary writing.
Impersonal infinitive
Personal infinitive
haver
haver
haveres
haver
Imperfect indicative
havia
havias
havia
havamos
haveis
haviam
houvesse
houvesses
houvesse
havermos
haverdes
haverem
houvssemos
houvsseis
houvessem
Radical-changing verbs.
First conjugation, vowel e: levar
148.
Present indicative
levo //
levas //
leva //
Presen t subjunctive
levamos
levais
levam //
leve //
leves //
leve //
levemos
leveis
levem //
Imperative singular: leva //
141
Verbs whlch do not change :

a. Verbs in whlch e is followed by m or n. E.g., remar, sentar.
b . Verbs in -ejar except. invejar. E.g., desejar.
c. Aconselhar, chegar.
d. Fechar varies with the region.
e. Verbs in ear. See 1 49, below.
First conjugation, vowel o: notar
Present indicative.
noto jj
notas jj
nota //
Present subjunctive
notamos
notais
notam /j
note //
notes /j
note jj
notemos
noteis
notem //
Imperative singular: nota j/

Verbs which do not change :
a. Verbs in whlch o is followed by m or n. E.g., tomar, contar.
b. Verbs in -oar. E.g., voar.
Second conjugation, voel e: dever
Present subjunctive
Presem indicative
devo /j
deves jj
deve j/
devemos
deveis
devem jj
deva lj
devas jj
deva jj
devamos
devais
devam j/
lmperative singular: deve jj

Verbs in whlch e is followed by m or n do not change . E.g., temer,
Second conjugation, vowel o: mover
Present indicative
movo jj
moves jf
move jj
Present subjunctive
movemos
moveis
movem jj
mova jj
movas jj
mova jj
movamos
movais
movam //
Imperative singular: move ll

Verbs in whlch o is followed by m or n do not change. E.g., comer.
Thlrd conjugation, vowel e: vestir
Presdent indica tive

visto
vestes jj
veste fj
Present subjunctive
vestimos jvij
vestis jvi/
vestem //
vista
vistas
vista
vistamos
vistais
vistam
Note: Verbs in which e fs followed by m or n change only the first person singular. E.g., sentir.
All present subjunctives change.
Not all verbs of the third conjugation with the vowel e have thls change; some have others.
Thlrd conjugation, vowel o: engolir lul
1 42
Presen t subjunctive
Present indica tive

engulo
engoles l l
engole l l
engolimos lul
engolis lul
engolem ll
engula
engulas
engula
engulamos
engulais
engulam
Imperative singular: engole ll

Note: Verbs in which o is followed by m or n change only the first person singular of the pre
sent indicative and a11 the present subjunctive.
Third conjugation, vowel u : subir
Present subjunctive
Present indicative
eu subo
tu sobes l l
ele sobe ll
ns subimos
vs subis
eles sobem l l
suba
subas
suba
subamos
subais
subam
Note : Verbs in which u is fo11owed by m or n change this vowel to o in the three forms of the
indicative, but it is closed / /. E.g., sumir.
1 49 .
Special types o f verbs.
Verbs in -ear. passear
Present indicative
passear
eu
tu
ele
ns
vs
eles
passeio
passeias
passeia
Present subjunctive
passeamos
passeais
passeiam
passeie
passeies
passeie
passeemos
passeeis
passeiem
Note: The verb odiar similarly changes i to ei in the stressed forms.

Verbs in -uir and -oer. instruir, roer
Present indica tive

eu
tu
ele
instruo
instruis
instrui
Present indicative
ns
vs
eles
instruimos
instrus
instruem
ro
ris
ri
roemos
roeis
roem l l
Note : A11 verb forms in the indica tive in which the personal ending -e would follow a stressed
vowel change this ending to -i, to indicate the fact that the two vowels form a diphthong:
Verbs in -iar and -uar. principiar, continuar.
Present indicative
eu
tu
ele
principio
principias
principia
Present indicative
ns
vs
eles
principiamos
principiais
principiam
continuo
continuas
continua
continuamos
continuais
continuam
Note : Verbs in -iar (except odiar, see above), and verbs in -uar, are stressed on the next-to-Iast
vowel regularly.
Verbs in -air. These verbs, of which there are about fifteen, have certain irregularities in com
mon. cair
1 43
Present indicative
eu
tu
ele
caio
cais
cai
Preterit indicative
ns
vs
eles
camos
cas
caem
eu
tu
ele
ca
caste
caiu
ns
vs
eles
camos
castes
caram
Present subjunctive: caia, etc.

Imperfect indica tive: caa, etc.
Pluperfect indicative: cara, etc.
Imperfect subjunctive: casse, etc.
Future subjunctive and personal infinitive: cair, cares, cair, cairmos, cardes, carem.
Imperative: cai, ca.
1 50.
Irregular verbs. The conjugation of most irregular verbs can be easily derive d from four
forms: the infinitive, which gives those forms that are regular; the first person singular present
indicative, which gives the present subjunctive ; the third person plural preterit, which gives
the imperfect and future subjunctive and the smple pluperfect; and the past participle, which
gives alI the compound perfect tenses. All forms which cannot be derived from these are given
in full.
151.
Caber
caibo
couberam //
cabido
creio
creram //
crido
Preterit
coube
coubeste /kubsti/
coube
coubemos /ku/
coubestes /kubstis/
couberam /kubr/
1 52.
Crer
Imperative
Present indica tive

creio
crs
cr
1 53.
Dar
cremos
credes //
crem
cr (tu)
crede (vs)
dou
deram //
Present indicative
dou
ds
d
Preterit
damos
dais
do
Present subjunctive
d
ds
d
144
dado
demos
deis
dem
dei
deste //
deu
demos
destes //
deram //
1 54.
Dizer
digo
dizemos
dizeis
dizem
disse
disseste / /
disse
dissemos
dissestes //
disseram //
Condilional
Future indica tive
direi
dirs
dir
dito
Preterit
Presen t indica tive
digo
dizes
diz
disseram //
diremos
direis
diro
diria
dirias
diria
diramos
direis
diriam
estou
estiveram //
estado
Imperative
diz (tu)
dizei (vs)
1 55 .
Estar
Present indicative
Preterit
estamos
estais
esto
estou
ests
est
Present subjunctive
esteja //
estejas //
esteja //
1 56 .
Fazer
estejamos
estejais
estejam //
est (tu)
estai (vs)
fao
fizeram //
feito
Preteri!
fazemos
fazeis
fazem
Future indica tive
farei
fars
far
estivemos
estivestes //
estiveram //
Impera tive
Present indicative
fao
fazes
faz
estive
estiveste / /
esteve //
fiz
fizeste //
fz
fizemos
fizestes / /
fizeram //
Condilional
faremos
fareis
faro
faria
farias
faria
faramos
fareis
fariam
hei
houveram //
havido
Imperative
faz (tu)
fazei (vs)
1 57 .
Haver
Present indicative
hei
hs
h
Preteri!
havemos
haveis
ho
houve
houveste //
houve
houve mos
houvestes //
houve ram //
145
1 58.
Ir
vou
Present indicative
Present subjunctive
v
vs
v
1 59 .
Ler
1 60.
Ouvir
fui
foste //
foi
fomos
fostes //
foram //
Imperative
vamos
vades
vo
vai (tu)
ide (vs)
leio
leram //
Present indicative
leio
ls
l
ido
Preterir
vamos
ides
vo
vou
vais
vai
foram //
lido
Imperative
lemos
ledes //
lem
l (tu)
lede (vs)
ouo
ouviram
ouvido
pediram
pedido
puderam //
podido
Present indicative
ouo
ouves
ouve
161.
ouvimos
ouvis
ouvem
Pedir
peo //
Present indicative
pedimos
pedis
pedem //
peo //
pedes //
pede //
1 62.
Poder
posso //
Preterir

posso //
podes //
pode //
podemos /pu/
podeis /pu/
podem //
pude
pudeste //
pde
pudemos
pudestes //
puderam //
1 63 .
ponho
puseram //
posto
Pr
Preterit
Present indica tive

ponho
pes
pe
pomos
pondes
pem
Imperative
punha
punhas
punha
1 46
pus
puseste //
ps
pnhamos
pnheis
punham
pe (tu)
ponde (vs)
pusemos
pusestes / /
puseram //
1 64 .
Querer
quero //
Present indicative
quero //
queres //
quer //
1 65 .
Rir
queremos
quereis
querem //
1 66 .
Saber
queiramos
queirais
queiram
quer (tu)
querei (vs)
rio
riram
quisemos
quisestes //
quiseram //
rido
Imperative
rimos
rides
riem
ri (tu)
ride (vs)
sei
souberam //
sabido
Preterit
Present indicative
sabemos
sabeis
sabem
sei
sabes
sabe
quis
quiseste //
quis
Impera tive
Present indicative
rio
ris
ri
querido
Preterit
Present subjunctive
queira
queiras
queira
quiseram //
soube
soubeste //
soube
soubemos
soubestes //
souberam //
foram //
sido
Present subjunctive
saiba
saibas
saiba
1 67 .
saibamos
saibais
saibam
Ser
sou
Present indica tive

sou
es //
Preterit
somos
sois
so
era //
eras //
era //
fui
foste //
foi
fomos
fostes //
foram //
Present subjunctive
ramos
reis
eram //
seja //
sejas //
seja //
sejamos
sej ais
sejam //
lmperative
s (tu)
sde (vs)
147
1 68.
Ter
tenho
Present indicative
tenho
tens
tem
1 69.
Trazer
tnhamos
tnheis
tinham
tem (tu)
tende (vs)
trago
trouxeram //
Future indica tive
1 70.
Valer
tivemos
tivestes / /
tiveram //
trazido
Preterit
trazemos
trazeis
trazem
trarei
trars
trar
tive
tiveste //
teve //
Impera tive
Present indicative
trago
trazes
traz
tido
Preterit
temos
tendes
tm
tinha
tinhas
tinha
tiveram //
trouxe /s/
trouxeste /us/
trouxe /s/
trouxemos /use/
trouxestes /us/
trouseram /us/
Conditional
traremos
trareis
traro
traria
trarias
traria
traramos
trareis
trariam
valho
valeram //
valido
viram
visto
Present indica tive

valho
vales
vale
171 .
valemos
valeis
valem
Ver
vejo //

vejo //
vs
v
Preterit
vemos
vedes //
vem
vi
viste
viu
vimos
vistes
viram
venho
vieram //
vindo
Imperative
v (tu)
vede (vs)
1 72.
Vir
Present indica tive

venho
vens
vem
1 48
Preterit
vimos
vindes
vm
vim
vieste //
veio
viemos
viestes f/
vieram //
Imperative
vem (tu)
vinde (vs)
vnhamos
vnheis
vinham
vinha
vinhas
vinha
Irregular past participles. The following verbs given in this text have irregular past
participles:
1 73.
abrir
aceitar
cobrir
descobrir
dizer
entregar
escrever
fazer
aberto /f
aceitado, aceito
coberto f/
descoberto f/
dito
entregue /f
escrito
feito
ganhar
ganho
gastar
morrer
gasto
morrido (with ter)
morto (elsewhere)
pago
posto
visto
pagar
pr
ver
vir
vindo
1 74.
Object pronouns of the third person. The following object pronouns are almost completely unused in BF, and are increasingJy rare in the literary language.
o
a
him, it
her, it
When these forms follow a verb for m ending in -r,

noun takes an initial-/ , thus:
ver:
ves
vemos:
faz:
v-lo
v-lo
vemo-lo
f-lo
olhar:
olhas:
olhamos:
fiz:
them
them
os
as
OS,
or -z, this letter drops, and the object pro

olh-lo
olha-lo
olhamo-lo
fi-lo
sentir:
sentes:
sentimos:
fez:
senti-lo
sente-lo
sentimo-lo
fe-Io
When these forms follow a verb form which ends in a nasal sound, they take an intial no, thus:
do:
do-no
falam:
falam-no
When these direct objects are combined with indirect object pronouns they produce the fol
lowing forms:
me -I- o = mo
me + a = ma
me + os = mos
me + as = mas
nos + o = no-lo
nos + a = no-la
nos + os =no-Ios
nos + as = no-las
te + o = to, etc.
lhe or lhes + o = lho, etc.
vos + o = vo-lo
vos + a = vo-la
vos + os = vo-los
vos + as = vo-las
These pronouns or combinations may be placed between the infinitive and the endings of forms
of the future and conditional. Thus:
Oar-mo-
Falar-lho-ei.
Contar-vo-Io-amos.
conhec-Io-.
He will give it to me.

I shall speak it to him.
We should tell it to you.
He will recognize you.
1 49
1 75 .
Forms o f pronouns o f the old second person.
tu
you (thou)
vs
you (ye)
te
you (thee, to thee)
vos lu/
you, to you
a ti
to you (to thee)
a vs
to you
teu, fem. tua
your (thy)
vosso, -a //
your
Vocabularies
Abbreviations used in the vocabularies

adj .
adjective
num.
number
adv_
adverb
obj.
object
art.
artic1e
pI.
plural
conj.
conjunction
p.p.
past participle
contr.
contraction
prep.
preposition
def.
definite
preso
present tense
f.
feminine noun
pron.
pronoun
fem.
feminine
reflexo
reflexive
indef.
indefinite
reI.
rela tive
interrogo
interroga tive
S.
singular
m.
masculine noun
subj .
subjunctive
n.
noun
superl.
superlative
neut.
neuter
V.
verb
English-Portuguese
a, indef. art. um, uma

abandon, v, deixar, abandonar
able, adj . capaz ; be able, poder.
about, prep. about ten o 'dock l pelas
dez horas.
absent, adj . ausente.

be--, faltar.
accent, n. (foreign) sotaque, m. (written),
acento, m.
accept, V. aceitar.
according to, prep. segundo.
acquainted: be - with, conhecer.
activity, n. atividade, f.
advisable, adj . aconselhvel.
advise, V. aconselhar.
afraid, adj. com medo, medroso.
be
, ter medo, estar com medo.
after, adv. depois.
-
prep. depois de
conj . depois que.
afternoon, n. tarde, f.
afterwards, adv. depois, mais tarde.
1 50
ago, h, atrs
a year ago, h um ano, faz um ano, um
ano atrs.
agreeable, adj . agradvel , simptico.

ahead, adv. adiante.
ahead of the car, na frente do carro.
air, n. ar, m.
airplane, n. avio, m.
all, adj . todo, inteiro. pron. todo
neut. pron. tudo
allow, V . deixar, permitir.

almost, adv. quase.
alone, adj . s, sozinho.
a/ong, prep. ao longo de.
aloud, adv. alto.
already, adv. j.
a/so, adv. tambm.
a/though, conj. embora, ainda que , posto
que.
a/ways, adv. sempre.

a. m. ,
da manh.
A merican, n., adj_ americano.
among, prep. entre.

amuse, v. divertir (divirto).
an, indef. art. um, uma.
andent, adj. antigo.
and, conj . e.
anger, n. raiva, f.
angry, adj . com raiva.
be
, ter raiva, estar
-
com raiva.
animal, n. animal, m.; bicho, m.
anniversary, n. aniversrio, m.
another, adj., pron. outro, um outro.
answer, v. responder.
- telephone, atender o telefone .
appear, v . (seem) parecer; (beeome visible)
aparecer.
apple, n ma, f.
April, n. abril, m .
architect, n. arquiteto, m.
architecture, n. arquitetura, f.
around, prep.
around here, por aqui.
arrange, v. (fix up) arranjar.
arrive, v. chegar.
as, conj. como.
do it as he does, faz como ele.
read as you wait, l enquanto esperar.
as cold as, to frio como.
as far as, prep. at.
as soon as, conj. logo que, assim que.
ashamed, adj . com vergonha.
be
, estar com vergonha.
ask, v. (question) perguntar.
- for, pedir
- to, pedir para.
ask a question, fazer uma pergunta.
at, prep. (time) a.
(place) em.
- once, j.
attend, v. (regularly) freqentar.
(once) assistir a.
attention, n. ateno, f.
pay
, prestar ateno.
aUract, v. atrair.
August, n. agosto, m.
aunt, n. tia, f.
Aunty, Titia.
autumn, n. outono, m.
avenue, n. avenida, f.
away, adv. embora.
he is
, est fora.
.
--
bad, adj. mau, ruim.

badly, adv. mal.
baker, n. padeiro.
ball, n. bola, f.
bashful, adj. com vergonha.
be - , estar com vergonha.
bashfulness, n. vergonha, f.
bath, n. banho, m.
take a bath, tomar banho.
bathing suit, n. roupa de banho.
woman 's - , mai, m.
men 's - , calo de banho, m
bathing trunks, n. calo de banho, m.
be, v. ser; estar, ficar,
- loeated, achar-se.
- able, poder.
be cold, hot, etc. ter frio, calor,
beach, n. praia, f.
beans, n. feijo, m. sing.
beard, n. barba, f.
beat, v. dar em.
be beaten, apanhar.
beautiful, adj, lindo.
because, conj . porque.
- of, prep. por causa de.
bed, n. cama, f.
to to - , deitarse ; ir para a cama.
bedroom, n. quarto, m.
beef, n. carne, f. de vaca.
beefsteak, n. bife, m.
before, adv. antes.
prep. antes de.
conj. antes que.
beg, v. pedir.
begin, v. comear (a).
behind, adv. atrs.
prep. atrs de.
believe, v (in), crer, acreditar, (em).
belong, v. (to), pertencer (a).
below, adv. em baixo.
prep., em baixo de.
beside, prep. ao lado de.
besides, adv. alm disso.
prep. alm de.
best; super\. of good, melhor.
better, adj., adv. melhor.
between, prep. entre
beyond, prep. para l de.
bicycle, n. bicicleta, f.
big, adj. grande.
bigger, biggest, adj. maior.
151
bird, n. pssaro, m .
birthday, n . aniversrio, m.
, fazer anos.
have a
black, adj . preto.
blackboard. n. quadro-negro, pedra.
blond, adj . louro.
hloom, n. flor, f.
, em flor.
in
b/ossom, n. flor, f.
blow, v. ventar.
blue, adj . azul.
boiled, adj . cozido.
book, n. livro, m.
bookseller, n. livreiro, m.
bookstore, n. livraria, f.
bom, adj. nascido.
-
--
be -, nascer.
boss, n. patro, m., patroa, f.

boy, n. menino, m., garoto, m. (older)
rapaz, m.
boy-friend, n. namorado, m.
Brazi/, n. Brasil.
Brazilian, n., adj . brasileiro.
bread, n. po, m.
break, v. quebrar.
breakfast, n. caf, (m.) da manh.
, tomar o caf da manh.
eat
, com caf da manh.
for
breeze, n. brisa, f.
bride, n. noiva, f.
bright, adj . brilhante.
bring, v. trazer.
brother, n. irmo, m.
brown, adj . (eyes, hatr) castanho;
(c/othes, etc.) marrom.
brush, n. (bushes) mato, m.
bui/ding, n. edificio, m.
bund/e, n. embrulho, m.
bum, v. queimar.
bus, n. nibus, m.
bush, n. (low growth) mato, m.
but, conj . mas.
butter, n. manteiga, f.
buy, n. compra, f.
--
v. comprar.
by, prep. por

- Thursday, at quinta-feira.
- sea, por mar.
- bus, de nibus.
1 52
caf, n. caf , m.
call, v. chamar.
be called, chamar-se.
can, v. poder.
candy, n. balas, f. pI.
cane, n. cana, f.
capital, n. (city) capital, f.
car, n. carro, m.
Camival, n. Carnaval, m.
carry, v. levar.
case, n. caso, m.
in case, conj . caso.
castle, n., castelo, m.
catch, v. pegar, apanhar.
- sight of, enxergar.
center, n. centro, m.
certain, adj . certo, seguro .
city, n. cidade, f.
chair, n. cadeira, f.
chalk , n. giz., m.
change, v. mudar.
chat, v. conversar.
chi/d, n. criana, f.
chi/dren, crianas, fIlhos, meninos.
choose, v. escolher.
church, n. igreja, f.
c/ass, n. aula, f.
(group of students) turma, f.
classmate, n . colega, m. or f.
classroom, n. (sala de) aula, f.
c/ean, adj . limpo.
clear off, v. (table) tirar.
c/ock, n. relgio, m .
c/ose, v . fechar.
clothes, n. roupa, f.
c/oudy, adj. nublado.
coast, n. costa, f.
coat, n. (suit) palet, m.
(topcoat) casaco, m.
coffee, n. caf, m.
coffee pot, n. cafeteira, f.
cold, adj. frio.
n. frio, m.
, estou com frio.
I am
est fazendo frio.
It is
colleague, n. colega, m. or f.
college, n. faculdade, f.
c% r, n. cor, f.
comb, n. pente, m.
v. pentear,
--
-,
come, v. vir, (arrive) chegar.

- back, voltar.
- down, descer.
- in, entrar.
- out, sair.
- up, subir, (sun) nascer.
comma, n. vrgula, f.
common, adj. comum.
company, n. companhia, f.
compete, v. concorrer.
compose, v. compor.
'composer, n. compositor, m.
conduct, v. conduzir.
consult, v. consultar.
contain, v. conter.
be - ed in, caber.
continue, v. seguir, continuar.
contract, n. contrato, m.
conversation, n. conversa, f.
cool, a dj . fresco.
com, n. milho, m.
comer, n. esquina, f.
correct, adj . correto, certo.
cost, v. custar.
costume, n. fantasia, f.
count, v. contar.
country, n. (nation) pas, m.
(rural) campo, m., roa, f.
course, n. curso, m.
cousin, n. primo, m. prima, f.
cover, v. cobrir.
covered, adj. coberto.
cow, n. vaca, f.
cross, v. atravessar.
crowded, adj. (with), apinhado (de).
cuisine, n. cozinha, f.
cultivated, adj . cultivado.
-field, n. roa, f.
cup, n. xcara, f. xicrinha, f.
cut, v. cortar.
Daddy, n. Papai, m.
dance, n. dana, f.
v. danar.
dark, adj. escuro.

(complexion) moreno.
date, n. (month) data, f.
v. - a girl, namorar.
daughter, n. ftlha, f.
day, n. dia, m.
good
bom dia.
in the -- time, de dia.
December. , n. dezembro, m.
delay, v. tr. atrasar.
-,
v. intr. atrasar-se, demorar.

detiver, v. entregar.
demi-tasse, n. xicrinha, f.
depart, v. partir.
desirable, adj . desejvel.
desire, v. desejar.
desk, n. mesa, f.
difference, n. diferena, f.
difficult, adj . difcil.
difficulty, n. dificuldade, f.
(trouble), encrenca, f.
dine, v. jantar.
dinner, n. jantar, m.
eat
, jantar.
direct, v. dirigir.
dirty, adj . sujo.
disappear, v. sumir.
dish, n. prato, m.
dispose, v. dispor.
district, n. (city) bairro, m.
Federal -, Distrito Federal, m.
divided, adj . dividido.
do, v. fazer.
I do read, eu sim leio.
doctor, n. (MD) mdico, m.
dog, h. co, m. cachorro, m.
door, n. porta, f.
doubt, n . dvida, f.
v. duvidar.
down, adv. (place) em baixo.
(direction) para baixo.
lie
, deitar.
downtown, n. a cidade, f.
dream, n. sonho, m.
v. sonhar.
dress, n. vestido, m.
v. vestir (-se).
drink, v. beber, tomar.
drive, n. passeio, m .
v . passear (de carro)
a car, dirigir carro.
duck, n. pato, m.
during, prep. durante, por.
-
1 53
each, adj. cada.

pron. cada um.
- other, um ao outro.
ear/y, adv. cedo.
earn, v. ganhar.
earth, n. terra, f.
east, n. leste.
- 0[, a leste de.
Easter, n. Pascoa, f.
eat, v. comer.
- breakfast, tomar o caf da manh.
- lunch, almoar.
- dinner, jantar.
- ice cream, tomar sorvete.
egg, n. ovo, m.
eh; adv. hein?
eight, num. oito.
- hundred, oitocentos.
eighth, adj. oitavo.
eighty, num. oitenta.
either, conj .
- . . . or, o u . . . ou.
not
, tambm no.
employee, n. empregado, m. empregada, f.
employer, n patro, m. patroa, f.
empty, adj . vazio.
end, v. acabar.
endure, v. agentar.
Eng/ishman, n. ingls.
English, adj . ingls.
enough, adv., adj . bastante.
enter, v. entrar (em).
entire, adj. inteiro.
even, adv. at.
even if. conj . embora, ainda que, posto
que.
every, adj. todo, todos os.
everybody, pron. todo mundo.
everything. tudo.
everywhere, adv. (em) toda parte.
evil, adj . mau.
exist, v. existir.
explain , v. explicar.
extend, v. estender-se.
eye, n. olho, m.
-
fact, n. fato, m.
fali, n. (season) outono, m.
v. cair.
- asleep, cair no sono.
fami/y, n. famI1ia, f.
1 54
famous, adj . famoso. f.

far, adv. longe
- from, prep. longe de.
farm, n. fazenda, f.
farmer, n. fazendeiro, m.
fast, adv. depressa.
father, n. pai, m.
fear, n. medo, m.
v. temer.
February, n. fevereiro; m.
federal, adj . federal.
feel, v. sentir.
- like, ter vontade de.
fellow, n. rapaz, m.
few, adj . , pron. poucos.
fewer, adj. menos.
fianc, n. noivo, m.
fiance, n. noiva, f.
field, n. campo, m. roa, f.
fifth, adj . quinto.
fifty, num. cinqenta.
fill, v. encher.
fir/ally, adv. em fim.
find, v. achar, encon trar.
-- out, saber.
finger, n. dedo (m.) da mo.
finish, v. acabar.
fire, n. fogo, m.
v. despedir.
firm, adj . adv. firme.
first, adj . , adv. primeiro.
fit into, v. caber.
five, num. cinco.
five hundred, num. quinhentos.
fIX, v. (mend) consertar.
- up with, arranj ar (para)
floor, n. cho, m.
flower, n. flor, f.
fo/low, v. seguir.
following, adj . seguinte.
food, n. comida, f.
foot, n. p, m.
football, n. (soccer) futebol, m.
for, prep. para, por.
forbid, v. proibir.
forest, n. mata, f.
forget, v. esquecer.
- to, esquecer-se de .
fork, n . garfo, m.
form, v. formar.
former, adj . antigo.
formerly, adv. antigamente.

forty, num. quarenta.
fountain, n. chafariz, m.
four, num. quatro.
four hundred, num. quatrocentos.
fourth, adj . , n. quarto, m .
French, adj . , n. francs.
Frenchman, n. francs, m.
fresh, adj . fresco.
Friday, n. sexta-feira, f.
fried, adj . frito.
friend, n. amigo, m., amiga, f.
from, prep. de.
front, n. frente, f.
in -- of, prep. em frente de,
diante de.
fruit, n. fruta, f.
fry, v. fritar.
full, adj . cheio .
fuss, n. escndalo, m .
game, n . jogo, m .
"gang, " n . (the gang) turma, f.
garden, n. (flower) jardim.
(vegetable) horta, f.
gather, v. reunir-se .
general, adj . geral.
generally, adv. geralmente.
geography, n. geografia, f.
German, n., adj . alemo.
get, v. (receive) receber.
(become) ficar.
(get for one) arranjar.
behind, atrasar-se .
- in, entrar.
- married, casar (-se).
-- off, saltar.
-- ready, preparar-se .
- a present, ganhar um presente.
-- up, levantar (-se)
- well, repor-se.
gift, n. presente , m.
girl, n. (small) menina, garota.
(older) moa, f.
girl friend, n. namorada, f.
give, v. dar.
glad, a dj . contente.
glass, n. (water) copo, m.
go, v. ir, andar.
-- away, partir, ir (se) embora.
- back, voltar.
-- down, descer.
-
-- driving, passear ( de carro).

- in, entrar.
- on, seguir.
- out, sair.
- up, subir.
- to bed, deitar (-se).
- to sleep, dormir.
goat, n. cabra, f.
good, adj. bom.
- morning, bom dia.
- evening, boa tarde, boa noite.
- night, boa noite.
good-bye, at logo.
say
, despedir-se.
graduate, v. (college) formar-se.
grandfather, n. av, m .
grandmother, n . av, f.
great, adj . grande.
greater, greatest, adj . maior.
green, adj . verde.
grief, n. dor, f.
groom, n. noivo, m.
ground, n cho, m.
group, n. grupo, m.
grow, v. crescer.
-
hair, n. cabelo, m.
half, adj . meio.
ham, n. presunto, m.
hammock, n. rede, f.
hand, n mo , f.
v. entregar.
happy, adj . feliz, contente.

hard, adj . (difficult) difcil .
haste, n. pressa, f.
hasten, v. correr.
hat, n. chapu , m .
hate, v . odiar.
have, v. ter, estar com.
- dinner, j antar.
- a picnic, fazer um piquenique .
- lunch, almoar.
- supper, cear.
- something done, mandar fazer uma
coisa.
he, pron. ele.

health, n. sade, f.
heart, n. corao, m.
hear, v. ouvir.
"- that, ouvir dizer que.
heat, n. calor, m.
1 55
heaven, n. cu, m.
heavy, adj. pesado.
he/p, v. ajudar.
hen, n. galinha, f.
her, pron. ela.
posso pron. dela.
here, adv. aqui, c.
high, adj. alto.
highway, n. estrada, f.
him, pron. ele
history, n. histria, f.
hit, v, dar em.
ho/d, v. segurar.
- firm, agentar.
holiday, n. (dia) feriado, m.
home, n. casa, f.
at - , em casa.
hope, v. esperar.
I hope that, tomara que.
horse, n. cavalo, m.
ride a , montar a cavalo.
horseback, adv. a cavalo.
hot, adj. quente .
hour, n. hora, f.
house, n. casa, f.
how, adv. como.
- much, quanto.
- many, quantos.
hundred, num. cem, cento.
hunger, n. fome, f.
hungry, adj. com fome.
be
estar com fome.
hunh? adv. hein?
hurried/y, adv. com pressa.
hurry, n. pressa, f.
be in a
, ter pressa.
v. correr.
-
-,
ice cream, n. sorvete, m.

iI, conj. se.
incorrect, adj . errado.

incredib/e, adj. incrvel.
induce. v. induzir.
inevitab/e, adj. inevitvel.
inhabitant, n. habitante, m. or f.
inside, adv. dentro.
- 01, prep. dentro de.
interior, n., adj. interior.
into, prep. em.
introduce, v, (/ead into) introduzir.
(person) apresentar.
invite, v. convidar.
it, pron. ele, ela. Neut. isso.
jack fruit, n. jaca, f.
January, n. janeiro.
Japanese, n., adj . japons.
John, n. Joo.
jol/y, adj. alegre.
Joseph, n. Jos.
Ju/y, n. julho, m.
jump, v. saltar.
June, n. junho, m.
jung/e, n. selva, f.
just, adj . justo.
adv. s.
ka/e, n. couve, f.
keep, v. guardar
on, seguir.
key, n. chave, f.
kid. n. (child) menino.
-
v. brincar.
kind, n. espcie, f.
king, n. rei, m.
kitchen, n. cozinha, f.
knife, n. faca, f.
know, v. (fact) saber.
- how, saber.
- (person) conhecer.
iii, adj. doente.
lack, n. falta, f.
adv. mal.
important, adj. importante .
impossib/e, adj. impossvel.
improbab/e, adj. improvvel.
in, prep. em
- front 01, prep. em frente de.
- order to, prep. para
- order that, conj. para que.
- short, adv. enfim.
- spite of, prep. apesar de.
be /acking, faltar.
ladder, n. escada, f.
lady, n. moa, f.
lag behind, v. ficar atrs.
lake, n. lago, m.
land, n. terra, f.
language, n. lngua, f.
large, adj . grande.
larger, largest, adj. maior.
1 56
v. faltar.
last, adj . (recent) passado.

(ofseries) ltimo.
late, adv. tarde.
lately, adv. ultimamente.
lateral, adj . lateral.
laugh, v. rir.
launch, v. lanar.
lawn, n. jardim, m.
lay (down), v. deitar.
lead, v. conduzir, levar.
- into, introduzir.
learn, v. aprender
least, adj . menor.
adv. menos.
leave, v. (go away) partir, sair.

(abandon) deixar.
leg, n. perna, f.
lend, v. emprestar.
(fig. sense) prestar.
Lent, n. Quaresma, f.
less, adj . , adv. menos.
lesson, n. lio, f.
let, v. deixar, permitir
let's, vamos.
- him do it, que ele faa.
letter, n. (epistle) carta, f.
lie (down) v. deitar (se)
light, n. luz, f.
adj . (weight) leve.
adj . (colar) claro.
v. acender.
light/y, adv. de leve, levemente.

like, v. gostar de
- better, preferir.
prep. como, feito.
like/y, adj . fcil, provvel.

listen, v. escutar . .
- (to the radia), ouvir.
little, adj . (quantity) pouco.
a - um pouco.
(size) pequeno.
live, v. (be alive) viver.
(reside) morar.
loar. n. (bread) po, m.
long, adj . (space) comprido.
(time) longo.
be
, demorar.
look, v. (at) olhar (para).
for, procurar.
- like, parecer (-se) com.
lose, v. perder .
,
lot, n.
a - of, muito.
/ots of, muito.
loud, adj . , adv. alto.
lave, v. gostar de.
low, adj . baixo.
luck, n. (good) sorte, f.
(bad) azar, m.
lucky, adj . com sorte.
be - ter sorte.
/unch, n. almoo, m.
,
v. almoar.
ma 'am, n. s.enhora.
machine, n. mquina, f.
maid, n. empregada, f.
mail, n. correio, m .
v . pr n o correio.
make, v. fazer.
- fun of, caoar de.
man, n. homem, m.
mango, n. (fruit) manga, f.
mango tree, n. mangueira, f.
manner, n. maneira, f., modo, m. jeito, m.
many, adj . muitos.
March, n. maro.
march, n . .<music) marcha, f.
maroon, adj . marrom.
marry, v. casar-se (com).
Mary, n. Maria.
mass, n. (church) missa, f.
matter, n.
what's the -? O que voc tem?
May, n. maio, m.
may, v. poder.
maybe, adv. talvez.
mE;. pron. me.
meal, n. (e.g., dinner) refeio, f.
meat, n. carne, f.
meet, v. (be introduced) conhecer.
(run into) encontrar.
(gather) reunir-se.
meeting, n. reunio, f.
member, n. scio, m.
mend, v. consertar.
mess, n. (trouble) e ncrenca, f.
midnight, n. meia-noite, f.
milk, n . leite, m.
milkman, n. leiteiro, m.
million, n. milho, m.
mine, posso pron. (o) meu.
1 57
minute, n. minuto, m.
miss, n. (title) senhorita, f.
miss, v.
- a train, perder um trem.
- (a person) ter saudade de.
- class, faltar aula.
missing, adj. em falta.
mister, n. (title) senhor.
mix, v. mexer.
Mommy, n. Mame.
Monday, n. segunda-feira, f.
money, n. dinheiro, m.
month, n. ms, m.
moon, n. lua, f.
more, adj., adv. mais.
morning, n. manh.
in the - , de manh.
good . bom dia
most, adj . , adv. (o) mais.
motel, n. motel, m.
mother, n., me, f.
mountain, n. montanha, f.
move v. mudar, mover, mexer.
movie, n. cinema, m.
Mr. (title) senhor.
Mrs. (tille) senhora.
much, adj . , adv. muito.
not , nem muito.
how much, quanto.
music, n. msica, f.
must, v.
1 - go, tenho que ir.
it must be late, deve ser tarde.
-
name, n. nome, m.
my - is, Chamome.
na"ow, adj . estreito.
natural, adj. natural.
near, adv. perto .
prep. perto de.
nearby, adv. perto.

nearly, adv. quase.
necessary, adj. preciso, necessrio.
need, n. falta, f.
v. precisar de.
neither, conj . nem

net, n. rede, f.
network, n. rede, f.
never, adv. nunca.
new, adj . novo.
newspaper, n. jornal.
1 58
next, adj. (following) seguinte.

(nearest) prximo.
nice, adj . simptico.
night, n. noite, f.
at - , de noite
good
, boa noite.
last - , ontem noite.
nine, num. nove.
nine hundred, num. novecentos.
nineteen, num. dezenove .
ninety, num. noventa.
ninth, adj . nono.
no, adv. no
-
adj. nenhum.
no one, pron. ningum

noise, n. barulho.
none, pron. nenhum.
noon, n. meio-dia, m.
nor, conj . nem.
neilher, . - ,
.
nem . . . nem.
north, n. norte, m.
- o/, ao norte de.
not, adv. no.
- much, nem muito.
- always, nem sempre.
- ali, nem todos.
notebook, n. caderno, m.
nothing, pron. nada.
November, n. novembro , m.
number, n. nmero, m.
October, n. outubro, m.
o 'clock, adv. hora, f.
odor, n. cheiro, m.
o/, prep. de
office, n. (doctor's) consultrio, m.
o.K., adv. est bem.
okra, n. quiabo, m.
old, adj. velho.
on, prep. em, sobre.
on top o/, prep. sobre.
once, adv. uma vez.
one, num. um.
only, adv. s, apenas.
onto, prep. em.
open, adj . aberto.
v. abrir.
oppose, v. oporse a.
or, conj. ou
eilher . . . -, ou . . . ou.
orange, n. laranja, f.
orange tree, n. laranjeira, f.
orchard, n. pomar, m.
order, n. ordem, f.
v. mandar.
in - to, para.
in order that, conj . para que.
organization, n. organizao, f.
orphan, n. rfo, m. rf, f.
other, adj ., pron. outro.
ought, v. deve, devia.
our, ours, pron. (o) nosso.
out, adv. fora
-- of stock, em falta.
-- there, l fora.
- here, c fora.
outside, adv. fora.
prep. fora de.
over, adv. sobre, em cima de.
owe, v. dever.
OX, n. boi, m.
pack (v,) bags, fazer as malas.
package, n. embrulho, m.
pain, n . dor, f.
pair, n . par, m.
paper, n. papel, m.
news
jornal, m.
parade, n. desfile, m.
v. desfilar.
parents, n. pais, m. pI .
park, n. parque, m.
part, n. parte, f.
partner, n. (daneing) par, m.
party, n. festa, f.
pass, v. passar.
past, adj . passado.
pay, v. pagar.
- attention, prestar ateno.
peach, n. pssego.
pen , n. caneta, f.
- point, pena, f.
penei/, n. lpis, m.
people, n. (nation) povo, m.
(persons) pessoas, f. pI.
(in general) a gente.
per, prep. por.
perhaps, adv. talvez, qui.
permit, v. permitir, deixar.
person, n. pessoa, f.
-,
pick, v. pick out, escolher.

- up, apanhar.
picture, n. quadro, m.
(photo) foto (grafia), f.
piece, n. pedao, m.
pineapp/e, n. abacaxi, m.
pity, n. pena, f.
photograph, n. foto (grafia), f.
p/ace, n. lugar, m.
plain, n. plancie, f.
plan, v. planejar.
plane, avio, m.
by
, de avio. (person)
by
, por avio. (letter)
piam, n. planta, f.
v. plantar.
pia te, n. prato, m
play, v. brincar, (games) jogar,
(music) tocar.
p/eased, adj . contente.
pleasure, n. prazer. m.
p/us, mais.
p.m., da tarde, da noite.
poo/, n. (swimming) piscina, f.
poor, adj . pobre,
- fellow, coitado.
poor/y, adv. mal.
popular, adj . popular.
pork, n. (carne de) porco.
Portuguese, n., adj . portugus.
possible, adj . possvel.
post office, n. (casa de) correio.
potato, n. batata, f.
lrish -, batata inglesa.
sweet
, batata doce.
pour, v. pr
precede, v. preceder.
prefer, v. preferir.
presem, n. presente.
adj . presente
presem, v. apresentar.
pretty, adj . bonito.
price, n. preo, m.
prize, n. prmio, m .
probab/e, adj . provvel.
produce, v. produzir.
profession, n. profisso, f.
professional, adj . profissional.
professor, n. professor, m.
professora, f.
-
1 59
prohibit, v. proibir.
promote, v. promover.
proof, n prova, f.
propose, v. propor.
purchase, n. compra, f.
v. comprar.
put, v. pr, botar.
- away, guardar.
back, repor, devolver.
- on (c/othes) pr.
- on (shoes) calar.
- out (side)pr fora.
- out (light) apagar.
_.
qua"el, v. escndalo, m.
quarter, n. (fourth) quarto, m.
question, n. pergunta, f.
ask a - , fazer uma pergun ta.
quick (Iy), adv. depressa.
quite, adv. bastante.
- a bit of, (adj) bastante
radio, n. rdio, m.
- station, rdio, f.
rage, n. raiva, f.
rain, n. chuva, f.
v. chover.
rainy, adj. chuvoso.

raise, v. (elevate) levantar.
(animais) criar.
ranch, n. fazenda, f.
range, n. (mountain) serra, f.
rare, adj. raro.
- (meat), mal passado.
rather, adv. bastante.
I'd -, prefiro.
or -, alis.
read. v. ler.
reading, n. leitura, f.
reason, n. razo, f.
receive, v. receber.
recite, v. dar a aula.
recognize, v. conhecer.
recover, v. repor-se.
reduce, v. reduzir.
regret, v. sentir.
rela tive, n. parente, m. ar f.
remain. v .. ficar.
remember, v. lembrar (-se) (de).
remind, v. lembrar a.
repair, v. consertar.
1 60
resemble, v. parecer-se com.

restaurant, n. restaurante, m.
retum, v.. voltar, devolver.
reunion, n. reunio, f.
rice, n. arroz, m.
rich, adj. rico.
ride, n. passeio (de carro, a cavalo)
v. passear de carro, a cavalo.
right, adj . certo, correto.

be -, ter razo.
- there, ali mesmo.
- here, aqui mesmo.
ring, v. tocar.
ripped, adj. rasgado.
rise, v. (person) levantar (-se)
(sun) nascer.
river, n. rio, m.
road, n. estrada, f.
roast, v. assar.
rock, n. pedra, f.
room, n. sala, f.
bed - , quarto, m.
run, v. correr.
sack, n. saco, m.
salt, n. sal. m.
samba, n. samba, m.
same, adj., pron. mesmo.
sand, n. areia, f.
sandwich, n. sanduche, m.
Saturday, n. sbado, m.
say, v.. dizer.
- good bye, despedir-se.
scaUer, v. espalhar,
school, n. escola, f.
- (ofuniversity), faculdade, f.
scold, descompor, xingar.
scramble, v. mexer.
sea, n ; mar, m.
season, n. estao, f.
seat,n. (of organization) sede, f.
second, n., adj. segundo, m.
see, v. ver.
-(with difficulty) enxergar.
seem, v. parecer.
select, v. escolher.
self, int. pron. mesmo.
seU, v. vender.
Sep tem ber, n. setembro, m.
set, v. pr, botar.

(sun) prse.
- down, deitar.
- up, armar.
- tab/e, pr a mesa.
seven, num. sete.
seven hundred, num. setecentos.
seventeen, num. dezessete.
seventh, adj. stimo.
seventy, num. setenta.
severa/, adj. vrios.
shame, n. vergonha, f.
shave, v. fazer a barba.
she, pron. ela.
shine, v. brilhar.
shining, adj. brilhante.
shirt, n. camisa, f.
shoe, n. sapato, m.
shoemaker, n. sapateiro, m.
shop, n. loja, f.
v. fazer compras.
short, adj. (/ength) curto.

(stature) baixo.
(time) breve.
in -, enfim.
shortage, n. falta, f.
shorts, n. (men 's) short, m.
bathing , calo, m.
shou/d, v. deve, devia.
shut, v. fechar.
sick, adj. doente.
side, n. lado, m.
on this - of, para c de.
on that - of, para l de.
on the other side of, do outro lado de.
sidewa/k, n. calada, f.
simp/e, adj . simples.
sing, v. cantar.
sir, senhor.
sister, n. irm.
sit (down) v. sentar (-se)
situation, n. situao, f.
six, num. seis.
six hundred, num. seiscentos.
sixteen, num. dezesseis.
sixth, adj . sexto.
sixty, num. sessenta.
sky, n. cu, m.
sleep, n. sono, m.
-
v. dormir,
go to
, dormir.
sleepiness, n. sono.
sleepy, adj. com cono.
be , ter sono.
slow (ly), adv. devagar.
small, adj . pequeno.
smaller, smallest, adj . menor.
smell, n. cheiro, m.
-
v. sentir um cheiro.
smile, v. sorrir.
snow, n. neve, f.
v. nevar.
so, adv. to, assim
- much, tanto.
- many, tantos.
conj . de modo que, de jeito que
conj. (purpose) para que.
soccer, n. futebol, m.
soldier, n. soldado, m.
some, adj. , pron. algum.
sometime, alguma vez.
sometimes, s vezes.
somewhat, um pouco.
somewhere, nalguma parte.
son, n. filho, m.
song" n. cano, f.
soon, adv. (early) cedo.
. (immediately) j, logo.
as - as, conj. logo que,
sorry, adj. com pena.
be -, sentir
be - for, ter pena de.
south, n. sul, m.
- of, ao sul de.
spade, n. p, f.
Spaniard, n espanhol, m.
Spanish, adj . espanhol.
speak, v. falar.
spend, v. (money) gastar.
(time) passar.
spite, n .
in - of, prep. apesar de.
spoon, n. colher, f.
sport, n. esporte, m.
spread, v. espalhar.
spring, n. (season) primavera, f.
square, n. (city) praa, f.,
largo, m.
stair, n. escada, f.
stand, v. ficar em p.
- up, pr-se em p.
(endure) agiientar.
.
161
start, v. comear.
state, n. estado.
station, n. estao, f.
stay, v. ficar.
steady, adj. firme.
steak, n. bife, m.
step, n. passo , m.
stewed, adj . cozido.
stilL, adv. ainda
stir, v. mexer.
stone, n. pedra, f.
stop, v. intr. parar.
- a look, dar uma olhada.

- o/f, tirar, despir.
- out, tirar.
- a picture, tirar uma foto.
- a trip, fazer uma viagem.
- time, levar tempo.
- a walk, passear em p.
talk, n. conversa, f.
strong, adj. forte.

student, n estudante, m. or f.
study, v. estudar.
such, adj. tal.
suck, v. chupar.
sugar, n acar, m.
suggest, v. propor.
sultry, adj . abafado.
summer, n. vero, m.
sun, n. sol, m.
Sunday, n. domingo, m.
sunny, adj . de sol.
supper, n. ceia, f.
eat , cear.
suppose, v. supor.
sure, adj . seguro, certo.
surprise, v. surpreender.
swa/low, v. engolir.
sweet, adj . doce.
swim, v. nadar.
swimming pool, n. piscina, f.
v. falar, conversar.
ta/l, adj. alto.
taste, n. gosto, m.
v. (try out) provar.
(have a tas te) ter gosto.
taxi, n. txi, m.
tea, n. ch, m.
teach, v. ensinar.
teacher, n. professor, m.
professora, f.
team, n. time, m.
telephone, n. telefone, m.
television, n. televiso, f.
tell, v. (say) dizer.
(order) dizer.
(story) contar.
fen, num. dez
tenth, adj. dcimo.
territory, n territrio, m.
test, n. prova, f.
v. provar.
than, conj. que, do que.
more - two, mais de dois.
thanks, thank you, obrigado.
that, demon. pron. esse, aquele
reI. pron. que.
conj. que.
- way, por ali.
that which, o que.
theater, n. teatro, m.
"
their, theirs, posso pron. deles, delas
then, adv. ento.
thence, adv. da, dali.
there, adv. (near you) a.
(distant) l.
table, n. mesa, f.
tablecloth, n . toalha (f) de mesa.
take, v. (possession of) tomar.
(drink) tomar.
(conduct) levar, conduzir.
- care of, atender.
- leave, despedirse.
right over -, ali.

(to that place) para l.
they, pron. eles, elas.
thick, adj. grosso.
thing, n. coisa, f.
something, alguma coisa.
anything, alguma coisa.
nothing, nada.
v. tr. deter.
- doing it, deixa de fazer

- it! deixa!
store, n loja, f.
story, n. histria, f.
strawberry, n. morango, m.
street, n. rua, f.
strike, v. dar.
stro/l, n. volta, f. passeio, m. v. dar uma
volta.
1 62
think, v. pensar.
(have an opinion) achar.
third, adj . terceiro.
thirst, n. sede, f.
thirsty, adj. com sede.
be
ter sede.
thirty, num. trinta.
this, demo pron. este.
this way, por aqui.
thousand, num. mil.
n. milhar, m.
three, num. trs.
three hundred, num. trezentos.
through, prep. por.
throw, v. jogar.
Thursday, n. quinta-feira, f.
thus, adv. assim.
till, prep. at.
time, n. tempo, m.
(oeeasion) vez, f.
three times, trs vezes.
two times two, duas vezes dois.
what time is it? Que horas so?
this time, desta vez.
have a good time, divertir-se .
tire, V. cansar.
get tired, cansar-se .
to, prep. a, para.
today, adv. hoje.
toe, n dedo (do p) m.
together, adj . juntos.
tomorrow, adv. amanh.
tangue, n . lngua, f.
tonigh t, adv. hoje ( noite).
too, adv. (also) tambm.
(exeessively) muito.
tooth, n. dente, m.
topeoat, n. casaco, m .
tom, adj . rasgado.
toueh, V. tocar.
toward, prep. para.
towel, n. toalha, f.
town, n. cidade, f.
toy, n. brinquedo, m.
train, n . trem, m.
trash, n. lixo, m.
travei, v. viajar.
treat, V . tratar.
tree, n rvore, f.
trip, n. viagem, f.
trouble, n. pena, f.
-
(diffieulty) encrenca, f.
it 's no
, no d trabalho.
true, adj . verdadeiro.
it 's
verdade.
truth, n. verdade, f.
try, V. tentar, procurar.
Tuesday, n. tera-feira, f.
tum on (/ight) acender.
tum, n. volta, f.
twenty, num. vinte.
twiee, adv. duas vezes.
two, num. dois.
two hundred, num. duzentos.
-
ugly, adj . feio.

uncle, n. tio, m.
Uncle, Titio.
understand, v.. compreender, entender.
undesirable, adj . indesejvel.
undress, V . despir (-se).
unfortunate, adj . infeliz, lastimvel.
it is
, pena.
United States, n. Estados Unidos, m. pI.
university, n. universidade, f.
unjust, adj . injusto.
unless, conj . se . . . no.
un/ikely, adj . difcil, improvvel.
unlueky, adj . sem sorte, com azar.
be
no ter sorte, ter azar.
until, prep. at.
conj . at que, enquanto . . no.
up, adv. (plaee) em cima, l em cima.
(direetion) l para cima.
, subir.
go
eome
subir.
upstairs, adv. l em cima.
urgent, adj. urgente.
us, pron. nos.
use, V. usar.
useful, adj. til.
useless, adj. intil.
-
vaeation, n. frias, f. pI.

variety stores. Lojas Brasileiras, f. pI.
vary, v. variar.
veal, n. vitela, f.
very, adv. muito.
visit, n . visita, f.
V. visitar.
pay a
fazer uma visita.
on a
, de visita.
-
1 63
visitor, n. visita, f.
voice, n. voz, f.
wait, v. esperar.
waiter, n. garom m.
waitress, n. garonete, f.
wake up, v. acordar.
walk, n passeio, m.
v. ir a p, andar.
(for pleasure) passear a p.
(side) walk, n. calada, f.
war, n. guerra, f.
warm, adj . quente.
I'm -, estou com calor.
it 's warm, est fazendo calor.
wash, v. lavar (-se)
watch, n. relgio, m.
v. olhar.
TV ver televiso
water, n. gua, f.
way, n (manner) maneira, f. modo, m,
jeito, m.
do ir this way, faz assim.
go that way, vai por ali.
we, pron. ns
weak, adj . fraco.
wear, v. usar, vestir.
weather, n. tempo. m.
Wednesday, n. quarta-feira, f.
week, n. semana, f.
well, adv. bem.
- done (food) bem passado.
west, n. oeste, m .
- 0[, a oeste de.
what, interrogo pron. que, o que.
reI. pron. o que.
interrogo adj . que
when, adv. quando.
where, adv. onde.
(direction) aonde, para onde.
where is, !.:ad.
whether, conj. se.
wh ich , reI. pron. que.
interrogo pron. qual.
while, conj . enquanto.
white, adj. branco.
who, interrogo pron. quem.
reI. pron. que, quem.
-
1 64
whole, adj . inteir.

wide, adj . largo.
wife, n. mulher, f. esposa, f.
will, n . vontade, f.
v. haver de.
- you? voc quer"!
win, v. ganhar.
wind, n. vento, m.
window, n. janela, f.
windy, adj .
be -, ventar.
winter, n. inverno , m.
wish, n. vontade, f.
v. querer, desejar.
I wish that, tomara que
with, prep. com,
within, adv. dentro.
prep. dentro de .
without, prep. sem.
woman, n. mulher, f.
won der, v. querer saber
word, n. palavra, f.
work, n. trabalho, m.
v. trabalhar.
worker, n. trabalhador, m.
world, n. mundo, m.
worse, worst, adj . pior.
worth, adj .
be -, valer.
be - while, valer a pena.
would, v
- that, tomara que.
write, v. escrever.
wrong, adj . errado.
be -, no ter razo.
.
yard, n. (of house} jardim, m.

year, n. ano, m.
yellow, adj. amarelo.
yes, adv. (use verb repetition)
yesterday, adv, ontem.
yet, adv. (still) ainda.
no! -, ainda no.
you, pron. voc, pI. vocs.
young, adv. novo, moo.
your, posso adj . seu, f. sua.
Portuguese-English
a, prep. to, ato

a, obj . pron. her, it.
a, as, articJe, the.
, s, contl. to the.
abacaxi, m. pineapple.
abafado, adj . sultry.
abaixo, adv. down (ward).
aberto //, adj . open, opened.
abril, m. April
acabar, to finish, to end.
ao, f. action.
aceitar, to accept.
p.p. aceito & aceitado.
acender, to light (lamp, fire)
to tum on (lights)
achar, to findo
eu acho, I think soo
acho que sim, I think so
eu no acho, I think noto
achar-se, to be (located).
aconselhar (a), to advise (to).
aconselhvel, adj . advisable.
acordar, to wake, to wake up.
acreditar (em), to believe (in).
acar, m. sugar.
agosto, //, m. August.
gua, f. water.
agentar, to stand, to endure (pain), to
hold firmo
a, adv. there (near you).
ainda, adv. still, yet.
- no, not yet.
- que, although, even though
ajudar, to help.
alegre adj . //, jolly, happy.
alm de, prep. besides.
alm disso, besides.
alemo, adj . ; f. alem, German.
algum, f. alguma, adj . & pron. some, any.
alguma coisa, something.
alguma parte, somewhere .
algumas vezes, sometimes.
ali, adv. there , right there.
alis, adv. besides, ar rather.
almoar, to eat lunch.
alto, adj., high, taU, loud (voice)
adv. aloud.
amanh, adv. tomorrow.
amarelo, adj //, yellow.

americano, adj American
amiga, f. friend.
amigo, m., friend
andar, to walk, to go.
a mquina anda, the machine runs.
animal, m. animal.
aniversrio, m. birthday, anniversary.
ano, m. yeal.
fazer anos, have a birthday.
antes, adv. before.
antes de, prep. before.
antes que, conj . before .
antigamente, adv. formerly.
antigo, adj . ancient, former
anzol, m. // fishhook.
ao, aos, contr. to the.
apagar, to put out (fire).
apanhar, to pick up. to catch, to be
beaten.
aparecer, to appear (become visible).
apesar de, prep. in spite of.
apinhado (de) adj . crowded (with).
aprender (a), to leam (to).
apresentar, to present (play),
introduce (person).
aquele //, pron ., adj. that.
quele //, contr. to that.
aqui, adv. here .
aquilo, neut. pron. that.
ar, m. air.
areia, f. sand.
armar, to set up, put up.
arquiteto //, m. architect.
arquitetura, f. architecture.
arranjar, to get (for one), to arrange,
to fix (one) up with
arroz // , m. rice.
rvore, f. tree.
assar, to roast.
assim, adv. thus, soo
assim que, conj . as soon as.
assistir a, to attend (once).
at, prep. until, as far as.
at logo, see you soon.
at amanh, see you tomorrow,
adv. even.
at que, conj . until.
1 65
atender, to take care of, to answer

(door, phone , etc.)
atividade, f. activity.
atrair, to attract.
atrs, adv. back, behlnd.
atrs de, prep. behind.
atrasar (se), to delay, to get behind,
(c1ock) to lose time.
atravessar, to cross.
audaz, adj. bold.
aula, f. c1ass, c1assroom.
sala de aula, c1assroom.
ausente , adj . absent.
avenida, f. avenue .
avio, m. airplane.
av, m. grandfather.
av, f. grandmother.
azar, m. bad luck.
azul, adj . blue.
bairro" m. district (of city).
baixo, adj . low, short (stature).
em baixo, adv. below, underneath.
em baixo de, prep. under.
bala, f. piece of candy .
banheiro, m. bathroom.
banho, m. bath.
roupa de banho, bathing suit.
calo de banho, bathing trunks.
tomar banho de mar, go swimming.
barba, f. beard.
fazer a barba, to shave.
barril, m. barreI.
barulho, m. noise.
bastante, adj. enough, quite a bit of adv.
rather, quite.
batata, f. potato.
batata ingls, Irish potato.
batata doce, sweet potato.
beber, to drink.
bem, adv. well.
est bem, O. K.
bem passado, well dane.
bno, f. blessing.
bicho, m. animal (any living thing, from
germ to whale).
bicicleta l/, f. bicycle.
bife, m. steak.
boa, // f. of bom, good.
boi, m. ox.
bola, I l f. ball
1 66
bolso, m. l l pocket.
bom, adj . good.
bom dia, good morning.
boa tarde, good evening.
boa noite, good evening, good night.
bonito Ibu/ , adj . pretty, handsome
botar, to put.
branco, adj. white.
Brasil, m. Brazil
brasileiro, m. Brazilian.
breve l/, adj . short, brief.
em breve, soon.
brilhante, adj. brilliant, bright.
brilhar, to shine .
brincar, to play, to "kid"
brinquedo ll, m. toy.
brisa, f. breese.
c, adv. here.
para c, (to) here.
por c, hereabouts.
cabelo //, m. hair
caber, to fit into, to be contained in.
No cabe dvida, there's no doubt.
cabra, f. goat.
cachorro, ll m. dog.
caoar (de), to make fun of.
cada, adj. each.
cada um, pron. each.
cad, adv. where is (are)
cadeira, f. chair.
caderno, /l m. notebook.
caf, m. coffee, caf
caf da manh, breakfast.
cafeteira, f. coffee pot.
cair, to fall
cair na gua, to go in swimming.
calada, f. sidewalk.
calo, m. athletic shorts.
calo de banho, swimming trunks.
calar, to put on (shoes).
calor, l/ m. heat.
tenho calor, I'm hot.
estou com calor, I'm hot.
faz calor, it's hot (weather)
cama, f. bed.
camisa, f. shirt.
campo, m. field; the country.
cana, f. (sugar) cane.
cano, f. song.
caneta l/ , f. peno
cansar (-se) to tire, get tired.

cantar, to sing.
co, m. pI. ces, dog.
capital, f. capital (city).
carioca, jj adj , m. & f. native of Rio.
Carnaval, m. CarnivaI.
carne, f. meat, esp. beef.
carne de porco, pork.
carro, m. caro
de carro, by car.
carta, f. letter, (playing) cardo
casa, f. house, home.
em casa, at home.
na casa, in the house.
casaco, m. topcoat; ladies' coat.
casar (-se) (com) to marry, get married (to)
caso, m. case.
conj . in case.
castanho, adj. brown.
castelo jj, m. castle.
cavalo, m. horse .
cear, to eat supper.
cedo /j, adv. early, soon.
cego ff, adj . blindo
ceia, f. supper.
cem, num. one hundred.
cento, m. one hundred.
centro, m. center.
certo, fj adj . certain, correct, right, true.
cerveja, jj f. beer.
cu, m. sky, heaven.
ch, m. tea.
chafariz, m. fountain.
chamar, to call.
chamar-se , to be named.
cho, m. ground, floor.
chapu, m. hat.
chave, f. key.
chegar, to arrive, come.
chegar em, arrive in.
chegar a, to amount to.
chegar para, to be enough for.
chega para c, some elo ser.
cheio, adj . full.
cheiro, m. smell, odor.
chover, to rain.
chupar, to suck.
chuva, f. rain.
chuvoso, jj adj. rainy.
cidade, f. city, town, downtown.
cima, adv.
em cima, above , upstairs.
em cima de, prep. above,
cinema, m. movie
cinco, num. five
cinqenta, num. fifty .
coberto, // adj . & p. p., covere d.
cobrir, to cover.
coisa, f. thing.
alguma coisa, something.
outra coisa, something else.
coitado, m. poor fellow
colega, jj, m., f. elassmate ; colleague
colher jj, f. spoon
com, prep. with.
comear, to begin .
comer, to eat.
comida, f. food.
comigo, pron. with me.
como, adv. & conj . how, as, like.
companhia, f. company.
compor, to compose, make up.
compositor, m. composer.
compra, f. purchase, buy.
comprar, to buy, purchase.
compreender, to understand.
comprido, adj. long (in space)
comum, adj . common.
concorrer, to compete.
conduzir, to conduct, to lead.
conhecer, to know, to meet, to recognize
conosco jj, pron. with uso
consertar, to fix, mend, repair.
consigo, pron. with him (seU) your (seU)
themselves, yourselves, etc.
consulta, f. consultation, conference.
consultar, to consult.
consultrio, m. (dr's) office.
contar, to tell (story), to count.
contente, adj . pleased, happy.
contrato, m. contracto
conversa, /j f. chat, conversation.
conversar, to chat, to talk.
convidar (para), to invite (to).
copo j j, m. glass.
cor //, f. coloro
corao, m. heart.
correio, m. mail, post office.
correr, to run, to hurry.
correr perigo, to run risk.
cortar, to cut.
1 67
costa / /, f. coast.
couve, f. kale.
cozido, adj . boiled, stewed.
cozinha, f. kitchen, cuisine .
cozinhar, to cook.
crer (em), to believe (in).
crescer, to grow.
criana, f. child.
criar, to raise (animais)
cruzeiro, m. Braz. monetary unit.
cultivado, adj . cultivated.
curso, m. course.
curto, adj . short.
custar, to cost, to be difficult.
custa-me crer, it's hard for me to
believe.
da, das, contraction, of the
da, contr. from there, from then on
thence.
dana, f. dance.
danar, to dance.
daquele, l/, contr. of that.
daqui, contr. from here.
dar, to give, to strike .
dar a aula, to recite.
dar bom dia, to say good moming.
dar cartas, to deal cards.
dar com, to run into.
dar duas horas, to strike two.
dar em, to hit, hit upon.
dar para a rua, to face the street
dar para a msica, to be good at
musico
dar um grito, to yell.
dar uma olhada, to take a look.
dar um passeio, to take a stroll.
dar uma volta, to take a stroll.
dar-se bem com, to get along with.
dar-se conta de, to realize.
data, f. date (on calendar)
de, prep. of, from.
dcimo, adj . tenth.
dedo l/, m_ fmger, toe.
dedo da mo, finger.
dedo do p, toe.
deitar, to lay, to lie down.
deitar-se, to lie down, go to bed.
deixar, to let, allow, permit.
to leave. abandono
deixar de fazer, to stop doing.
1 68
dela, dele, contr. of her, her, o f him, his.

demorar, to delay, to be long in.
dente, m. tooth.
dentro, adv. inside , within.
dentro de, inside of.
depois, adv. afterwards, later.
depois que, conj . after.
depressa, // adv. quick, fast.
descer, to go down, come down.
desejar, to desire.
desejvel, adj . desirable.
desfilar, to parade.
desfile, m. parade.
despedir, to discharge, fire
(a person)
despedir-se, to take leave.
despir, to undress, to take off.
desse, // contr. of that.
deste, // contr. of this.
Deus, m. God.
devagar, adv. slow (ly).
dever, to owe, ought, should.
dezembro, m. December.
dia, m. day.
o dia 2 de maro, March 2 .
de dia, i n the daytime.
diante adv. in front, out ahead.
diante de, prep. in front of.
diferena. f. difference.
diffcil, adj. difficult, hard.
dinheiro, m. money.
dirigir, to direct, to drive
(a car).
dirigir-se a, to go to.
distrito, m. district :
Distrito Federal, Federal District.
dito, p. p. of dizer.
divertir, to amuse.
divertir-se, to have a good time.
dividido, p. p. divided.
dizer, to say, to tell.
do, dos, contr. of the.
dobrar, to fold, to tum (comer).
doce /l, adj. sweet.
doente, adj. sick, m.
doentio, adj . sickly.
dois, num. two.
domstico, adj . domestico
domingo, m. Sunday.
aos domingos, on Sunday.
do que, conj . than.
dor / /, L pain, grief.

dormir, to sleep, to go to sleep.
duas, L of dois.
dum, duma, contr. of a.
durante, prep. during.
dvida, L doubt.
sem dvida, no doubt.
duvidar, to doubt.
duzep.tos, two hundred.
e, conj . ando
edifcio, m. building.
ela, // pron. she.
elas, // pron. they (t).
ele, // pron. he.
eles, // pron. they.
em, prep. in, on, at (place)
em cima, adv. above, up there .
em cima de, prep. above, over.
em frente, adv. in fcont.
em frente de , prep. in front of.
em vez de, prep. instead of.
embora, //, adv. away
conj. although, even if.
embrulho, m. package.
empregada, f. maid. employee"
emprestar, to lendo
encher (de), to fUI with.
encontrar, to meet, to findo
encontrar com, to run into.
encontrar-se com, to meet (accidental)
encrenca, f. difficulty, mess.
enfim, adv. in short.
engolir, to swallow .
enquanto, conj . while.
enquanto . . . no, until.
por enquanto, for the time being.
ensinar (a), to teach (how to).
ento, adv. then.
entrar (em), to enter
entre, prep. between, among.
entregar, p. p. entregue. to deliver
enxergar, to catch sight of, manage to
see.
errado, adj. incorrect, wrong.
escada, f. stair, ladder.
escndalo, m. loud talk, quarreI.
escola, // f. schooI.
escolher, to choose, select, pick.
escrever, to write
p.p. escrito.
escuro, dark (without light).

escutar, to listen to.
espalhar, to spread, scatter.
espanhol, // Spanish, Spaniard.
espcie, f. kind.
esperar, to hope, to wait, to expecto
esporte, / /, m. sport.
esquecer, to forget.
esquecerse de, to forget (to)
esquina, f. comer.
esse //, L essa // , adj . & pron. that.
estao f., station; season.
estado, m. state.
Estados Unidos, m. pI. United
States.
estar, to be.
estar com, to have.
estar com sono, to be sleepy.
estar em falta, to be out of stock.
estar sem, not to have.
estar sem sono, not to be sleepy.
este //, f. esta //, adj . & pron. this.
estender-se, to extendo
estrada, f. road.
estreito, adj . narrow.
estudante, m. or L, student.
estudar, to study.
existir, to exist.
explicar, to explain.
expor, to expose
faca, f. knife.
fcil, adj . easy; likely .
faculdade, f. college ; school (of a univer
sity)
falar, to speak, to talk.
falar com, to speak to.
falta, f. lack, need, shortage .
estar em falta, to be out of stock.
fazer falta, to be needed, to be
missed.
faltar, to be lacking.
faltar aula, to miss class.
famI1ia, f. farnily.
famoso, adj . famous.
fantasia, f. (Carnival) costume.
fato, m. facto
fazenda, f. farm ; rancho
fazendeiro, m. farmer ; rancher.
1 69
fazer, to do; to make.

fazer anos, to have a birthday.
fazer a barba, to shave.
fazer calor, to be hot (weather).
fazer falta, to be needed.
fazer favor de, please.
fazer frio, to be cold (weather)
fazer um piquenique, to have a picnic.
fazer uma pergunta, to ask a questiono
fazer uma viagem, to take a trip.
fechar, to shut, close.
federal, adj . federal.
feijo, m. beans.
feio, adj. ugly.
feito, p.p. of fazer, made, done.
prep. like.
feliz, adj . happy .
feriado, m. holiday.
frias, f. pI. vacation.
tirar frias, to take a vacation.
festa, ll f. party.
fevereiro, m. February.
ficar, to stay, remain; to be (permanently
located); to become.
ficar noivo (noiva), to get engaged.
fiel, ll adj . faithful.
ftI.ha, f. daughter.
f1lho, m. sono
firme, adj . firm, steady.
flor ll, f. flower, blossom.
fogo ll, pI. fogos l/, fire.
fome, f. hunger.
ter fome, to be hungry.
com fome, hungry.
fora l/, adv. outside, away.
l fora, out there.
c fora, out here.
fora de, prep. outside (of).
formar, to form ; to graduate.
formar-se, to be graduated.
forte, ll, adj . strong.
foto (grafia), f. photo (graph).
fraco, adj . weak.
francs, adj. & n. French (man).
frente, f. front.
em frente de, prep. in front of.
freqncia, f. frequency.
freqentar, to attend (regularly)
freqente, adj. frequent.
fresco l/, adj . cool.
1 70
frio, m. cold.
adj . cold.
ter frio, to be cold.
fazer frio, to be cold (weather).
fritar, to fry .
p . p. fritado, frito.
frito, adj. fried.
fruta, f. fruit.
futebol , ll m. soccer.
galinha, f. hen.
as galinhas, the chickens.
ganhar, to earn (money), to get (a present),
to win (a game).
p. p. ganho.
garom, m. waiter.
garonete , /l f. waitress.
garfo, m. fork.
garoto, ll m. boy.
gastar, to spend (money).
p. p. gasto.
gelo, ll m. ice.
gente, f. people.
a gente, one, they, people.
geografia, f. geography.
geral, adj. general.
geralmente, adv. generally.
giz, m. chalk.
gostar (de), to like, to love.
gosto Il , pI. gostos I l, m. taste, pleasure.
grande, adj. big, large, great.
grosso ll, pI. & f. /l, adj. thick.
grupo, m. group.
guardar, to guard, to keep, put away.
guerra l/, f. war.
h, there is (are); ago.
habitante , m. or f. inhabitant.
haja, subj . of haver.
haver, auxiliary of fut.
hein? adv. Eh?
histria, f. story, history.
hoje, ll adv. today.
hoje noite, tonight.
homem, m. mano
hora, l/ f. hour; o'clock.
horta, l/ f. (vegetable) garden.
igreja, ll f. church.
importante, adj. important.
impor, to impose.
impossvel, adj. impossible.

improvvel, adj . improbable.
incrvel, adj . incredible.
indesejvel, adj. undesirable.
induzir, to induce.
inevitvel, adj . inevitable.
ingls, adj. & n. English (man).
injusto, adj . unjust.
inteiro, adj. entire.
interior, m. interior.
introduzir (em) introduce into, to lead
into.
inverno, ll m. winter.
ir, to go
como vai? How are you?
vou bem. I am well.
irm, f. sister.
irmo, m. brother.
isso, neuter pron. that.
isto, neuter pron. this.
j, adv. already ; immediately.
jaca, f. jack fruit.
janeiro, m. January.
janela, fl f. window.
jantar, m. dinner.
V. to have dinner.
japons, adj. & n. Japanese.
jaqueira, f. jack fruit tree.
jardim, m. garden, lawn, yard.
jeito, m. way, manner.
de jeito que, so, so that.
Joo, m. John.
jogar, to play, to throw, to gamble.
j ogar fora, to throw out.
jogar a bola, to pitch the ball.
jogo I /, pI. I l , m. game.
jornal, m. newspaper.
Jos, m. Joseph.
julho, m. July.
junho, m. June.
juntos, pI. adj., together.
justo, adj. just.
l, adv. there .
para l, there (to that place)
l atrs, back there.
lado, m. side.
do lado de l, on the other side.
lago, m. lake.
lamentvel, adj. lamentable, unfortunate.
lanar, to launch, to throw.

lpis, m. peneiI.
laranja, f. orange.
laranjeira, f. orange tree.
largo, m. (city) square. adj . wide.
lateral, lateral.
lavar (se), to wash.
legume, m. vegetable.
leite, m. milk.
leiteiro, m. milkman.
leitura, f. reading.
lembrar (a), to remindo
lembrar (-se) (de) to remember.
ler, to read.
leste I /, m. east.
a leste de, east of.
levantar, to raise.
levantar (-se) to rise, get up.
levar, to take, carry.
levar tempo, to take time.
leve l/, adj . light (in weight).
de leve , adv. lightly.
lhe, lhes, indirect obj . prons.
to him, them, you, etc.
lio, f. lesson.
ligar, to connect.
ligar a luz, to tum on the light .
ligar o rdio, to tum on the radio.
limpo, adj . clean.
lindo, adj . beautiful.
lngua, f. tongue; language.
livraria, f. bookstore.
livreiro, m. bookseller.
livro, m. book.
lixo, m. trash.
logo ll, adv. soon, immediately.
logo que, conj. as soon as.
at logo, see you soon.
mais logo, later.
loja ll, f. shop, store.
Lojas Brasileiras, variety stores
longe, adv. far away.
longe de, prep. far from.
longo, adj . long (in time)
ao longo de, prep. alongo
louro, adj . blond.
lua, f. moon.
lugar, m. place.
luz, f. light.
171
m, f. of mau, bad.
ma, f. apple.
me , f. mother.
maio, m. May.
mai, m. (woman's) bathing suit,
maior //, adj . larger, greater.
mais, adv. more, mosto
mal , adv. badly, poorly
mal passado, rare (meat).
mala, f. suitcase, trunk.
Mame , Mommy.
mamo, m. papaya.
mando, f. mandona adj . bossy.
mandar, to order, to have (something done),
to sendo
maneira, f. way, manner.
de maneira que, conj . so, so that.
manga, f. mango (fruit).
mangueira, f. mango tree.
manh, f. morning.
de manh, in the morning.
da manh, a.m.
manteiga, f. butter.
mo, f. hand. pI. mos.
mo, by hand.
mquina, f. machine.
mar, m. sea.
marcha. f march (music).
maro, m. March.
Maria, f. Mary.
marrom, adj. maroon, brown,
mas, conj . but.
mata, f. forest.
mato, m. bush, low woody growth.
mau, adj . f. m, bad.
mdico, m. doctor (physician).
medo // , m. fear.
com medo, afraid.
ter medo, be afraid.
meio, adj . half.
meia-noite, f. midnight.
meio-dia, m. noon, midday.
melhor //, adj . better, best
menina, f. girl.
menino, m. boy.
menor //, adj . smaller, littler.
menos, adv. less, fewer, minus.
me, pron. me.
ms, pI . meses, m. month.
mesa / / , f. table.
1 72
mesmo l/, adj . & pron. sarne, self.

adv. really, even.
meu, f. minha, posso pron. my
mexer, to stir, to mix, scramble.
mexido, adj , scrambled.
mil, num. one thousand .
milho, m. million .
milhar, m. (group of) one thousand.
milho, m. corno
mim, pron., obj . of prep. me.
minuto, m. minute.
missa, f. mass (at church).
moa //, f. girl, young woman, "Iady"
modo /f" m. way, manner.
de modo que, conj . so , so that.
montanha, f. mountain.
montar, to ride (a horse).
morango, m. strawberry.
morar, to live, dwell.
moreno, dark (complexion).
morro //, m. hill.
motel //, m. motel.
mudar, to move , to change.
mudar a roupa, to change clothes.
mudar de casa, move away.
mudar-se, to move, change.
muito, adj , much, lots of
adv. very, too (too much).
nem muito, not much.
mulher //, f. woman.
mundo, m. world.
msica, f. musico
na, nas, contr. in the.
nada, pron. nothing.
nadar, to swim.
nalguma parte, somewhere.
namorada, f. girl-friend.
namorado, m. boy-friend.
namorar, to "date," "go with."
no, adv. no, not.
naquele, //, contr. in that.
nascer, to be born.
(plant, sun, etc.) come up.
natural, adj . natural.
necessrio, adj . necessary.
nem, conj . nor.
nem . . . nem, neither nor.
nem muito, not much.
nem sempre, not always.
nenhum, f. nenhuma, adj ., pron.

no, none.
nesse, nessa, contr. in that.
neste, nesta, contr., in this.
nevar, to snow.
neve / /, f. snow.
ningum, pron. no one.
no, nos, contr. in the .
noite, f. night.
boa noite, good night.
hoje noite, tonight.
ontem noite, last night.
de noite, at night.
noiva, f. fiance, bride.
noivo, m. fianc, groom.
nome, m. name.
nono, adj . ninth.
norte //, m. north.
ao norte de, north of.
nos, pron. uso
ns, pron. we ; us (obj . of prep.)
nosso //, poss, pron. ouro
noutra parte, elsewhere.
nove, // num. nine
novecentos, num. nine hundred.
novembro, m. November.
noventa, num. ninety.
novo / / , pI. / /, adj . new; yoling.
nublado, adj . cloudy
num, numa, contr. in a.
nmero, m. number.
nunca, adv. never.
o, os, def. art. the.
obrigado, adj . thanks, thank yOU.
odiar, to hate,
oeste, //, m. west.
a oeste de , west of.
oitavo, adj . eighth.
oitenta, num. eighty.
oito, num. eight.
oitocentos, num. eight hundred.
olhada, f. look.
olhar (para), to look (at).
olho ll, pI. //, m. eye.
onde, adv. where.
nibus, m. bus.
ontem, adv. yesterday.
ontem noite, last night.
opor-se a, to oppose.
o qual, reI pron. which.
o que, interrogo pron. what.

reI. pron. what.
ordem, f. order.
dar ordem de, to order to.
pr em ordem, put in order
rf, f. orphan.
rfo, m. orphan.
organizao, f. organization.
ou, conj . oro
ou . . . ou, either . . or.
outono, m. autumn, falI.
outro, adj., pron. other, another.
outra parte, elsewhere.
outubro, m. October.
ouvir, to hear.
ouvir dizer, to hear (that).
ovo //, pI. //, m. egg.
p, f. spade.
padeiro, m. baker.
pagar, to pay.
p.p. pago.
pai, m. father.
os pais, the parents.
pas, m. country, nation.
palavra, f. word.
palet, m. (suit) coat.
po, pI. pes, m. breado
Papai, Daddy.
papel, l/, m. paper.
par, m. (dancing) partner; pairo
para, prep. for. to, toward, in order to
para que, conj . so that, in order that
parar, to stop.
parecer, to seem, to look like .
parecer (-se) com, to look like.
parente, m. or f. relative .
parque , m. park.
parte, f. part.
alguma parte, somewhere.
outra parte, elsewhere .
nenhuma parte, nowhere .
toda parte, everywhere.
partir, to depart, go away
partir para, to leave for.
Pscoa, f. Easter.
passado, n. & adj . past, last.
passagem, f. passage, ticket.
passar, to passo
passar tempo, to spend time.
pssaro, m. bird.
1 73
passear, to walk, ride, drive, etc.

for pleasure.
passeio, m. walk, ride, drive, etc.
for pleasure.
passo, m. step.
dar um passo, take a step.
pato, m. duck.
patro, m. boss, employer.
patroa, I l, f. boss, employer.
p, foot.
pedao, m. piece.
pedir, to ask for, to beg.
pedir para, to ask to.
pedra l/ , f. stone, rock.
pegar, to catch.
pegar uma doena, to catch a disease.
pegar a bola, to catch the ball.
pelo, pela, l/, contr. by the.
pena, f. trouble, pity.
sentir pena de, to feel sorry for.
pena, f. penpoint.
escrever com pena, to write with peno
pensar (em), to think (of).
Que pensa dele? What do you think
of him?
pentear (-se) , to comb.
pequeno, adj . Jittle (size)., small.
perder, to lose,
perder o trem, to miss the train.
pergunta, f. questiono
fazer uma pergunta, to ask a questiono
perguntar, to ask (question).
permitir, to permit, allow.
perna // , f. leg.
pertencer (a), to belong (to).
perto //, adv. near., nearby.
perto de, prep. near.
pesado, adj . heavy
pssego, m. peach.
pessoa , //, f. person.
peteca //, f. Braz. game , with racket or
hand.
pior //, adj . adv. worse.
piquenique , m. picnic.
piscina, f. swimming pool.
planejar, to plan.
plancie, f. plain.
planta, f. plant.
plantar, to plant, raise (crops).
pobre //, adj . poor.
poder, can, to be able, may.
1 74
pomar, m. archard .
popular, adj . popular, of the people.
pr, to put ; to put on (clothes);
to lay (eggs); to set (table);
to pour (water).
pr-se , to set (sun).
por, prep. for, by, through, along, per.
por que, adv. why.
porque, conj . because.
porta, ll , f. door.
portugus, n., adj . Portuguese.
possvel, adj . possible .
posto l/, f. ll, p.p. of pr.
posto que, conj . although, even if.
pouco, adj. Jittle (quantity)
um pouco, a little (bit).
poucos, few
adv. little ; somewhat.
povo l/, pI. ll, m. people (nation)
praa, f. (city) square.
praia, f. beach.
prato, m. plate, dish.
prazer ll m. pleasure
muito prazer em conhec-lo,
very glad to meet you.
preceder, to precede.
precisar de, to need.
preciso, adj . necessary.
preo l/, m. price.
preferir, to prefer, like better.
prmio, m. prize, premium.
preparar, to prepare, get ready.
presente, m. gift, present.
adj . present.
pressa, l/ , f. haste, hurry.
com pressa, in a hurry, hastily .
prestar ateno, to pay attention.
presunto, m. ham.
preto l/, adj . black.
prima, f. cousin.
primavera, f. spring (season).
primeiro, adj . , adv. first.
primo, m. cousin.
procurar, to look for ; to try to.
produzir, to produce.
professor, ll, m. teacher, professor.
professora ll, f. teacher, professor.
profisso, f. profession.
profissional, adj. professional.
proibir, to prohibit, forbid.
promover, to promote.
propor, to propose , suggest.

prova, //, f. test; proof.
prximo (x=/sl), adj . next, nearest.
prximo de , prep. near.
quadro, m. picture , painting.
quadro-negro, //, m. blackboard.
qual, interrogo pron. which, what.
o qual, reI. pron. which.
quando, adv., conj . when.
quanto, adj., pron. how much.
quarenta, num. forty.
Quaresma, l/, f. Lent.
quarta-feira, L Wednesday.
quarto, m. quarter; bedroom.
adj . fourth.
quase, adv. almost.
quatro, num. four.
quatrocentos, num. four hundred.
que, conj . that.
interrogo pron. & adj., what.
reI. pron. who, which, that.
conj . than.
quebrar, to break.
queimar, to bum.
quem, reI. pron. he who, the one who.
interrogo pron. who.
quente, adj. warm, hot.
querer, to wish, want.
quer? querem? will you?
querer dizer, to mean.
eu queria saber, I wonder
quiabo, m. okra.
qui, adv. perhaps.
quinhentos, num. five hundred.
quinta-feira, f. Thursday.
quinto, adj . fifth.
rdio, m. radio.
raiva, f. anger, rage.
ter raiva de, to be angry ato
rapaz, m. (older) boy, young man, fellow.
rasgado, a dj . tom, ripped.
razo, f. reason.
ter razo, to be right.
receber, to receive, get.
recompor, to recompose.
rede l/, f. net, network; hammock.
reduzir, to reduce.
refeio, L meal (e.g., dinner).
rei, m. king.
relgio, m. watch. clock.

repor, to put back.
reproduz, to reproduce .
responder (a), to answer.
restaurante /t/, m. restaurant.
reunio, f. meeting, reunion.
reunir-se, to meet, gather.
rico, adj. rich.
rio, m. river.
rir, to laugh.
rir-se de, to laugh ato
roa, //, L, (cultivated) field; the
country.
roda, //, f., wheel ; group of friends.
roupa, L clothes
roupa de banho, swimming clothes.
rua, f. street.
ruim, adj . bad, "terrible,"
poor (quality).
sbado, m. Saturday.
saber, to know (fact), to know how;
to find out.
eu sei l. I don't know.
saco, m. sack.
sair, to go out, come out.
sair de, to leave .
sal, m. salto
sala, L room.
sala de aula, classroom.
saltar, to jump, jump down, get off.
samba, m. samba (Braz. music)
sanduche, m. sandwich.
sapateiro, m. shoemaker, shoe seller.
sapato, m. shoe.
saudade, f. longing.
ter saudade de, to miss (person).
sade, f. health.
se, reflexo pron. yourself, himself,
yourselves, themselves, etc.
se, conj . if
se . . . no, unIess.
sede I /, L thirst.
ter sede, to be thirsty .
sede //, f. seat, base.
seguinte, adj . following.
seguir, to follow, to go on.
segunda-feira, f. Monday.
segundo, adj . second.
prep. according to.
seguro, adj . sure, certain.
175
seis, num. six.

seiscentos, num. six hundred.
selva, // , f. jungle.
sem, prep. without.
sem que, conj. without.
semana, f. week.
sempre, adv. always.
sej a , l/, preso subj . of ser.
senhor, //, m. Mr., sir.
o senhor, you.
senhora //, f. Mrs., ma'am.
a senhora, you.
senhorita, f. Miss, ma'am.
sentar (se), to sit down.
sentir, to feel; to be sorry ;
to hear (noise); to smell (odor).
sentirse bem, to feel well.
ser, to be.
serra, //, f. mountain range.
sessenta, num. sixty.
sete, l/, num. seven.
setecentos, num. seven hundred.
setembro, m. September.
setenta, num. seventy.
stimo, adj . seventh.
seu, f. sua, adj . your.
sextafeira, l/, f. Friday.
sexto, //, adj . sixth.
si, pron. obj . of prep., himself, etc.
sim, adv. yes (used mostly for emphasis.)
simptico, adj . nice, agreeable .
simples, adj . simple.
situao, f. situation.
s, adj . alone.
adv. only ; just.
sobre l/, prep. on (top of);
concerning.
scio, m. member.
sol I /, m. sun.
dia de sol, sunny day.
soldado, m. soldier.
sonhar (com), to dream (about)
sonho, m. dream.
sono, m. sleep; sleepiness.
ter sono, to be sleepy.
pegar no sono, go to sleep.
sorrir, to smile.
sorte l/, m., (good) luck.
ter sorte, to be lucky.
sorvete l/ , m. ice cream.
sotaque, m. (foreign) accent.
1 76
sozinho /s/, adj . alone.

sua, f. of seu, your (s).
subir, to go up, come up.
preo subiu, the price has risen.
sujo, adj . dirty.
sul, m. south .
ao sul de, south of.
sumir, to disappear.
ele sumiu, he's gone .
surpreender, to surprise.
tal, adj . such a.
talvez, //, adv. perhaps, maybe.
tambm, adv. also, too.
tambm no, not either, neither.
tanto, adj . , adv. so much, as much.
to, adv. soo
tarde, f. afternoon.
boa tarde, good afternoon.
de tarde, in the afternoon.
adv. late.
txi, m. taxi.
teatro, m. theater.
telefone, m. telephone.
televiso, f. television.
temer, to fear.
tempo, m. time ; weather.
tentar, to try (to).
ter, to have .
tem, there is (are).
ter azar, to be unlucky.
ter calor, to be warm (person).
ter fome, to be hungry.
ter frio, to be cold.
ter medo (de), to be afraid (of).
ter raiva (de), to be mad (at).
ter razo, to be right.
ter sede, to be thirsty.
ter sono, to be sleepy.
ter sorte, to be lucky.
ter vergonha, to be ashamed.
ter vontade (de), to feel like.
ter que (de), to have to.
ter trabalho para fazer, to have work
to do.
terafeira, l/, f. Tuesday.
terceiro, adj . third.
terra, //, f. land; earth.
territrio, m. territory .
tia, f. aunt.
time, m. team.
tio, m. uncle.
tirar, to take off, take out.
tirar uma foto, to take a picture.
tirar a mesa, to c1ear off the table.
Titia, f. Aunty.
Titio, m. Uncle.
toalha, f. towel.
toalha de mesa, f. tablecloth.
tocar, to touch, to ring (bell),
to play (music).
tocar piano, to play the piano.
tomar, to take (possession);
to accept; to drink.
tomar banho, to take a bath.
tomara, I wish; would (that).
trabalhador, m. & adj . worker.
trabalhar, to work.
tratar, to treat.
trazer, to bring.
trem, m. train.
trs, num. three.
treze, !! , num. thirteen.
trezentos, num. three hundred.
trinta, num. thirty.
tudo, pron. aU, everything.
turma, f. c1ass (people); the "gang" .
ultimamente, adv. lately.
ltimo, adj. last (in a series).
um, uma, indef. art. & num. one.
universidade, f. university.
urgente, adj. urgent.
usar, to use, to wean (c1othes, hair, etc.)
til, adj. useful
vaca, f. cow.
valer, to be worth.
v;ller a pena, to be worth while .
vamos, form of ir, let's.
vamos? shall we?
variar, to vary,
vrios, adj . several.
vazio, adj . empty.

velho, l/ , adj . old.
vender, to sell.
ventar, to blow.
vento, m. wind.
ver, to see.
ver televiso, to look at TV.
vero, m. summer ..
verdade, f. truth.
verde, adj . green.
vergonha, f. shame; bashfulness.
ter vergonha, to be ashamed (bashful).
vestido, m. dress.
vestir-se, to dress, to put on.
vez, l/, f. time (occasion).
em vez de, prep. instead of.
de uma vez, once and for ali.
desta vez, this time.
viagem, f. trip, voyage.
viajar, to traveI.
vindo, p.p. of vir, come.
vinte, num. twenty.
vir, to come.
vrgula, f. comma.
visita, f. visit ; visitor.
de visita, on a visito
visto, p.p. of ver, to see.
vitela, Il , f. veal.
viver, to Iive, to be alive.
voc, vocs, pron. you.
volta, ll, f. tum ; retum; stroll.
dar uma volta, to take a str01l.
est de volta, he's back.
voltar, to retum, come back.
vontade, f. wish, desire, will.
ter vontade de, to want to.
voz, ll, f. voice .
xcara, f. cup.
xicrinha, f. demi-tasse.
zero l!, num. zero.
177
Index
Numbers refer to pages .

Jt (preposition), 30, 7 1
Imperative mood, 25
Imperfect: indica tive, 67; subjunctive, 1 1 1
ImpersonaI subject, 92
ImpersonaI expressions: with subjunctive,
1 07 ; with infinitive, 1 07
Indefinite artic1e, 1 7, 23
Indirect object, 50, 55, 63
Infinitive, 1 4 ; perfect, 1 23 ; personaI,
96, 97 ; with impersonaI expressions, 1 07
Adjectives: comparison of, 58, 59 ; demon

strative, 38; ferninine forms of, 2 1 ;
plurals of, 20; possessive, 33, 34;
radical-changing, 97
Adverbs: comparison of, 58, 59; formation
from adjectives, 2 1
Artic1es: definite, 1 1 , 30, 42; indefinite,
1 7, 23
A t (preposition), 7 1
Augmentatives, 1 3 5
Ir: forms of, 1 46; use of, 29
Caber: forms of, 1 44, use of, 66
Ler, forms of, 1 46
Cardinal numbers, 75, 92

Comparison of adjectives and adverbs,
58, 59
Conditional tense, 1 1 8
Conjugation: regular 1 39, 141 ; irregular,
144-148
Contractions, 1 2, 1 7, 38-42
Crer, forms of, 144
Dar: forms of, 144 ; use of, 45

Days of the week, 35
De (preposition), 7 1
Definite artic1e, 1 1 , 30; for possessive
adjective, 42
Demonstrative adjective and pronoun, 38
Dirninutives, 1 3 5
Dizer: forms of, 1 4 5 ; use of, 57
Let, translations of, 1 3 5

Months o f the year, 77
Negation, 1 8, 39
No, equivaIents of, 1 8
Nouns : gender of, 1 1 ; pluraIs of, 1 1 , 1 5 , 20;
possessive of, 1 2; radicaI-changing, 97
Numbers : cardinal, 75, 92; ordinal, 93
Object: pronoun, 27, 50, 55, 58; of pre
position, 63 ; position of, 50, 55, 1 1 8,
1 30; traditional forms, 1 49, 1 50; in
direct, 50, 5 5 , 63
One (impersonal subject), 92
Ordinal numbers, 93
Ouvir, forms of, 1 46
Em (preposition), 1 2, 72
Emphatic affirmative and negative, 1 8
Para (preposition), 30, 79
Estar: forms of, 1 4 5 ; use of, 22, 38
Participle : past, 1 02; irregular, 149

Passive voice , 1 03
Pedir, forms of, 146
Perfect tenses, 1 23 , 1 24
PersonaI infinitive, 96, 97
PluraIs : of nouns, 1 1 , 1 5 , 20; of
adjectives, 20
Poder: forms of, 146; use of, 49
Por (preposition), 42, 80
Pr: forms of, 1 46 ; use of, 54; derivatives
of, 54
Fazer: forms of, 1 4 5 ; use of, 38

Feminine of adjectives, 2 1
Future: indicative, 1 1 7, subjunctive, 54, 5 5
Gender: of nouns, 1 1 ; o f adjectives, 2 1
Haver: forms of, 1 4 5 ; use of, 1 1 7 ; as auxiliary

of future, 1 1 7 ; as auxiliary of conditionaI,
1 1 8 ; as auxiliary of pluperfect, 1 4 1
1 78
Possessive : of nouns,
12;
of adjectives,
33, 34, 42
Ser:
147; and estar, 22

84
Subjunctive : present, 83, 1 0 1 ; imperfect,
1 1 1 ; future, 54, 55, 1 1 2, 1 3 1 , 1 34;
perfect tenses of, 1 23, 1 24; i n adverb
clauses; 54, 1 1 2 ; in relative clauses,
1 3 1 ; in indirect commands, 1 3 5 ; of
disbelief, 1 07 ; of emotion, 1 02 ; of
wiU , 84; with impersonal expres
sions, 1 07 ; with relative adverbs,
1 34 ; with se, 1 25 ; with talvez, 1 34
forms of,
Spelling changes,
7 1 , 72, 79, 80, 96, 97; with

58
Present indicative, 1 4, 2 5 ; for the future, 49
Preterit indicative , 4 1 , 46
Progressive forms of verb, 1 7 , 68, 85
Pronouns, demonstrative, 38; indirect
object, 5 5
Pronouns, personal : indirect object, 50,
55, 63 ; object of verb, 27, 50, 55, 5 8 ;
object of preposition, 6 3 ; old or
literary forms, 1 49 ; position relative
to verb, 1 1 8, 1 3 0; subject, 1 4, 26, 30
Pronouns, possessive, 33, 34, 42
Pronouns, rela tive 1 30
Prepositions,
infinitive,
Que and qual, 6 3

Querer: forms of, 1 47 ; use
Questions, 1 7, 26
forms of,
use of,
of,
auxiliary verb,
141;
Than, equivalen ts of,

Time of day,
59
76
of,
148
25, 4 1
87, 1 4 1 ;
97 ; in adjectives, 97
Reflexive verbs, 9 1 , 92
Relative pronouns, 1 30
Requesting assent (no ), 26
Rir, forms of, 1 47
in nouns,
of,
1 48 ; as
33
Trazer, forms
Radical changing: in verbs, 46,
Saber: forms of, 1 47 ; use

Se (conjunction), 1 23
Ter:
Valer, forms of, 148

Ver: forms of, 1 48; use of, 62
Verbs: ending in -air, 1 07 ; in -duzir, 1 23 ; in
-ear, 1 29 ; in -uir and -oer, 1 29; regular
conjugation of, 1 39 ; irregular conju
gation of, 144- 148; radical-changing,
46, 87, 1 4 1 ; reflexive, 9 1 , 92; spelling
changes in, 84
Vir: forms of, 1 48; use of, 7 5
66
1 4,
26, 27 ; old informal, 1 50
We ather,
38
Second person pronouns: informal,
27;
formal,
Yes, Portuguese equivalents of,
18
1 79

Grammar of Spoken Brazilian Portuguese

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Grammar of Spoken Brazilian Portuguese

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

A Grammar of Spoken

Copyright 1974 Vanderbilt University Press

A grammar of spoken Brazilian Portuguese.

2. Portuguese language-Spoken Portuguese. 3. Portu

Printed in the United States of America

1 972-73 used the prelirninary draft and

helped me greatly by catching inconsistencies, by making suggestions for explanations and

5. Contractions of de and em with the definite article

..................... ........... . . .... . ... 11

4. The definite article

7. The possessive of nouns .

10. Conjugation of estudar with pronoun subjects .............. ......... 15

12. Plurals of nouns in -r, -s, and -z ........................ ......... 15

14. Questions without interrogative words

16. Contractions with indefinite articles

18. Equivalents of yes and no

19. Emphatic affirmative and negative answers ............... . ..... . ... 18

Plurais of nouns and adjectives

Present indicative, three conjugations

Irregular verb ter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

58. Poder in the preterit

.. . .. .... .. ........ .. .... ....... . ..... 49

............ ....... .. .. ... 50

63. Uses of pr. ............. ..... ... ................ .. ..... 54

66. Uses of future subjunctive

.. ........ . .... .... ...... .. ... 54

. . ...... ....... .. ................. 55

70. Verb form following a preposition

71. Personal pronoun direct objects, third person

73. Irregular comparison, adjectives and adverbs

76. Uses of ver ............................................

77. Pronoun objects of prepositions ..............................

82. Imperfect indicative

..... ...... .. ...... ...... .. ..... .. . ... 67

83. Verbs irregular in the imperfect .

92. Cardinal numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 5

129. Conditional tense

130. Pronoun objects with future and conditional

133. English equivalents of perfect tenses

136. Verbs in -uirand -oer

137. Position of object pronouns in perfect tenses

139. Subjunctive in rela tive c1auses

142. Subjunctive in indirect commands

144. Diminutives and augmentatives

146. Forms of ter used as auxiliaries of the perfect tenses

149. Special types of verbs

173. Irregular past participles

174. Literary personal pronoun objects, third person

147. Forms of haverused as auxiliaries of the perfect tenses

175. Pronouns of the old second person .............................150

Rules for Writing Brazilian Portuguese

a fmal consonant followed by a word beginning with a vowel:

2. When a consonant is followed by

a-bro, du-p/o, i-gua/.

both letters go with the following

pronunciation. But dj is separated in writing.

caj, Pel, ingls, tambm, vintns.

Over the stressed vowel of a word ending in

u, i, or a diphthong, or in a consonant other

but not stressed on the last syllable:

pendncia, cmara, xicara, Mrio, sculo, rvore.

accent is written over elos e o when it is followed immediately by rIDalo:

sponding singular form has the vowel

ris, cu, di.